Architectura

SPECIFICATION of work to be done and materials to be used in carrying out the works shown on the accompanying drawings

OTAGO SETTLERS MUSEUM STAGE FOUR and FIVE (project name)

2 Anzac Avenue DUNEDIN (project address)

Dunedin City Council (owners name) Job Number: 2374 Date: 22 AUGUST 2011 TENDER

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1012 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2

1012 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1012 TABLE OF CONTENTS .................................................................................................... 2 1101 TENDER FORM ............................................................................................................... 4 1220 PROJECT ......................................................................................................................... 6 1222 PROJECT PERSONNEL .................................................................................................. 8 1231NA NZIA SCC CONTRACT ................................................................................................... 11 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS ............................................................................... 12 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................ 14 1234 DOCUMENTATION ......................................................................................................... 15 1235 SHOP DRAWINGS .......................................................................................................... 19 1237 WARRANTIES ................................................................................................................. 20 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT ............................................................................................. 23 1238 AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION ........................................................................................ 26 1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................... 28 1240 ESTABLISHMENT ........................................................................................................... 30 1247 TRAFFIC CONTROL ....................................................................................................... 32 1250 TEMPORARY WORKS & SERVICES ............................................................................. 34 1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................. 38 1270 CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................................ 42 2111 DEMOLITION .................................................................................................................. 47 2133 TEMPORARY SUPPORT TO EXISTING STRUCTURES ............................................... 51 2241 EXCAVATION H&R ......................................................................................................... 54 2322 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS H&R ........................................................................ 55 3100 CONCRETE H&R ............................................................................................................ 56 3131 PRECAST CONCRETE, H&R ......................................................................................... 57 3320 CONCRETE MASONRY H&R ......................................................................................... 58 3361 STONEWORK ................................................................................................................. 59 3411 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK H&R ................................................................................. 64 3411D DHS PURLINS AND GIRTS H&R .................................................................................... 65 3821 TIMBER FRAMING .......................................................................................................... 66 4121 SELLEYS LIQUID APPLIED VAPOUR BARRIER ........................................................... 70 4161 WRAPS, UNDERLAYS AND DPC ................................................................................... 73 4231HF JAMES HARDIE TITAN FACADE CLADDING ................................................................ 77 4251 ALUMINIUM COMPOSITE SOFFIT ................................................................................. 81 4337 PLYWOOD ROOFING AND FLOORING SUBSTRATE .................................................. 87 4421N NURALITE ROOFING ..................................................................................................... 90 4521AC COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS AND DOORS .................................................. 95 4554 SOLARTUBE SKYLIGHTS ............................................................................................ 104 4571D DORMA HORIZON AUTOMATIC DOORS .................................................................... 107 4611ME METRO GLASSTECH GLAZING .................................................................................. 110 4711 THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC INSULATION ................................................................... 114 4811S SIKA SEALANTS ........................................................................................................... 118 4821 FLASHINGS .................................................................................................................. 123 4924 STAINLESS STEEL METALWORK ............................................................................... 126 5112 FIBROUS PLASTER AND STO CEILINGS AND WALL LININGS ................................. 131 5151 INTERNAL TRIM ........................................................................................................... 135 5172D DECORTECH ACOUSTIC AND DECORATIVE PANELS ............................................. 138 5231 INTERIOR DOORS ....................................................................................................... 142 5311F FORMAN SUSPENDED TILE CEILING SYSTEMS ...................................................... 146 5511 JOINERY AND CABINETRY FIXTURES ....................................................................... 150 5521 HARDWARE .................................................................................................................. 151 5811 SIGNS AND DISPLAYS ................................................................................................ 153 6221 FLOOR AND WALL TILING........................................................................................... 154 6312 SOLID TIMBER FLOORS .............................................................................................. 158 6411J JACOBSEN VINYL SURFACING .................................................................................. 163 6700R PAINTING GENERAL .................................................................................................... 167 6711R PAINTING EXTERIOR –RESENE AND NYALIC ........................................................... 173 6721R PAINTING INTERIOR .................................................................................................... 175 7310 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM FPE .................................................................................. 177 7352 AUTOMATIC FIRE AND SMOKE ALARM SYSTEM FPE ............................................. 178

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1012 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3

7411 STASINLESS STEEL RAINWATER HEADS AND DOWN PIPES ................................. 179 7431 DRAINAGE - MSS ......................................................................................................... 182 7513 CENTRAL HEATING SYSTEMS - MSS ........................................................................ 183 7702 ELECTRICAL - MCL&ASSOC ....................................................................................... 184 8222 ASPHALTIC PAVING .................................................................................................... 185 8231 BASALT PAVING LANDSCAPING ................................................................................ 188

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1101 TENDER FORM Page 4

1101 TENDER FORM To: DUNEDIN CITY COUNCIL Care of: Baker Garden Architects Ltd Postal: P O Box 203 Street: 5th Floor 7 Bond Street DUNEDIN Email: [email protected] Facsimile: 477 5212 Contractor:

………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Tender for: ~ Location: ~ I/we offer to carry out the whole of the contract works in accordance with the tender

documents for the sum of:

………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

(In words) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Amount excluding Goods & Services Tax: $………………………………….. Goods & Services Tax: $………………………………….. Total including Goods & Services Tax $………………………………….. 1. I/we will achieve practical completion in …………………………

weeks/working days from the date of possession of the site 2. I/we acknowledge receipt of notices to tenderers numbered:

……………to…………… and have allowed for these notices in our tender.

3. I/we confirm we have or will arrange and maintain public liability

insurance in the joint names of the owner and the contractor until the contract works are completed and the defects liability period has ended.

4. Additional information requested in the contract conditions concerning

the following is attached to this tender form: - Tender summary - List of proposed subcontracts and subcontractors - Details of margins applying to monetary allowances - Hourly charge rates Tenderer:

………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

(Name)

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1101 TENDER FORM Page 5

Signed: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

(For the tenderer) (Date) Position:

………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

(Capacity of signatory) Address:

………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

(Street) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. (Postal) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. (Telephone) (Facsimile) (Mobile) (Email)

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1220 PROJECT Page 6

1220 PROJECT 1. GENERAL This general section describes the project including: - A description of the work - Site description, features and restrictions 1.1 READ ALL SECTIONS TOGETHER Read all general sections together with all other sections. Description of the work 1.2 SCOPE OF THE WORK The project is Stage Four and Five of the redevelopment of the Otago Settlers Museum. Stage Four includes the construction of a New Foyer and Entrance to the Museum. Stage

Five includes the construction of a new Viewing Tower. Both stages to be integrated with the existing Museum.

The project also requires the installation of services and connection to existing equipment

in the Existing Museum Plant Rooms. The Museum buildings will be occupied by the Otago Settlers Museum through out the development.

The documents require two tenders to be submitted ONE; for Stage Four to proceed on its own TWO; for Stage Four and Five to be built together. Site 1.3 SITE The site consists of: 2 Anzac Avenue is the triangular site adjacent to the

Museums Burnside Building and the Stage One Storage Facility and Plant Room. As shown on drawing nos. A10 and A11 Series Plans 1.4 LEGAL DESCRIPTION The site of the works, the street address and the legal description are shown on the

drawings. 2 Anzac Avenue Dunedin Sec 3, SO 24068 CT 15C/428, Val Ref 27170-93503 1.5 EXISTING BUILDINGS Existing buildings consist of: JA locomotive Building will be removed by others. Refer to drawing(s) no(s): A10 and A11 Series Plans 1.6 EXISTING SERVICES The following are the network utility services: Electrical: ~ Telecommunication: ~ Water: ~ Gas: ~ Stormwater: ~ Foul water: ~ The services are also shown on drawing(s) no(s) ~. 1.7 SITE FEATURES ~ Site environment – Wind

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1220 PROJECT Page 7

1.8 DESIGN PARAMETERS – NON SPECIFIC DESIGN The design wind pressures are to NZS 3604, Table 5.1 up to and including Very High

Wind Zone. Building wind zone ~ (refer to NZS 3604, table 5.1) 1.9 DESIGN PARAMETERS – SPECIFIC DESIGN The design wind pressures are to AS/NZS 1170.2. SLS ~ Pa ULS ~ Pa Site environment – Durability 1.10 EXPOSURE ZONE The exposure zone is to NZS 3604, Section 4 Durability, 4.2 Classification of exposure

zones. The site zone is: ~ Site environment – Seismic 1.11 EARTHQUAKE ZONE The zone is to NZS 3604, Section 5 Bracing design, 5.3 Earthquake bracing demand. The earthquake zone is: ~ Archaeological discovery 1.12 ANTIQUITIES AND ITEMS OF VALUE Report the finding of any fossils, antiquities and other items of value, to the Contract

Administrator. All to remain undisturbed until approval is given for removal. Pre-1900, items or evidence of human activity on the site, come under the Historic Places

Trust Act 1993. If such items or evidence is discovered work must stop immediately and the Contract Administrator must be notified immediately. The site maybe classified as an Archaeological Site under the Act, and the Contract Administrator or Owner must contact the NZ Historic Places Trust for authority to proceed.

Post-1900 items remain the property of the owner, pre-1900 items may remain the

property of the owner or the Crown subject to what is found. Known archaeological information relating to this site includes the following: - ~

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1222 PROJECT PERSONNEL Page 8

1222 PROJECT PERSONNEL 1. GENERAL This general section provides a list of the parties who are involved with the project.

Communications to these personnel are to be sent to them at the address as listed. Refer to the construction contract for:

- the roles that they have under the contract; and - address details for notices being given under the contract. Principal 1.1 PRINCIPAL Name: Dunedin city Council Postal: P O Box 5045, DUNEDIN Street: 50 The Octagon , DUNEDIN Telephone: 477 4000 Facsimile: ~ Person: Graeme Hall Name: Otago Settlers Museum Postal: P O Box 5045, DUNEDIN Street: 50 The Octagon , DUNEDIN Telephone: 474 2729 Facsimile: 474 2727 Person: Bronwyn Simes Contractor 1.2 COMPANY Name: ~ Postal: ~ Street: ~ Telephone: ~ Facsimile: ~ Person: ~ Mobile: ~ E-mail: ~ 1.3 CONTRACT MANAGER Person: ~ Mobile: ~ Telephone: ~ Facsimile: ~ E-mail: ~ 1.4 SITE FOREMAN Person: ~ Mobile: ~ Telephone: ~ Facsimile: ~ E-mail: ~ Consultants 1.5 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR Person: ~ Mobile: ~ E-mail: ~ Practice: ~ Postal: ~ Street: ~


Telephone: ~ Facsimile: ~ 1.6 ARCHITECT Practice: Baker Garden Architects Ltd Postal: ~ Street: ~ Telephone: ~ Facsimile: ~ Person: ~ Mobile: ~ E-mail: ~ 1.7 DESIGNER Practice: ~ Postal: ~ Street: ~ Telephone: ~ Facsimile: ~ Person: ~ Mobile: ~ E-mail: ~ 1.8 LICENSED CADASTRAL SURVEYOR Practice: ~ Postal: ~ Street: ~ Telephone: ~ Facsimile: ~ Person: ~ Mobile: ~ E-mail: ~ 1.9 QUANTITY SURVEYOR Practice: ~ Postal: ~ Street: ~ Telephone: ~ Facsimile: ~ Person: ~ Mobile: ~ E-mail: ~ 1.10 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER Practice: ~ Postal: ~ Street: ~ Telephone: ~ Facsimile: ~ Person: ~ Mobile: ~ E-mail: ~ 1.11 MECHANICAL ENGINEER Practice: ~ Postal: ~ Street: ~ Telephone: ~ Facsimile: ~ Person: ~ Mobile: ~ E-mail: ~


1.12 ELECTRICAL ENGINEER Practice: ~ Postal: ~ Street: ~ Telephone: ~ Facsimile: ~ Person: ~ Mobile: ~ E-mail: ~ 1.13 HYDRAULIC ENGINEER Practice: ~ Postal: ~ Street: ~ Telephone: ~ Facsimile: ~ Person: ~ Mobile: ~ E-mail: ~ Territorial Authority 1.14 BUILDING CONSENT AUTHORITY Name: ~ Postal: ~ Street: ~ Telephone: ~ Facsimile: ~ Person: ~ Mobile: ~ E-mail: ~ 1.15 BUILDING CERTIFIER Name: ~ Postal: ~ Street: ~ Telephone: ~ Facsimile: ~ Person: ~ Mobile: ~ E-mail: ~

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1231NA NZIA SCC CONTRACT Page 11

1231NA NZIA SCC CONTRACT 1. GENERAL This general section refers to requirements relating to the New Zealand Institute of

Architects Standard Conditions of Contract NZIA SCC 2011 under which this work will be constructed.

1.1 THE ARCHITECT The architect means the Architect practice named in NZIA SCC 2011, Schedule B1

Specific conditions. They are referred to in this specification as the Contract administrator.

1.2 PRINCIPAL SUPPLY ITEMS Refer to NZIA SCC 2011, Schedule B Specific conditions, rule 8.1 Principal supply

items, and NZIA SCC Standard conditions rule 8.1 Contractor must supply all requirements.

1.3 ITEMS PROVIDED BY OTHERS ~ 1.4 NOMINATED SUBCONTRACTORS Refer to NZIA SCC 2011, Schedule B1 Specific conditions, rule 8.3 Nominated

subcontractors, and NZIA SCC Standard conditions rule 8.3 Nominated subcontractors.

1.5 SEPARATE CONTRACTORS Refer to NZIA SCC 2011, Schedule B1, rule 8.4 Separate contractors, and NZIA SCC

Standard conditions rule 8.4 Principal can engage other people. 1.6 MONETARY ALLOWANCES Refer to NZIA SCC 2011, Schedule B1 Specific conditions rule 10.1 Monetary

allowances, and NZIA SCC Standard conditions rule 10.1 Monetary allowances. 1.7 INCONSISTENCIES IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Refer to NZIA SCC 2011 Standard conditions rule 2.2, Inconsistencies in Contract

Documents, for the method of handling inconsistencies, errors or omissions.

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS Page 12

1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS 1. GENERAL This general section relates to interpretation and definitions that are used in this

specification. 1.1 DEFINITIONS Required: Required by the documents, or by a statutory authority. Proprietary: Identifiable by naming the manufacturer, supplier, installer, trade

name, brand name, catalogue or reference number. Provide and fix: "Provide" or "fix" or "supply" or "fix" if used separately mean provide

and fix unless explicitly stated otherwise. Review: Review by the contract administrator is for general compliance only.

Review does not remove the need for the contractor to comply with the stated requirements, details and specifications of the manufacturers and suppliers of individual components, materials and finishes. Neither can the review be construed as authorising departures from the contract documents.

Working day: Working day means a calendar day other than any Saturday, Sunday, public holiday or any day falling within the period from 24 December to 5 January, both days inclusive, irrespective of the days on which work is actually carried out.

1.2 PERSONNEL Owner: The person defined as "owner" in the New Zealand Building Code. Principal: The person defined as "principal" in the conditions of contract. Contractor: The person contracted by the principal to carry out the contract. Contract administrator: The person appointed by the principal to administer the contract on

the principal’s behalf. It includes the architect, engineer, designer, project manager or other person so appointed. Where no person has been appointed by the Principal, it means the Principal or the Principal’s representative.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS The following abbreviations are used throughout the specification: AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association AS Australian Standard AS/NZS Joint Australian/New Zealand Standard ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWCINZ Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries of New Zealand Inc BCA Building Consent Authority BRANZ Building Research Association of New Zealand BS British Standard CSIRO Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organisation HERA Heavy Engineering Research Association LBP Licensed Building Practitioner MPNZA Master Painters New Zealand Association Inc NZBC New Zealand Building Code NZS New Zealand Standard NZS/AS Joint New Zealand/Australian Standard NZTA New Zealand Transport Agency (previously TNZ) NUO Network Utility Operator SARNZ Scaffolding and Rigging Association New Zealand Inc TA Territorial Authority TNZ Transit New Zealand (Transit New Zealand is now New Zealand

Transport Agency NZTA, some specifications are still prefixed TNZ) 1.4 DEFINED WORDS Words defined in the conditions of contract, New Zealand Standards, or other reference

documents, to have the same interpretation and meaning when used in their lower case, title case or upper case form in the specification text.

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS Page 13

1.5 WORDS IMPORTING PLURAL AND SINGULAR Where the context requires, words importing singular only, also include plural and vice

versa.

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS Page 14

1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS 1. GENERAL This general section relates to other documents referred to in this specification. 1.1 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS Throughout this specification, reference is made to various New Zealand Building Code

Compliance Documents (NZBC __), acceptable solutions (__ AS_) and verification methods (__ VM_) for criteria and/or methods used to establish compliance with the New Zealand Building Code.

Reference is also made to various standards produced by Standards New Zealand (NZS,

AS/NZS, NZS/AS), overseas standards and to listed Acts, Regulations and various industry codes of practice and practice guides. The latest edition (including amendments and provisional editions) at the date of this specification applies unless stated otherwise.

It is the responsibility of the contractor to be familiar with the materials and expert in the

techniques quoted in these publications. Documents cited both directly and within other cited publications are deemed to form part

of this specification. However, this specification takes precedence in the event of it being at variance with the cited documents.

1.2 DOCUMENTS Documents referred to in the GENERAL sections are: NZBC F4/AS1 Safety from falling NZBC F5/AS1 Construction and demolition hazards AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind loads NZS 3109 Concrete construction NZS 3114 Specification for concrete surface finishes NZS 3404:1997 Steel structures standard NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3604:1999 Timber framed buildings NZS 4210 Masonry construction: Materials and workmanship NZS 6803 Acoustics - Construction Noise Building Act 2004 Building Regulations 1992 Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992 Health and Safety in Employment Regulations 1995 New Zealand Building Code Historic Places Act 1993 Resource Management Act 1991 Smoke-free Environments Act 1990 OSH Guidelines for the provision of facilities and general safety in the

construction industry SARNZ Best practice guideline for scaffolding in New Zealand

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 1234 DOCUMENTATION Page 15

1234 DOCUMENTATION 1. GENERAL This general section relates to documentation required by the Territorial Authority/Building

Consent Authority for compliance with the New Zealand Building Code. It also includes documentation relating to:

- Substitutions - Manufacturers documents Building Consent Authority documentation 1.1 BUILDING CONSENT Obtain the original or copies of the building consent forms and documents from the owner

and keep them on site. Liaise with the Building Consent Authority for all notices to be given and all inspections required during construction to ensure compliance. Return the consent form and documents to the owner on completion.

1.2 BUILDING CONSENT COMPLIANCE It is an offence under the Building Act 2004 to carry out any work not in accordance with

the building consent. - The resolution of matters concerning building code compliance to be referred to the

contract administrator for a direction in writing and then to the Building Consent Authority for consent.

- Where any alteration is requested by the territorial authority or any other authority, do not undertake such alteration until the matter has been referred to the contract administrator for direction.

1.3 PROJECT PERSONNEL Provide names and contact detail of the contractor’s key personnel and tradespersons

who are involved with the project. Provide the names in the form required in the general section of the specification. Review the list once a month and reissue it if changes have been made.

1.4 KEY PERSONNEL Provide names and contact detail of key personnel. Provide names, registrations

numbers (where appropriate) and contact detail of key personnel that are required by the Building Consent Authority as part of the application for the Code Compliance Certificate.

Include the following as applicable: - Site LBP - Carpenter - Registered drainlayer - Registered plumber - Registered gasfitter - Registered electrician - Concrete foundation walls and concrete slab-on-ground constructor - Concrete or timber pile foundations constructor - Brick / masonry veneer - Bricklayer / Blocklayer - Structural masonry - Bricklayer / Blocklayer - Concrete / clay tile roofer - Profiled metal roofer and/or wall cladding installer - Metal tile roofer - Membrane roofer - Torch on membrane roofer - Liquid membrane roofer - Shingle / slate roofer - Solid plasterer - Proprietary Plaster Cladding Systems (PPCS) plasterer


1.5 PRODUCER STATEMENTS When producer statements verifying construction are required, provide copies to both the

Building Consent Authority and the contract administrator. Provide producer statements in the form required by the Building Consent Authority.

Compliance information 1.6 DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE Information may be required either as a condition of the contract documents or as a

condition of the building consent may include the following: - - Applicators approval certificate from the manufacturer / importer / distributor - Manufacturer's, importer's or distributors warranty - Installer / applicator’s warranty - Producer Statement - Construction from the applicator / installer

Producer Statement - Construction review from an acceptable suitably qualified person Refer to the general sections for the requirements for compliance information to be

provided by the contractor. Refer to the building consent for the requirements for compliance information to be

provided by the contractor. Obtain required documents from the relevant parties for delivery to the contract

administrator after the final inspection has been carried out by the Building Consent Authority.

Substitutions 1.7 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCT/MATERIAL SUPPLIERS Where a product or material supplier is named in SELECTIONS, the product/material

must be provided by the named supplier. Where more than one named supplier, any one of the named suppliers will be acceptable.

1.8 NO SUBSTITUTIONS Where specifically stated in a section, substitutions are not permitted to any of the

specified systems, components and associated products listed in that section. 1.9 PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS A substitution may be proposed where specified products are not reasonably available. A

substitution may also be proposed by the Contractor where the Contractor considers a proposed substitution to be an alternative to the specified product. Except where a specified product is not available, the Contract administrator is not bound to accept any substitutions. Where branded work sections are included in this specification, substitution of those products or systems will not be allowed.

1.10 NOTIFICATION OF SUBSTITUTIONS Notify proposed substitution of specified products. Notification to include but not be

limited to: - Product identification - Manufacturer’s name, address, telephone and facsimile numbers, website and email

address - Detailed comparison between the properties and characteristics of the specified product

and the proposed substitution - Statement of NZBC compliance including durability - Details of manufacturer warranties plus an assessment of - Any changes required to the programme including any extension of time required - Any consequential effects of the proposed substitution - Allowance for time and cost for re-design and documentation (if applicable) - Allowance for time and cost for obtaining an amendment to the Building Consent (if

applicable) - Any change in cost associated with the proposed substitution


and if requested - All current manufacturer’s literature on the product - Accreditations and appraisals available - Reference standards - Product limitations - Samples - List of existing installations in the vicinity of the project 1.11 ACCEPTANCE OF SUBSTITUTIONS The Contract administrator must advise of acceptance of substitutions in writing. Amendment to issued Building Consent 1.12 CONTRACTOR AMENDMENTS TO BUILDING CONSENT Where the contactor has sought acceptance of a substitution or a variation which is for

the contractor’s own convenience and the substitution or variation requires an amendment to the Building Consent, the contractor must apply for and obtain the required amendment.

The contractor must: - Obtain approval for substitutions from the Contract administrator. - Prepare and provide to the Building Consent Authority all documentation required for

the amendment. - Pay all fees and other costs associated with this amendment. - Where the amendment affects other approved plans, also amend those plans. 1.13 PRINCIPALS AMENDMENTS TO BUILDING CONSENT Where the principal is proposing a substitution or a variation which requires an

amendment to the Building Consent, the contractor must provide to the principal information that the contractor has that is required for the amendment.

The principal will: - Prepare and provide to the Building Consent Authority all documentation required for

the amendment. - Pay all fees and other costs associated with this amendment. - Where the amendment affects other approved plans, also amend those plans. Manufacturer’s documents 1.14 BRANDED WORK SECTIONS Branded sections may be included in this specification relating to specific products and

systems to be installed as part of the contract works. Where branded sections are included, substitutions to the branded products and systems will not be allowed.

1.15 CROSS REFERENCED WORK SECTIONS If any related work is cross referenced to a generic work section, but only the equivalent

branded section is included in the specification, use that branded section. Confirm with the Contract administrator if there is any doubt.

1.16 MANUFACTURER’S AND SUPPLIER’S REQUIREMENTS Manufacturers and supplier’s requirements, instructions, specifications or details mean

those issued by them for their particular material, product or component and are the latest edition.

1.17 MANUFACTURER’S AND SUPPLIER’S DOCUMENTS Refer to individual sections for a detailed list of manufacturer’s and supplier’s documents

relating to work on this project. Retain current copies of the documents listed, and all other relevant manufacturer’s technical literature, on site. Make this information available to all personnel and ensure they are familiar with requirements for handling, storing, preparing for, fixing and finishing all products before commencing work. Provide a copy of all listed manufacturer’s literature to the Contract administrator.


1.18 ONGOING MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Refer to individual sections for details of manufacturer’s and supplier’s requirements for

ongoing maintenance necessary to ensure continuing compliance with the durability requirements of the NZBC. Provide a copy of literature detailing ongoing maintenance and inspection requirements to the Contract administrator.

Shop drawings 1.19 PROVIDE SHOP DRAWINGS FOR REVIEW Unless addressed elsewhere in this specification provide shop drawings for review by the

contract administrator. Do not proceed with manufacture of the items until the Contract administrator gives a direction to proceed.

As built drawings 1.20 PROVIDE AS BUILT DRAWINGS Unless addressed elsewhere in this specification provide as built drawings required as

built drawings including those required by the Building Consent Authority. Operation and maintenance 1.21 PROVIDE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Unless addressed elsewhere in this specification provide operation and maintenance

documentation necessary for the principal to operate and maintain the works. Provide documentation no later then the date of practical completion or the date on which the principal takes occupation of the works. This documentation is to include: -

- A complete list of subcontractors' names, addresses and telephone numbers noting

which portions of the contract each provided - A complete list of equipment and appliances including serial numbers, manufacturer's

names and sources of supply - Copies of all manufacturer’s product literature containing maintenance

requirements/instructions - Final As-Built drawings - Originals of all warranties and guarantees properly executed. Submit in final form in a hard cover loose-leaf binder, with contents index, contractor's

name, date of practical completion and titled on the binding edge "Operation and maintenance instructions for (project name)".

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1235 SHOP DRAWINGS Page 19

1235 SHOP DRAWINGS 1. GENERAL This general section relates to common requirements for the preparation, submission and

review of shop drawings. Detailed requirements for shop drawings for particular parts of the work are included in the specific work section.

1.1 PREPARE SHOP DRAWINGS Where specified in the work sections prepare shop drawings and submit for review.

Make due allowance in the contract programme for the preparation, review and subsequent correction and re-review of shop drawings, prior to the time required for ordering materials/equipment and commencing fabrication.

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS REVIEW Submit shop drawings to the named reviewer(s) for review. Proposed shop drawings to

be submitted to the reviewer, in due time to ensure conformance with the contract programme.

- Where no time is stated in a specific section allow 10 working days for review by the reviewer. Where a large number of drawings are involved more time will be necessary.

- Where no person is named in a specific section as the reviewer, submit the shop drawings to the contract administrator.

Shop drawing review indicates only that the supplied interpretation of the design concept

has been reviewed without the need for further modification, other than the corrections indicated by the reviewer.

Review of shop drawings does not relieve the contractor of responsibility for the

correctness of the shop drawings, site dimensions, the overall design and performance, or for ensuring the work is carried out in compliance with the contract documents. Nor does it remove the need for the contractor to comply with the stated requirements, details and specifications of the manufacturer’s and suppliers of individual components, materials and finishes. Neither can the review be construed as authorising departures from the contract documents.

Reviewed drawings which contain comments or notations indicating where the shop

drawings are at variance with the contract documents to be modified and resubmitted to the reviewer for re-review. Allow 5 working days for re-review by the reviewer.

1.3 PROVIDE FINAL SHOP DRAWINGS Provide final shop drawings, including required modifications, before proceeding with any

fabrication, installation or erection. 1.4 SHOP DRAWING REVIEWER(S) Submit the following shop drawings to the named reviewer(s) for review: Item Reviewer(s) ~ ~ ~ ~

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1237 WARRANTIES Page 20

1237 WARRANTIES 1. GENERAL This general section refers to the requirements for warranties as listed, either in this work

section or in specific work sections. It includes: - - Warranties for parts of the work required by the Principal in a required form - Installer/applicator warranties for parts of the work in the installer/applicator’s standard

form - Manufacturer/supplier warranties provided with products, appliances and the like in the

suppliers standard form - Guarantees provided by contractors in the contractor’s standard form Warranties 1.1 PROVIDE WARRANTIES Provide executed warranties in favour of the principal in respect of, but not limited to,

materials, components, service, application, installation and finishing called for in that specified section of work. The terms and conditions of the warranty in no case negate the minimum remedies available under common law as if no warranty had been offered. Failure to provide the warranty does not reduce liability under the terms of the warranty called for in that specified section of work.

Where installer/applicator warranties are included in a branded section of this

specification they shall be provided in lieu of the warranties that are otherwise required. Where installer/applicator warranties are available they may be provided in lieu of the

warranties that are otherwise required provided these warranties are subject to similar conditions and periods as those listed in the SCHEDULE OF WARRANTIES.

- Conform to the 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT form included in the

specification/conditions of contract. - Commence warranties from the date of practical completion of the contract works

(unless otherwise stated). - Maintain their effectiveness for the times stated. - Provide executed warranties prior to practical completion. 1.2 WEATHERTIGHTNESS AND WATERTIGHTNESS WARRANTY A warranty is required from the contractor for a minimum period of 2 years, covering the

weathertightness of the complete building envelope and the watertightness of all liquid supply and disposal systems and fittings. This general warranty is in addition to any specific warranties required.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF WARRANTIES The following is a summary of the warranties and warranty periods called for in work

sections. 2 years Weathertightness and watertightness 20 years Mastic asphalt tanking 20 years Liquid applied tanking 20 years Sheet tanking 5 years Proprietary curtain walling 5 years Profiled metal cladding 5 years Profiled plastic cladding 5 years Aluminium composite cladding 5 years Insulating wall cladding 5 years Steel clad insulating cladding 5 years Profiled metal roofing 5 years Profiled plastic roofing 5 years Concrete tile roofing 5 years Clay tile roofing 5 years Pressed steel tile roofing 5 years Timber shingle roofing


5 years Asphalt shingle roofing 5 years Mastic asphalt roofing 5 years Mineral fibre asphalt roofing 5 years Synthetic rubber sheet roofing 5 years Aluminium windows and doors 5 years Steel windows and doors 5 years Composite windows and doors 5 years Timber fire windows and doors 5 years Steel fire windows and doors 10 years Sealants 2 years Wall tiling 2 years Floor tiling 1 year Timber strip, block & plank flooring 1 year Vinyl surfacing 1 year Linoleum surfacing 1 year Rubber surfacing 1 year Cork surfacing 1 year Carpeting 1 year Carpet tiles 2 years Painting 2 years Decorative coatings 5 years Protective coatings, steelwork 2 years Hot and cold water system 2 years Solar water heating system 1 year Fire hose systems 1 year Fire sprinkler systems 5 years Underfloor heating 1 year Electrical general 1 year Access control 1 year Intruder detection systems Refer also to: - WARRANTIES – INSTALLER/APPLICATOR for other installer/applicator warranties. - WARRANTIES – MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER for other materials and product

warranties. 1.4 WARRANTIES – INSTALLER/APPLICATOR Where installer/applicator warranties are offered covering execution and materials of

proprietary products or complete installations, provide such warranties to the contract administrator. These warranties may be provided in lieu of the warranties that are otherwise required provided that these warranties are subject to similar conditions and periods as list in the SCHEDULE OF WARRANTIES.

Where installer/applicator warranties are included in a branded section of this

specification, they shall be provided in lieu of the warranties that are otherwise required. Provide warranties in favour of the principal. The terms and conditions of such warranties

in no case negate the minimum remedies available under common law as if no warranty had been offered. Failure to provide the warranty does not reduce liability for execution and materials for that part of the work.

- Conform to the installer/applicator standard form. Where the installer/applicator does

not have a standard form, use the 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT included in the contract documents.

- Commence the warranties from the date normally applicable for the work. - Maintain their effectiveness for the times stated. - Provide warranties no later than the date of the Contractor’s Completion Statement. 1.5 WARRANTIES – MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Where warranties are offered covering materials, equipment, appliances or proprietary

products, provide all such warranties to the contract administrator.


Provide warranties in favour of the principal. The terms and conditions of such warranties in no case negate the minimum remedies available under common law as if no warranty had been offered. Failure to provide the warranty does not reduce liability for execution and materials for that part of the work.

- Conform to the manufacturer/suppliers standard form. - Commence the warranties from the date normally applicable. - Maintain their effectiveness for the times stated. - Provide warranties no later than the date of the Contractor’s Completion Statement. Guarantees – Contractor 1.6 MASTER BUILD SERVICES LTD 7 YEAR GUARANTEE Provide a Master Build New Homes Alterations & Additions Guarantee including all costs

in the contract price and covering loss of deposit, non-completion and defects in materials and workmanship and structural defects under the terms of the guarantee offered by Master Build Services Ltd. Execute with all three signatories: owner, registered master builder and Master Build Services Ltd, before commencing the contract works.

1.7 MASTER BUILD SERVICES LTD 10 YEAR CLASSIC GUARANTEE Provide a Master Build 10 Year Classic New Homes Alterations & Additions Guarantee

including all costs in the contract price and covering defects in materials and workmanship, and structural defects including rot and fungal decay under the terms of the guarantee offered by Master Build Services Ltd. Execute with all three signatories: owner, registered master builder and Master Build Services Ltd, before commencing the contract works.

1.8 MASTER BUILD SERVICES LTD 10 YEAR PREMIUM GUARANTEE Provide a Master Build 10 Year Premium New Homes Alterations & Additions Guarantee

including all costs in the contract price and covering loss of deposit, non-completion, defects in materials and workmanship, and structural defects including rot and fungal decay under the terms of the guarantee offered by Master Build Services Ltd. Execute with all three signatories: owner, registered master builder and Master Build Services Ltd, before commencing the contract works.

1.9 CBANZ GUARANTEE Provide a Certified Builders HomeFirst Builders Guarantee. Complete the guarantee

application. Before commencing the contract works, execute with the signatures of the owner and the Certified Builder, and forward to CBA Guarantee Ltd along with a copy of the Building Consent, payment schedule and the fee payable.

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT Page 23

1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT Contract for: ~ (the contract works) Contractor: ~ (the contractor) Principal: ~ (the principal) Warrantor: ~ (name of contractor, subcontractor or materials supplier) Warranted works: ~ (the warranted works) Warranted materials: ~ (the warranted materials) Warranty period: ~ years from the date of practical completion of the contract works. The principal has entered into a contract (the contract) with the contractor for carrying out

the contract works. The warranted works / materials are part of the contract works. The contractor has agreed to arrange for the provision of a warranty in respect of the

warranted works / materials for the warranty period on the terms set out in this warranty. The warrantor has agreed to provide a warranty in respect of the warranted works /

materials for the warranty period on the terms set out in this warranty. 1. IT IS HEREBY AGREED The warrantor warrants to the principal that the warranted work performed /materials

supplied shall be as required in the contract. If not specified the work shall be of good trade practice with materials and fittings of merchantable quality.

This warranty shall be in addition to and shall not derogate from any manufacturer’s

warranty or any warranty implied by law, attaching to any part of the warranted works. 1.1 WARRANTOR’S OBLIGATIONS The warrantor agrees that if the warrantor is advised by the principal in writing of any

defect in the warranted works / materials within the warranty period for which the warrantor is liable under the terms of this warranty, the warrantor will promptly take steps to remedy the defect / replace defective materials.

1.2 REMEDIAL WORK / REPLACEMENT OF DEFECTIVE MATERIALS Any remedial work / replacement of defective materials which the warrantor is liable to

undertake / provide under this warranty shall be carried out: - to the standard required by the contract; and - in a prompt and timely manner; and - without unnecessary inconvenience to any occupants; and - at the warrantor’s cost; and - subject to reasonable access being provided to the warrantor for the purpose of

carrying out the remedial work. 1.3 REPAIR, REPLACEMENT AND/OR COMPENSATION Where the cost of replacement of work and/or materials is out of all proportion to the

consequences of the defect, or where the defect may not be reasonably capable of rectification without substantial expense which is out of all proportion to the cost of the contract works, the warrantor may:


- where the defect or defective material is reasonably rectified by repair rather than by replacement, the warrantor’s obligation under this warranty shall be only to repair or otherwise make good the defect or

- propose reasonable monetary compensation in lieu of remedying the defect or - propose a combination of both repair and compensation. The principal must consider the warrantor’s reasonable proposals and the parties must

endeavour in good faith to reach agreement. Where agreement cannot be reached the dispute shall be resolved in accordance with the disputes clause in this warranty.

1.4 FAILURE BY WARRANTOR TO PERFORM REMEDIAL WORK If the warrantor fails to promptly, adequately and satisfactorily carry out the remedial work

or to propose acceptable repair/compensation, the principal may then arrange for the remedial work to be carried out by others.

If the warrantor fails to promptly, adequately and satisfactorily provide replacement

materials or to propose acceptable repair/compensation, the principal may then arrange for the replacement materials to be supplied by others.

The principal must first give the warrantor 10 working days notice to carry out and

complete the remedial work / supply replacement materials. If the warrantor does not complete this work / supply replacement materials within the time, the principal must then advise the warrantor in writing that the work will be carried out / materials will be supplied by others.

In such event the warrantor is not released from obligations under this warranty, which

continues in full force and effect, except in respect of the defect remedied / materials supplied by the principal or by another person contracted by the principal. The reasonable cost of the remedial work carried out / materials supplied by such other persons including all reasonable costs of the principal is to be paid to the principal by the warrantor on demand.

1.5 EXCLUSIONS The principal agrees that the warrantor is not liable for any defect or damage caused by: - wilful act or negligence of the principal or any person other than the warrantor; or - fire, explosion, earthquake, war, subsidence, slips, faulty materials or workmanship

other than caused by the defect in the warranted work; or - any force of nature which the warrantor could not reasonably foresee; or - any neglect or unnecessary delay by the principal in giving notice to the warrantor of a

defect in the warranted works becoming apparent; or - design faults, errors or discrepancies, unless the warrantor undertook the design of the

part of the warranted works the subject of the defect; or - unintended use of the warranted works by the principal or any occupant thereof; or - failure by the principal or any occupant thereof to maintain the warranted works in

accordance with good practice and any manufacturer’s stated or recommended instructions or requirements.

1.6 ASSIGNMENT The principal may assign the benefit of this warranty to any person. 1.7 DISPUTES Any dispute or difference between the principal and the warrantor arising out of or in

connection with this warranty, or the subject matter of this warranty, including any question about its existence or validity, will be referred to arbitration by a sole arbitrator to be agreed upon by the parties. If the parties are unable to agree upon the identity of an arbitrator within 10 working days from the date upon which notice of the dispute is given, then the arbitrator will be appointed by the Registrar of the Building Disputes Tribunal (NZ) Ltd upon the application of either party.

1.8 NOTICES Notices given to the warrantor are deemed to have been effectively served on the

warrantor if given in accordance with the contract.


EXECUTED BY Signed by the warrantor: …………………………………………..……………………... on this: …………….day of ………………………………..…20…… (day) (month) (year) (And where required to be executed as a deed) signed in the presence of: Witness signature: ………………………………………………………………... Name: ………………………………………………………………... (print) Address: ………………………………………………………………... (print) Occupation: ………………………………………………………………... (print) Signed by the principal: ………………………………………………………………... on this: …………….day of ………………………………..…20…… (day) (month) (year) (And where required to be executed as a deed) signed in the presence of: Witness signature: ………………………………………………………………... Name: ………………………………………………………………... (print) Address: ………………………………………………………………... (print) Occupation: ………………………………………………………………... (print) NOTE – Where the warrantor is not the contractor the warranty agreement must be

executed by the warrantor and the principal in the manner required for execution of a deed.

Any of these parties which are a company must execute the warranty by having it signed,

under the name of the company, by two or more directors. If there is only one director, it is sufficient if the warranty agreement is signed under the name of the company by that director, but the signature must be witnessed by another person.

The witness must not only sign but must also add his or her occupation and address.

Alternatively, companies may execute under power of attorney. Any party which is a body corporate (other than a company) must execute by affixing its seal, which must be attested in the manner provided for in the rules of, or applicable to, the body corporate.

In the case of a party who is an individual, the party must sign and the signature must be

witnessed by another person. The witness must not only sign but must also add his or her occupation and address.

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1238 AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION Page 26

1238 AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION 1. GENERAL This general section relates to common requirements for the preparation, submission and

review of As Built documentation. Detailed requirements for As Built documentation for particular parts of the work may be included in specific work sections.

1.1 AS BUILT DOCUMENTS AND RECORDS Provide as built documents and records as follows: - Prior to practical completion provide provisional/draft as built drawings in sufficient

detail to allow the principal to operate, maintain, adjust and re-assemble the contract works.

- Prior to the end of the period of defects liability provide as built drawings in sufficient detail to allow the principal to operate, maintain, adjust and re-assemble the contract works.

Where the requirements for the as built documents and records is not stated in a specific

section, they shall include: Contract drawings recording: - Depth of various elements of foundations in relationship to the ground floor level - Field changes of dimensions - Other significant deviations and changes which are concealed in construction and

cannot be identified by visual inspection - Access doors and panels - Inverts and locations of services at key points within the building and at the property

lines - Dimension services in relation to the structure and building grid lines - Ductwork, piping, conduit and equipment, including such items provided for future use. The contract specification recording: - Products and materials selected for alternatives specified - Approved substitutions and accepted alternatives - Other approved changes and deviations to items specified. Submit in preliminary form for review and checking by the reviewer and in final form of

permanently bound hard-back covers with contents index, all information of good quality and properly titled, numbered, cross-referenced and dated. Where no person is named as the reviewer, provide the documents to the contract administrator.

1.2 AS BUILT DOCUMENTS AND RECORDS – ELECTRONIC COPY In addition to the hard copy of the as built documents, provide an electronic copy in the

following format(s). Drawings: PDF format Other documents: PDF format 1.3 SERVICES PLANS Prepare services plans setting out the actual positions as constructed of all sewer,

stormwater, sanitary plumbing, piped and ducted services, electrical and mechanical services. Except where specified otherwise, As Built plans may be marked up on copies of relevant project drawings. Provide As Built drawings to the reviewer. Where no person is named, provide the services plans to the contract administrator. Provide As Built drawings required by the Building Consent.

1.4 SERVICES PLANS – ELECTRONIC COPY In addition to the hard copy of the services plans, provide an electronic copy in the

following format(s). Drawings: PDF format

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1238 AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION Page 27

1.5 AS BUILT DOCUMENT REVIEWER(S) Submit the As Built documents to the named reviewer for review. Where no person is

named, provide the services plans to the contract administrator. Item Reviewer Drainage ~ ~ ~

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Page 28

1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE 1. GENERAL This general section relates to common requirements for the preparation, submission and

review of Operation and Maintenance manuals. Detailed requirements for Operation and Maintenance manuals for particular parts of the work are included in the specific work section.

1.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Provide operation and maintenance manuals as follows: - Prior to practical completion provide provisional/draft operation and maintenance

manuals in sufficient detail to allow the principal to operate, maintain, adjust and re-assemble the contract works.

- Prior to the end of the period of defects liability provide operation and maintenance manuals in sufficient detail to allow the principal to operate, maintain, adjust and re-assemble the contract works.

Where the requirements for operation and maintenance manuals is not stated in a

specific section, they shall include: - A complete list of subcontractors' names, addresses and telephone numbers noting

which portions of the contract each provided - A complete list of materials, products and equipment and appliances including serial

numbers, manufacturer's names and sources of supply - Copies of all manufacturer’s product literature containing maintenance

requirements/instructions - Description of each system, listing and describing each major component - Operation and installation instructions for each assembly, component and system,

including warnings of damaging practices - Lists of spare parts for each assembly, component and system complete with names,

addresses and telephone numbers of suppliers - Operating curves of mechanical and electrical equipment - Cleaning, maintenance and preserving instructions for all material, products and

surfaces. Include warnings of damaging practices - Maintenance schedules for all mechanical and electrical equipment and appliances - Final reviewed, shop drawings or As-Built drawings - Originals of all warranties and guarantees properly executed. The choice of shop drawings or As-Built drawings is dependant on the requirement to

provide them in the related sections. The drawings must be sufficient to describe the work. If As-Builts are required they are to be included, and if necessary, for additional information, be supported by shop drawings.

Submit the manuals in preliminary form for review by the reviewer. Where no person is

named as the reviewer, provide the manuals to the contract administrator. Submit in final form in hard cover loose-leaf binders, with contents index, contractor's

name, date of practical completion and titled on the binding edge "Operation and maintenance instructions for (project name)".

1.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS – ELECTRONIC COPY In addition to the hard copy of the operation and maintenance manuals, provide an

electronic copy in the following format(s). Drawings: PDF format Other documents: PDF format 1.3 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL REVIEWER(S) Submit the Operation and Maintenance manuals to the named reviewer for review.

Where no person is named as the reviewer, provide the manuals to the contract administrator.

Item Reviewer

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1239 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Page 29

~ ~ ~ ~ 1.4 REGULAR MAINTENANCE PROPOSALS Provide within 10 working days of practical completion of the contract. Maintenance proposal for Provide to ~ ~ ~ ~

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1240 ESTABLISHMENT Page 30

1240 ESTABLISHMENT 1. GENERAL This general section relates to site establishment including: - - Notices and approvals - Inspections - Site preparation - Signage - Temporary construction Notices and approvals 1.1 STATUTORY OBLIGATIONS Comply with all statutory obligations and regulations of regulatory bodies controlling the

execution of the works. 1.2 BUILDING CONSENT AUTHORITY AND NETWORK UTILITY APPROVALS Attend on Building Consent Authority officers, statutory and network utility inspectors, as

necessary to obtain approvals (in addition to building consent approval) for and the satisfactory completion of, the works.

1.3 NOTIFY NETWORK UTILITY OPERATORS Notify all network utility operators of proposed works before commencing site operations.

Ascertain location of services or confirm that none exist in the vicinity of the works. Take all necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing services.

Inspections 1.4 CARRY OUT INSPECTIONS As required by the contract dsocuments Site preparation 1.5 SITE ACCESS Access to the site is limited to: See OCTA Narrative 1.6 WORKING AREA Limited to the following designated working areas on the site: See OCTA Narrative 1.7 SITE AND SOIL SURVEYS Carry out all investigations necessary and peruse all information available to determine

ground conditions and likely ground performance both on the site and adjacent to it. Also refer to the territorial authority project information memorandum (PIM).

1.8 GROUND CONDITIONS Refer to the soils investigation report included with this specification. Existing buildings 1.9 ALTERATIONS Control access and working areas within existing buildings. Liaise with building owner to

establish site limitations. 1.10 TEMPORARY ACCESS Liaise with the building owner to arrange access to areas of the existing building which

are not normally part of the contract. Signage

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1240 ESTABLISHMENT Page 31

1.11 SITE SIGN Obtain approval for, provide and erect a timber framed sign board ~mm x ~mm fully

painted and displaying: - Title of contract - Principal's name - Contractor’s name - Consultants as listed in general section 1222 PROJECT PERSONNEL - If the contractor wishes, names of contractor and subcontractors. Temporary construction 1.12 TEMPORARY ROADS Provide as necessary all temporary roads, tracks, crossings and hard standing required

for the efficient execution of the works and maintain to approval. 1.13 TEMPORARY BUILDINGS Provide as necessary temporary sheds, offices, lunch rooms, sanitary accommodation

and other temporary buildings required for storage, management of the works, for the use of workers while on site and as required by Acts and Regulations.

1.14 CONSULTANTS TEMPORARY SITE OFFICE Provide temporary accommodation and facilities for site meetings and for use by

consultants while on site. 1.15 HOARDINGS, GANTRIES, LIGHTING Provide temporary fencing, hoardings, planked footways, guard rails, gantries and lighting

as necessary to protect the public and others, for the proper execution of the works and to meet the requirements of territorial or other authority.

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1247 TRAFFIC CONTROL Page 32

1247 TRAFFIC CONTROL 1. GENERAL This general section relates to temporary on and off site traffic control including: - - Access and egress - Traffic signage and controls - Deliveries - Parking - Vehicle wash down Access and egress 1.1 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT PLAN Refer to the building and resource consents for territorial authority requirements relating

to the provision of a traffic management plan. Submit the plan to ~ 1.2 FORM VEHICLE CROSSING Form a temporary vehicle crossing for use by construction traffic for the duration of the

contract. Comply with territorial authority requirements for the construction of temporary vehicle crossings. Ensure the crossing is capable of supporting the heaviest loads to be delivered to the site. Maintain to an acceptable standard until it is no longer required for construction traffic.

1.3 PROTECT EXISTING VEHICLE CROSSING Provide protection to existing vehicle crossing for use by construction traffic for the

duration of the contract. Comply with territorial authority requirements for the construction of temporary protection to the crossing. Ensure the protection is capable of supporting the heaviest loads to be delivered to the site. Maintain to an acceptable standard until it is no longer required for construction traffic. Replace the crossing if the temporary protection has not properly protected the existing

1.4 CONSTRUCT TEMPORARY ROADS AND HARD STANDING Construct temporary roads and hard standing for use by construction traffic for the

duration of the contract. Refer to drawing number ~ 1.5 SITE ACCESS Access to the site is limited to: See OCTA Narrative Refer to drawing number A00.01 1.6 SITE EGRESS Egress from the site is limited to: See OCTA Narrative Refer to drawing number A00.01 1.7 TIME FOR ACCESS AND EGRESS Site access and egress is limited to See OCTA Narrative 1.8 LIMITATION ON ACCESS AND EGRESS Site access and egress is not allowed between See OCTA Narrative Traffic control and lights 1.9 TRAFFIC LIGHTS Provide and maintain traffic light access/egress control as necessary 1.10 STOP / GO CONTROL Provide stop/go traffic control while carrying out operations where traffic must be

controlled while a specific operation is carried out

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1247 TRAFFIC CONTROL Page 33

1.11 TRAFFIC CONTROL – WORK IN THE ROADWAY Where temporary works are required to be carried out in the roadway, obtain all required

consents and comply with the road network authorities traffic management requirements 1.12 TRAFFIC SIGNS – SITE CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC Provide signs as required to identify specific temporary requirements for site construction

traffic during the construction period. 1.13 TRAFFIC SIGNS – OTHER TRAFFIC Provide signs as required to identify changes and diversions to non-construction site

traffic. Where appropriate use LTSA standard signs including temporary signs as appropriate

1.14 CONES AND BARRIERS Provide marker cones and barriers to demark restricted and dangerous areas and for

other site safety reasons as required Deliveries 1.15 GOODS DELIVERY AREA All goods are to be delivered to designated site area. Delivery vehicles that are not able to use the designated delivery area must queue in the

designate off site waiting area. Refer to the plans for details Parking 1.16 PARKING On site parking is limited to site area 1.17 PARKING RESTRICTIONS Parking is not allowed in the following areas. OSM carparks Vehicle wash down 1.18 WHEEL WASH AREA Where required either due to the nature of the work and as a condition of building or

resource consent, construct, maintain and use to ensure that the wheels of vehicles leaving the site are free of mud.

1.19 VEHICLE WASH AREA Provide an area complete with hose and silt trap were muddy vehicles can be cleaned to

prevent mud being deposited on the street. Completion 1.20 REMOVE TEMPORARY PROTECTION When no longer required remove temporary protection. Clean and leave in the condition

prior to the contract works commencing. Replace surfaces where the protection has not provided the required protection.

1.21 REMOVE TEMPORARY ACCESS AND PARKING When no longer required remove temporary access and parking and make good as

required.

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 1250 TEMPORARY WORKS & SERVICES Page 34

1250 TEMPORARY WORKS & SERVICES 1. GENERAL This general section relates to temporary works and services required for the construction

of the contract works. It includes: - Temporary works and services including temporary fencing and hoardings - Scaffolding and shoring - General care and protection Temporary works 1.1 COMPLY WITH NEW ZEALAND BUILDING CODE Refer to New Zealand Building Code clauses and approved document paragraphs for the

criteria and/or methods that must be used in this section to establish compliance with the code.

1.2 COSTS RELATING TO TEMPORARY WORKS Pay all rates/fees in respect of temporary works. 1.3 MAINTENANCE OF TEMPORARY WORKS Maintain alter, adapt and move temporary works and services as necessary. Clear away

when no longer required and make good. 1.4 SAFEGUARD THE SITE, THE WORKS AND MATERIALS Take all precautions to prevent unauthorised access, including access outside working

hours, to the site, the works and adjoining property. Safeguard the site, the works, materials and plant from damage and theft.

1.5 SITE FENCING Provide and maintain a site fence, 2 metres high from ground level on the side accessible

to the public. Construct to comply with NZBC F5/AS1 Construction and demolition hazards. Construct as required for public areas and as shown on the drawings.

Construct the fence with: - galvanized chain link netting with a 50mm x 50mm maximum grid size - posts at 2.5 metre centres maximum - gap at the bottom of the fence no greater than 100mm 1.6 SITE HOARDINGS Provide and maintain hoardings, 2 metres high from ground level on the side accessible

to the public. Construct to comply with NZBC F5/AS1 Construction and demolition hazards. Construct as required for public areas and as shown on the drawings.

Construct hoardings with continuous cladding of: - close butted timber at least 19mm thick; or - 6mm exterior grade plywood on studs at 600mm centres maximum; or - 9mm exterior grade plywood on studs at 1 metre centres maximum; or - continuous metal cladding suitably supported to provide strength and rigidity 1.7 SITE FENCING – NON PUBLIC AREAS Provide and maintain a 1 metre high site fence to non public areas. Construct using: - warratah stakes at 1.5 metre centres fitted with safety caps - plastic safety mesh 1.8 PROVIDE SEDIMENT AND SILT RUN OFF PROTECTION Provide appropriate measures to prevent or minimise sediment generation and silt run off.

Comply with territorial and other authority requirements relating to carrying out earthworks.

Prevent silt run off by: - exposing only as much ground as required at any time - providing run off channels, contour drains or earth bunds to divert clean water away

from the site on to stable sealed or grassed ground


- capture silt by the use of silt fences, vegetation buffer strips, sediment ponds or earth bunds.

Provide sediment control by: - earth bunds constructed across the slope to control and detain run off - silt fences constructed using filter fabric stretched between posts at a maximum of 1

metre spacing. Pump water from trenches and other areas of the site using methods to prevent sediment

entering any drain or watercourse. Filter dirty water before discharging into drainage system.

1.9 PROVIDE CONCRETE WASHWATER RUN OFF PROTECTION Provide appropriate measures to prevent cement/concrete washwater or slurry run off to;

drains or waterways, landscaped areas new or remaining and adjoining public or private properties. Comply with territorial and other authority requirements relating to cement/concrete washwater.

Control run off from: - Cement/concrete based material production, placing and finishing. - Hosing down and cleaning of, tools and equipment, fresh material, and spilt or surplus

material, pumps and mixers etc. - Wet cutting or grinding. - Slab watering etc. - Water cleaning of new concrete elements, fresh used formwork etc. Small project with relatively large exposed ground areas - prevent run off by: - directing small amounts of washwater onto the area of ground closest to the work. - for larger amounts provide run off channels, and small soak pits - very small amounts of washwater with no aggregate and only a small amount of sand

may be spread over existing lawns. Large project and those without suitable ground area - prevent run off by: - plan and implement washwater control measures based on the expected volumes,

allow for the timely removal and safe disposal of liquids and solids. - control the volumes of water used for washing down, the more water used the bigger

the problem. - Control the flow of washwater so that it is directed to proper catchments. - providing watertight bunds, pits or tanks, filtered washwater is not to be discharged to

drains. Spilt or surplus material: - if possible allow to set and either use or dispose of as hardfill. - pre-made concrete items, either use or dispose of as hardfill. Pump washwater away from drains, waterways and adjoining property. Temporary works – Existing Buildings 1.10 OCCUPIED BUILDINGS Buildings which remain occupied during the construction must have temporary works

agreed with the occupier/owner in advance. 1.11 PARTITIONS Provide and maintain full height temporary partitions, dust sealed and with appropriate

access doors, as shown on the drawings. Construct the partitions from; - timber or steel stud framing to suit the height - 17mm CD plywood screw fixed to occupied side of wall only - paint plywood white, occupied side only


1.12 SCREENS Provide and maintain 2.0m high temporary screens with appropriate access doors, as

shown on the drawings. Construct the screens from; - timber or steel stud framing - 17mm CD plywood screw fixed to occupied side of wall only - paint plywood white, occupied side only 1.13 DUST SCREENS Provide and maintain full height temporary dust screens as shown on the drawings. Construct the screens from; - flexible membrane with taped joints - timber battens for fixing membrane to edges of building fabric - paint plywood white, occupied side only Temporary services 1.14 WATER Provide clean, fresh water for the works and make arrangements for distributing about the

site. 1.15 ELECTRICITY Nominate the person to install and be responsible for the complete temporary electrical

installation. The name and designation of the person responsible is to be displayed prominently and close to the main switch or circuit breaker.

Inspect and overhaul the installation at such intervals as are prescribed by the network

utility operator but not exceeding three monthly intervals. 1.16 TELEPHONE Provide on site temporary telephone facilities. 1.17 FACSIMILE Provide on site temporary facsimile facilities. 1.18 COMPUTER Provide on-site temporary computer facilities complete with an email and internet

connection capable of sending, receiving and printing site communications. Scaffolding and shoring 1.19 GENERAL SCAFFOLDING Provide as necessary general scaffolding for the efficient execution of the works.

Placement, erection and structure to be by certified suppliers/erectors and approved by the Labour Department OSH inspectors before being used. Comply with the SARNZ publication: "Best practice guidelines for scaffolding in New Zealand."

Care and protection 1.20 PROTECT EXISTING BUILDINGS Protect existing buildings and other designated features which are to remain in position

during the execution of the works. 1.21 PROTECT ACCESS ROUTES Protect access routes through the building and areas adjacent to the work area that are to

remain in place. These include lifts and stairs. Comply with all fire egress requirements at all times.

1.22 PROTECT EXISTING SERVICES Protect existing services and parts of service systems that are to remain in place during

the execution of the works. Provide temporary caps or covers to prevent the ingress of dust and other contaminants into the systems, ducts, pipes etc.


1.23 MAKE GOOD EXISTING SERVICES Make good all damage to existing roads, footpaths, grounds, sewers or other services,

caused in carrying out the contract works. 1.24 PROTECT EXISTING TREES Protect existing trees, fences, gates, walls, gardens and other designated site features

which are to remain in position during the execution of the works. Construct a temporary fence at the outer edge of the drip line of trees to be protected.

Comply with territorial authority requirements. 1.25 EXISTING FIRE SYSTEMS Maintain the integrity of the systems at all times. If work requires de-activation of a

system, give notice to the: - fire service - OSM Follow their instructions and reinstate the system to their requirements. 1.26 CONSTRUCTION KEYING AND SECURITY Provide locksets with temporary keying, or install with the cylinders removed. 1.27 TEMPORARY STORAGE Provide temporary storage areas and protective covers and screens. Fillet stack and

protect all framing and structural members from moisture and contamination. Completely protect finishing materials from the weather and damage and store in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Protect fabricated elements from the weather and damage, and store in accordance with suppliers' requirements.

1.28 PERIODIC SITE CLEANING Carry out periodic site cleaning during the contract period. Place waste material in

appropriate storage pending removal from the site. 1.29 PERIODIC RUBBISH REMOVAL Maintain on site appropriate means for the storage and removal of construction waste

material. Where required or appropriate provide for the separate storage of recyclable waste and other materials requiring special disposal. Keep food waste separate from construction waste.

© CIL Masterspec 2011 1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT Page 38

1260 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 1. GENERAL This general section relates to project management requirements including: - Meetings - Cost control - Communicating and recording - Programming - Health and safety Meetings 1.1 SITE MEETINGS Meetings to normally be held: Fortnightly The following persons to attend: - Principal - Contract administrator - Project manager - Contractor - Architect - Designer - Engineer - Quantity surveyor - Services consultants when needed - Subcontractors when needed (contractor to inform them). Meeting place: TBA Time: TBA Day: TBA 1.2 MINUTES The contract administrator is to keep full minutes of all site meetings and arrange

distribution to all those involved within 3 working days. Cost control 1.3 MEASUREMENT Give reasonable notice to the contract administrator before covering up work which

requires to be measured. 1.4 DAYWORK VOUCHERS To be signed by the contractor's representative as confirming the labour, times and

materials used, before being supplied to the contract administrator. Communicating and recording 1.5 MEANS OF COMMUNICATION Communications between the parties shall be as follows: - Directions: In writing delivered by email with a copy by post or hand Meeting minutes: In writing delivered by email RFI’s: (Requests for information) by email or in writing to the contract

administrator 1.6 DELIVERY OF COMMUNICATIONS Communications must be: - - delivered to the addressee by hand; or - posted to the postal address stated in the Project Directory; or - delivered to the street address as stated in the Project Directory; or - sent by email to the email address stated in the Project Directory; or - sent by facsimile to the fax number stated in the Project Directory.


The Principal, Contractor and the Contract administrator must notify the others if they

change their address for delivery or transmission of communications. 1.7 RECORDS Ensure all records specified are kept, held and collated on site in a form that makes the

information easily accessible when it is needed. Distribute copies as and when necessary to those persons entitled under the contract to that information.

1.8 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS Take digital photographs from positions agreed with the contract administrator at

specified frequency and provide copies to the contract administrator. Frequency: Monthly Copies required: 1 set colour prints not less than postcard size 1 electronic copy delivered on disk or by email Programming 1.9 CONTRACT PROGRAMME Include the proposed sequence of all significant on-site and off-site activities, including

any intermediate key dates mentioned in the contract. Identify the critical path. Provide a tabulated schedule of information for each activity in order of:

- brief description - duration in suitable time unit - earliest start and latest finish time - total float - key dates for the supply of information or materials by others. Identify the dates by which particular information, material or plant need to be supplied or

arranged by the contract administrator. Also identify any constraints which may have been imposed by the programme.

Supply copies of the programme to the following: - OCTA 1 - Architect 1 - Designer 1 - Owner 1 - Quantity surveyor 1 - Site supervisor 1 Monitor the contract programme by: - recording progress regularly on the site chart - informing the contract administrator promptly of any circumstances affecting any part of

the programme structure and timing - reviewing the programme once a month making alterations as needed and agreed to

and re-issuing the required copies. 1.10 WORKING HOURS Work on site is not restricted. Comply with territorial authority consent conditions and

noise and nuisance controls. 1.11 WORKING HOURS RESTRICTIONS Work on site is restricted to: See OCTA Narrative Work outside these hours may be permitted, but 24 hours notice is required in writing to

the contract administrator before proceeding. Obtain any necessary permits and permission for such work.

Health and safety


1.12 HEALTH AND SAFETY Refer to the requirements of the Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992. Comply

with all relevant New Zealand safety legislation. Take all practical steps to make the site and the contract works safe and to provide and

maintain a safe working environment. Ensure that all those working on or visiting the site are aware of the rules governing site safety, are properly supervised and are not unnecessarily exposed to hazards.

Identify any significant hazards. Maintain proper procedures for dealing with any emergencies that may arise.

Immediately investigate accidents, identify their cause and maintain a register of accidents and serious harm. Provide a copy of any report which the contractor is required to make to a public authority on any accident which is associated with carrying out the contract works and results in serious harm to any person.

Refer to individual work sections for detailed requirements on this project. 1.13 SUSPENSION OF HAZARDOUS WORK On the request of the contract administrator, acting on reasonable grounds, suspend any

identified hazardous activities and proceed to eliminate, isolate or minimise them in order to comply with the Act, without prejudice to any other rights of the principal under the contract.

1.14 SITE SAFETY PERSON Appoint a suitably qualified site safety person to co-ordinate site safety and to attend all

site meetings. 1.15 HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN Prepare and submit to the contract administrator before commencing work on site a

health and safety plan. Include in that plan all people on site and the general public, as well as the following items and any other necessary item:

- identification of existing and potential construction hazards and risks - safety procedures to eliminate, isolate or minimise construction hazards - the equipment to be used to minimise the hazards - the maintenance of a register of hazards for the site - the name and qualifications of the site safety person - emergency procedures - first aid facilities and safety equipment - the methodology for notifying, recording and investigating accidents and injuries. Keep a copy of the plan in the site office 1.16 COMPLY WITH SITE SAFETY PLAN Carry out all construction operations in accordance with the submitted health and safety

plan. 1.17 INFORM EMPLOYEES OF HAZARDS Inform employees and others on the site of: - hazards they may be exposed to while working - hazards they may create while working which could harm others - how these hazards may be minimised - emergency procedures - the location of first aid facilities and safety equipment. 1.18 HEALTH AND SAFETY REGULATIONS, CODES AND GUIDES Comply with: - Relevant New Zealand safety legislation including "Health and Safety in Employment

Regulations 1995". - OSH publications including "Guidelines for the provision of facilities for general safety in

the construction industry". - Relevant codes of practice, guides, guidelines and standards.


Until further regulations are made under the Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992

to cover them, the enactments repealed by the Act continue in force until revoked. 1.19 EXPLOSIVES Do not use explosives except with the written approval of the territorial authority/office of

OSH. Comply with their safety requirements and use construction blasters holding a current certificate of competence issued under the Health and Safety in Employment Regulations 1995.

1.20 POWDER-ACTUATED FASTENING TOOLS Powder-actuated fastening tools to be used only by workers holding current certificates of

competence in their name, issued under the requirements of the Health and Safety in Employment Regulations 1995.

1.21 SMOKE FREE REQUIREMENTS Do not smoke on site except in a designated location, in accordance with the Smoke Free

Environments Act 1990. This location to be determined by the contractor with the agreement of the contract administrator.

1.22 RESTRICTIONS Do not: - light rubbish fires on the site - bring dogs on to or near the site - bring radios/audio players on to the site.

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 1270 CONSTRUCTION Page 42

1270 CONSTRUCTION 1. GENERAL This GENERAL section relates to common requirements for construction issues

including: - - Quality assurance - Noise and nuisance - Set out - Common execution requirements - Common materials requirements - Supply of spare materials - Common requirements for samples and tests - Final presentation and cleaning - Commissioning Quality control and assurance 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Carry out and record regular checks of material quality and accuracy, including: - Concrete quality and finish. - Dimensional accuracy of structural column locations (following completion of

foundations). - All perimeter columns and frames for plumb. - Levels of all floors relative to the site datum. - Framing timber moisture content. Where any material, quality or dimension falls outside specified or required tolerances,

obtain written direction from the contract administrator. Where building consent approval is affected, confirm remedial action with the Building Consent Authority.

Provide all materials, plant, attendances, supervision, inspections and programming to

ensure the required quality standards are met by all project personnel. Noise and nuisance 1.2 LIMIT CONSTRUCTION NOISE Minimise the effects of noise generation by including in the planning of the work such

factors as placing of plant, programming the sequence of operations and other management functions. Limit construction noise to comply with the requirements of NZS 6803, the requirements of the Resource Management Act sections 326, 327 and 328 and the Health and Safety in Employment Regulations clause 11.

1.3 ACCEPTABLE NOISE LEVELS Refer to NZS 6803 Tables 2 and NZS 6803, tables 3 for the upper limits of construction

work noise in residential and industrial areas over the various time periods, particularly 0730 to 1800 hours. Note also the allowed adjustments and exemptions in NZS 6803, 6. Do not exceed these limits.

1.4 PROVIDE INFORMATION TO NEIGHBOURS Provide information to neighbours of any noise generation from the site liable to constitute

a problem. Explain to them the means being used to minimise excessive noise and establish with them the timings most suitable for the noise generating work to be carried on.

Discuss with any complainant the measures being used to minimise noise. Where

possible modify these measures to accommodate particular circumstances. Finally, determine the sound level at the location under discussion using methods and observation reporting as laid down in NZS 6803. If the noise level is above the upper limits of NZS 6803, tables 2 and NZS 6803, tables 3, cease the noise generating operation and remedy the problem.


1.5 ADDITIONAL NOISE CONSTRAINTS As well as complying with the preceding clauses comply with the following on this

contract: ~ 1.6 INCONVENIENCE TO OTHERS When the works are to be carried out in or around occupied premises, ascertain the

nature and times of occupation and use. Carry out the works in a manner to minimise inconvenience, nuisance and danger to occupants and users.

1.7 DIRT AND DROPPINGS Remove dirt and droppings deposited on public or private thoroughfares from vehicles

servicing the site to the satisfaction of the appropriate authorities and the contract administrator.

1.8 DAMAGE AND NUISANCE Take all precautions to prevent damage and nuisance from water, fire, smoke, dust,

rubbish and all other causes resulting from the construction works. Set-out and tolerances 1.9 SURVEY INFORMATION Locate and verify survey marks and datum points required to set out the works. Record

and maintain their position. Re-establish and replace disturbed or obliterated marks. 1.10 SET-OUT AND DATUM Set out the work to conform with the drawings. Establish a permanent site datum to

confirm the proposed building ground floor level and its relationship to all other existing and new building levels.

1.11 SET-OUT BY LICENSED CADASTRAL SURVEYOR Before commencing construction provide the contract administrator with a certificate

prepared by a licensed cadastral surveyor that the set-out is complete and that the building is accurately placed on the site.

During construction provide the contract administrator with a certificate, prepared by the

same licensed cadastral surveyor confirming the set-out of the foundations and grid lines. Necessary adjustments are to be determined and agreed to by the contract administrator before proceeding further.

1.12 CONFIRM HEIGHT IN RELATION TO BOUNDARY Provide a certificate prepared by a licensed cadastral surveyor that the building has been

constructed within the allowed height in relation to boundary. Provide the certificate to the local authority. Provide a copy of the certificate to the contract administrator

1.13 USE OF SET-OUT INSTRUMENTS Permit without charge, the use of instruments already on site for checking, setting out and

levels. 1.14 CHECK DIMENSIONS Check all dimensions both on drawings and site, particularly the correlation between

components and work in place. Take all dimensions on drawings to be between structural elements before linings or finishes, unless clearly stated otherwise.

1.15 TOLERANCES All work to be level, plumb, and true to line and face. Unless otherwise specified in

specific work sections of this specification, tolerances for structural work shall comply with the following:

Concrete construction: To NZS 3109 Concrete construction Clause 3.9 Tolerances for reinforcement Table 5.1 Tolerance for precast components Table 5.2 Tolerance for in situ construction


To NZS 3114 Concrete surface finishes Masonry construction: To NZS 4210 Masonry construction: Materials and

workmanship Clause 2.6.5 Tolerances Table 2.2 Maximum tolerances Structural steelwork: To NZS 3404:1997 Steel structures standard Section 14.4 Tolerances (after fabrication) Section 15.3 Tolerances (erection) Timber framing: To NZS 3604 Timber framed buildings Clause 2.2 Tolerances Table 2.1 Timber framing tolerances Refer to work sections for tolerance requirements for finishes. Execution 1.16 EXAMINE PREVIOUS WORK Before commencing any part of the work carefully examine the previous work on which it

may depend. Report in writing to the contract administrator defects that may affect the quality of the proposed work and obtain instructions. Commencing work on any part means that previous work is accepted as being satisfactory for work of the required standard.

1.17 WORKER QUALIFICATIONS All work to be level, plumb, and true to line and face. Employ only experienced workers

familiar with the materials and techniques specified. 1.18 MINIMISE DELAYS DUE TO WEATHER Use appropriate techniques and methods to prevent damage and minimise delays due to

weather. Materials 1.19 NEW PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS Materials and products to be new unless stated otherwise, of the specified, and

complying with all cited documents. 1.20 COMPATIBILITY OF MATERIALS AND FINISHES Ensure all parts of a construction or finish are compatible and their individual use

approved by the manufacturers and suppliers of other parts of the system. Source all parts of a system from a single manufacturer or supplier.

1.21 STORING PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS Take delivery of and store products, materials and components in accordance with codes

of practice and the product manufacturer’s or supplier’s stated requirements. Maintain the proper condition of any protective packaging, wrappings or supports during delivery, unloading and storage.

1.22 HANDLING PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS Handle products, materials and components in accordance with codes of practice and the

manufacturer’s or supplier’s stated guidelines. Avoid distortion and any contact with potentially damaging surfaces or conditions.

1.23 SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS Ensure substrate conditions are within the manufacturer’s or supplier’s stated guidelines

both before and during the installation of any material, product or system. Obtain written instructions on the necessary action to rectify unsatisfactory conditions.

1.24 INSTALLING PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s or supplier’s technical literature. Ensure

that all installers are familiar with the required substrate conditions and the manufacturer’s or supplier’s specified preparation, fixing and finishing techniques.


1.25 COMPLY WITH STANDARDS Comply with the relevant and/or cited Standard for any material or component. Obtain

certificates of compliance when requested by the contract administrator. 1.26 CONDITION OF MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS To be in perfect condition when incorporated into the work. 1.27 INCOMPATIBLE MATERIALS AND METALS Separate incompatible materials and metals with separation layers, sleeves or gaskets of

plastic film, bituminous felt or mastic or paint coatings, installed so that none are visible on exposed surfaces.

Samples and tests 1.28 SAMPLES AND PROTOTYPES Where specified in the work sections, submit samples, prepare sample panels, and

construct prototypes for review as to appearance, form and conformance with the drawings and specifications. Submit all information required to assist the review process, including technical data, manufacturer’s literature, independent appraisals and producer statements.

Timing for the provision and review of samples, sample panels and prototypes to be

included in the contract programme. Allow a minimum of 10 working days for each review. Proceed only after instructions to proceed have been issued in writing by the contract administrator.

In situ work may be incorporated in the finished work if so confirmed, otherwise allow to

remove completely and replace. 1.29 CONTROL STANDARD Obtain the contract administrator’s confirmation of material, component and work

samples which then become the quality control standard. Remove from the site any rejected samples. Retain confirmed samples with care on site for comparison throughout the contract. Remove from the site when no longer required.

Spares 1.30 SPARES Collect, protect and store safely all spare materials required under the contract. Give the

contract administrator an inventory of all spares. Final presentation and cleaning 1.31 REMOVE TEMPORARY PROTECTION Remove all temporary markings, coverings, labels and protective wrappings unless

instructed otherwise. 1.32 REPLACE DAMAGED MATERIALS Replace all materials or component damaged during the works to the standard of and

integral with the original. 1.33 COMPLETE ALL SERVICES Ensure all services are complete and operational, with all temporary labelling removed,

required labelling fixed and service instructions provided. 1.34 CLEANING BY CONTRACTOR Clear the contract works of all construction materials, waste, dirt and debris. Clean the

contract works including: - Wipe all surfaces to remove construction dust - Clean out service ducts and accessible concealed spaces - Clean out all gutters and rainwater heads


- Wipe dust from both sides of glass. Take particular care when removing paint or cementitious materials to not damage the glass.

- Remove adhesive residue left by labels and other temporary protection/markings - Clean out the interior of all cabinetry - Wash down external concrete including driveways and concrete masonry. Take care

when waterblasting to not cause damage to the surface or allow water to enter the building.

- Remove rubbish and building material from the area immediately adjacent to the contract works

1.35 CLEANING BY COMMERCIAL CLEANER Use a commercial cleaning firm to clean the whole of the interior of the building, including

all appliances, equipment, fittings, surfaces and finishes to leave it without any blemish. Cleaning to include:

- Clean and wash down all external surfaces to remove dirt, debris and marking. - Clean all interior surfaces including cabinetwork, joinery, sanitary and hardware items. - Vacuum or polish all floor finishes. - Clean and polish all glass, both sides. Commissioning 1.36 MOVING PARTS Adjust, ease and lubricate all doors, windows, drawers, hardware, appliances, controls

and all moving parts to give easy and efficient operation. 1.37 TESTS AND CERTIFICATION ~ 1.38 SECURITY AT COMPLETION Remove any temporary lock cylinders and complete final keying prior to handing over

keys to the principal on completion of the works. Leave the works secure with all accesses locked. Account for all keys/cards/codes and hand to the principal along with an itemised schedule, retaining a duplicate schedule signed by the principal as a receipt.

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 2111 DEMOLITION Page 47

2111 DEMOLITION 1. GENERAL This section relates to the forming of openings and demolition of existing structures to the

extent necessary to carry out the contract works. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 2133 TEMPORARY SUPPORT TO EXISTING STRUCTURES for lifting and temporary

support of existing adjacent structures Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC F5/AS1 Construction and demolition hazards NZS 6803 Acoustics - Construction noise OSH Approved code of practice for demolition Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992 Health and Safety in Employment Regulations 1995 Requirements 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS Carry out demolition: - only under the supervision of a suitably experienced person, using only operators and

drivers trained for this work - using only experienced certified construction blasters for explosives demolition - calling upon engineering expertise in those areas of demolition required by the OSH

Approved code of practice for demolition. 1.4 NOTIFIABLE WORK Notify the appropriate OSH office of work that is notifiable under the Health and Safety in

Employment Regulations 1995, 24 hours before starting the work. 1.5 NOISE Refer to NZS 6803 tables 2 and 3 for the upper limits of construction work noise in

residential and industrial areas over the various time periods, particularly 0730 to 1800 hours and plan the work using silenced and noise insulated plant to comply with those requirements. Do not exceed these limits, or any more stringent limits imposed by the local authority.

1.6 HEALTH AND SAFETY Comply with the Health and Safety in Employment Act in general, NZBC F5/AS1 and

OSH Approved code of practice for demolition, section 1.2. Performance 1.7 BUILDING CONSENT REQUIREMENTS Demolition work to be carried out to building consent requirements 1.8 INSPECTIONS Inspection of the demolition work to take place at each of the stages as scheduled in the

building consent. Confirm a written programme to facilitate these inspections, including notification when each stage of the work is ready for inspection.

Obtain and pay for any required inspections which are additional to the building consent. 2. PRODUCTS Materials


2.1 ELEMENTS FOR SALVAGE Carefully dismantle, remove and store on site where directed. Protect from damage and

weather. 2.2 MATERIAL AND ELEMENTS FOR DISPOSAL Remove demolished material and elements continually from the site through the period of

the demolition. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 EXISTING SERVICES Notify the network utility operators and arrange for them to locate the position of all

services adjacent to and entering the site. Disconnect and seal off services before work commences. Protect services adjacent to the site.

3.2 USE THE CHECK LIST Use the checklist offered in the OSH Approved code of practice for demolition, chapter 10

and the demolition plan, to ensure that all major points in this contract are covered. 3.3 SITE INSPECTION Visit and check the site, the building or structural work being demolished and any

contents for likely hazards. 3.4 ADJOINING BUILDINGS Check the relationship and condition, including the contents of adjoining buildings to

ensure they will not be adversely affected by the demolition work. 3.5 PLANS AND DESCRIPTIONS Carefully examine all available plans of the building, including those of the territorial

authority and the network utility operators, all descriptions and past uses, and become totally familiar with the past and present condition and use of the building and its services.

3.6 LOADINGS If intending to use heavy plant and machinery or load debris on roofs and floors,

allowable loadings must first be calculated by a suitably qualified person. Use propping or strengthening if necessary.

3.7 EXAMINE STRUCTURE Examine roofs, walls, cantilevered structures and basements as required by the

Approved code of practice for demolition and follow their requirements. 3.8 WELLS AND UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANKS Test for flammable vapours or any other hazardous gases and follow established

procedures to manage any hazards. 3.9 SPECIAL BUILDINGS Refer to the OSH: Approved code of practice for demolition, clause 4.7 and follow the

advice given in respect of caution and the obtaining of advice. 3.10 DO NOT DISTURB SUPPORT Do not disturb support to foundations of buildings on adjoining property, or the ground of

adjoining property. 3.11 ADJOINING BUILDINGS Where demolition exposes the walls of buildings on adjoining property, ensure they are

self-supporting. If not, make provision for and provide the necessary support, stability and protection until the permanent construction work making them self-supporting is carried out.


3.12 EXPOSED WALLS, ADJOINING BUILDINGS Protect and make weathertight temporarily with 0.125mm black polythene film. Lap and

tape joints to the manufacturer's requirements and nail or masonry nail to the wall face with 50mm x 25mm timber battens at 600mm centres.

3.13 SAFETY DURING DEMOLITION Refer to NZBC F5/AS1 and the OSH Approved code of practice for demolition and carry

out the requirements laid down in chapter 5 in respect of: - instability - supervision - plant, tools and equipment - personal protective equipment - protection of the public - unauthorised access to site. 3.14 DEMOLITION PROCEDURES Refer to OSH Approved code of practice for demolition and carry out the requirements

laid down in clause 5.10 including: - scaffolding - health - disposal of debris and waste material - fire protection. 3.15 BUILDINGS Refer to the OSH Approved code of practice for demolition, chapter 5 and carry out the

requirements in respect of: - buildings - prestressed concrete structures - storage tanks - underwater demolition - fire-damaged buildings. 3.16 HAND TOOL AND PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT Refer to the OSH Approved code of practice for demolition, appendix A and appendix B

and carry out the requirements laid down for: - hand tools - power tools - personal protective equipment - cutting and welding. Application 3.17 CARRY OUT DEMOLITION Carry out all demolition to the requirements of the OSH Approved code of practice for

demolition. 3.18 MECHANICAL PLANT Refer to the OSH Approved code of practice for demolition, chapter 7 and carry out the

requirements in respect of: - general plant safety - front-end loaders, backhoes, excavators and bulldozers - trucks - use of plant indoors. 3.19 DIG OUT Dig out foundations, footings, basement, floor slabs, paths, drains, cesspits and

manholes that are part of or service the demolished building. Leave the voids that result. Do not backfill.

Completion 3.20 MAKE GOOD Make good damage to adjoining buildings or property caused by demolition work.


3.21 REINSTATE Reinstate where any damage is caused by this demolition to those parts of the existing

building, other buildings and the remainder of the site being retained. 3.22 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.23 TAKE AWAY Take away from the site all plant, tools and equipment, temporary access works, and

demolished materials and elements, to leave the site completely clean and tidy. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 ELEMENTS FOR SALVAGE The following schedule of elements remain the property of The Principal.

Component Location Iron fence sections are to be salvaged abns tored as directed by the Client.

Iron Fence

© CIL Masterspec 2011 2133 TEMPORARY SUPPORT TO EXISTING STRUCTURES Page 51

2133 TEMPORARY SUPPORT TO EXISTING STRUCTURES 1. GENERAL This section relates to the temporary support of the adjacent existing buildings and

structures during the course of the works. It includes requirements for the management of services that currently pass through the

site. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 2111 for DEMOLITION Refer to 2241 for EXCAVATION Refer to 2322 for CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC F5/AS1 Construction and demolition hazards OSH Approved code of practice for demolition Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992 Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.

However, this specification takes precedence in the event of it being at variance with the cited document.

Requirements 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS Work to be carried out by tradespeople experienced, competent and familiar with the

materials and techniques specified. 1.4 DEMOLITION PLAN Submit detailed written and/or drawn demolition and temporary support plan. Quality control and assurance 1.5 INSPECTIONS Inspect the area to be supported and confirm position for beams and pigsties to enable

subsequent work to be carried out. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 PIGSTIES Timber bearers not less the 200mm x 100mm x 900mm in sound conditions with true

faces to support the required loads. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 SAFETY All work to comply to OSH requirements, NZBC F5/AS1 and Health and Safety in

Employment Act. 3.2 CONFIRM SITE SECURITY Check site security arrangements both at the perimeter of the site and immediately

adjacent to the area in which the temporary support is being carried out


3.3 PROTECT TREES Protect all trees and shrubs to be retained from damage, particularly root zones. 3.4 ADJOINING PROPERTY Support and protect adjoining property. Survey adjoining properties and take all

precautionary measures necessary to avoid damage or nuisance. Copy of the survey results to be sent to adjoining property owners.

3.5 SUPPORT Support and brace the existing structure during the cutting of new openings or the

replacement of structural parts. Prevent debris from overloading any part of the structure. Do not remove supports until the new work is strong enough to support the existing structure. Ensure all work remains structurally stable and sound.

3.6 CHECK MATERIAL SUPPLIES Confirm sufficient materials are available to enable the work to safely carried out. Check

and confirm: - - Timber for use as pigsties - Support beams and bearers - Adjustable props, rope and wedges - Lifting jacks 3.7 PROHIBIT OPERATION OF HEAVY MACHINERY Ensure that no heavy machinery is operating in the immediate vicinity of the building until

the building has been safely placed on the temporary supports Installation/application 3.8 LIFTING Carry out lifting for either excavating under, or for relocation, to the general requirements

of the OSH publication: Approved code of practice for demolition, Section 9, House lifting for removal or excavation under, including the precautions required during jacking and pigsty construction.

3.9 DISCONNECT SERVICES Disconnect all services necessary prior to lifting the building. Re-direct roof water downpipes away from the work area. 3.10 CHECK GROUND CONDITIONS AT JACKING POINTS Check ground conditions at each lifting point. Ensure ground is level, has suitable

bearing capacity and is otherwise free of loose and unsuitable material 3.11 PLACE TEMPORARY BEAMS FOR JACKING Place support beam and bearers in positions to adequately support the structure and to

allow for required construction work below the supported structure. 3.12 CONSTRUCT TEMPORARY SUPPORTS Construct temporary supports progressively during lifting proceed so as to minimise

damage from any premature collapse. Limit height of temporary supports to not more than 3 times the minimum base width. Ensure supports remain vertical and that the loads are supported evenly on them.

3.13 JACK BUILDING Jack building evenly to OSH requirements and build support structure progressively as

the building is lifted 3.14 COMPLETE TEMPORARY SUPPORT When the building is at the required height, construct temporary braces or inclined props

to provide adequate support against wind and earthquake loads. Completion


3.15 ROUTINE CLEANING Clear our building debris and other material from the work area below the supported

structure. Keep area clear of materials not required for subfloor work 3.16 CHECK SUPPORT STRUCTURE Carry out daily check of the temporary support structure to ensure safe working

conditions for both workers working below the supported structure and for any workers carrying out work above the supported area.

3.17 PROTECTION Provide the following temporary protection of the finished work: Protect from, weather, water, dust, damage, etc.the entrance to the Stage 3 Foyer Link

and to the Auditorium. 3.18 REMOVE TEMPORARY SUPPORTS Once structure is on the permanent supports, fully supported, stable and secure, remove

temporary supports and related items.

© CIL Masterspec 2011 2241 EXCAVATION H&R Page 54

2241 EXCAVATION H&R 1. SEE HADLEY AND ROBINSON STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATION

© CIL Masterspec 2011 2322 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS H&R Page 55

2322 CONCRETE PILE FOUNDATIONS H&R 1. SEE HADLEY AND ROBINSON STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATION

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 3100 CONCRETE H&R Page 56

3100 CONCRETE H&R 1. SEE HADLEY AND ROBINSON STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATION

© CIL Masterspec 2011 3131 PRECAST CONCRETE, H&R Page 57

3131 PRECAST CONCRETE, H&R 1. SEE HADLEY AND ROBINSON STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATION

© CIL Masterspec 2011 3320 CONCRETE MASONRY H&R Page 58

3320 CONCRETE MASONRY H&R 1. SEE HADLEY AND ROBINSON STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATION

© CIL Masterspec 2011 3361 STONEWORK Page 59

3361 STONEWORK 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply, laying and fixing of; Oamaru Stone to the Museums Interior walls comprising stacked stone block and strip

stone. Red Imperial Granite and White Marble lettered inlay at the Museums Entrance. Related work 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS Refer to SECTION 6221 for BASALT FLOOR AND WALL TILING Refer to SECTION 8231 for BASALT PAVING LANDSCAPING Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO Documents referred to in this section are: AS/NZS 2699.1 Built in components for masonry construction - Wall ties NZS 3103 Sands for mortars and plasters NZS 4210 Masonry construction: materials and workmanship Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


Requirements 1.3 STONE SAMPLES Supply 3 samples of each type of stone and surface finish representing the total range of

natural variation, marking and finish across the run of quarry. Refer to SELECTIONS for minimum size.

1.4 SAMPLE PANELS Provide a sample panel, including a corner of each type of stone work. Refer to

SELECTIONS for location and size. An approved panel, if suitably located, may be incorporated into the works. Otherwise protect from damage, retain for duration of the work, removing all traces on completion.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS Stonemasons to be experienced competent workers, familiar with the materials and the

techniques specified. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS Provide shop drawings of set-out of blocks or panels complete with method of bedding

and fixing. Refer to the general section 1235 SHOP DRAWINGS for the requirements for submission

and review and the provision of final shop drawings. 1.7 REVISED SHOP DRAWINGS Provide copies of shop drawings revised to include required modifications, before

proceeding with any stonework. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 STONE Refer to SELECTIONS/drawings for type.


2.2 FLEXIBLE DAMP-PROOF MEMBRANE Heavy kraft, strip laminates saturated and coated with bitumen, butyl rubber sheet and

adhesive, or equivalent. 2.3 MALLEABLE DAMP-PROOF MEMBRANE Lead not less than 1.8mm (20 kg/m2) thick bitumen coated. Components 2.4 ANCHORS, CRAMPS, DOWELS Non-corrodible, non-ferrous metal, suitably stamped. 2.5 TIES Non-corrodible, non-ferrous metal suitably stamped, to AS/NZS 2699.1 for spacing,

strength, stiffness and ductility. 2.6 ENGINEERED STRIP STONE FIXING CHANNEL See Drawings and Hadley and Robinson engineering documentation for drtails and finish

of the Strip Stone fixing channel. Accessories 2.7 SEALANT Elastomeric joint non-staining sealing compound of approved type and colour. Backing

rods closed cell semi-rigid compressible plastic from the type sized to compress 33% in the joint and to the sealant manufacturer's requirements.

2.8 JOINTING MATERIAL Suitable for the location and type of stone, non-staining, and to the manufacturer's

requirements. 2.9 SAND FOR MORTAR Sand to NZS 3103. Chloride levels to not exceed 0.04% by dry weight of sand. 2.10 MORTAR Provide details of the proposed mix for approval not less than 7 days before commencing

work. Generally the mix to have a strength less than the stone it is bedding and a porosity equal to or greater than the stone.

Finishes 2.11 DAMP-PROOF MEMBRANE, BITUMEN Water based bitumen emulsion heavy duty sealer. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 TOLERANCES To NZS 4210, table 2.2 Maximum tolerances. 3.2 TOLERANCES AS SHOWN Construct the stone work within the tolerances shown on the drawings. 3.3 BUILDING IN Make provision for building into the structure those elements required for the erection and

laying of stone. 3.4 BUILT IN ITEMS Make provision as the work proceeds for elements that need to be built in or keyed to the

stone work, including partitions, straps, handrails, beams, trusses and plates.


3.5 TRANSPORT Transport, unload and handle all stone units to avoid any damage or disfigurement.

Stack carefully in the vehicle with packing material to prevent damage. 3.6 STORE Store stone clear of the ground on its natural bed, protected from the weather and

atmospheric pollution on supports that avoid local overstressing and to promote good seasoning without staining, contamination, marking or damage.

Application 3.7 CUTTING Cut and shape stone to profiles generally as detailed and including all weathering,

jointing, chasing, forming mortises, grooves and drilling for handling and fixing. Work the bed, face and back joints of the stone square and true.

3.8 LAY FLEXIBLE DAMP-PROOF MEMBRANE Apply mortar to a flush even bed and lay the flexible membrane horizontally and to steps

in a continuous strip with 150mm laps and no edges visible at the face. 3.9 MEMBRANES AT OPENINGS Provide flexible membranes to heads, 150mm beyond jambs and to jambs and sills, to

discharge moisture to the outer face and with no edges visible at the face. 3.10 INSTALL FLASHINGS Refer to 4911 STEEL METALWORK and install flashings provided to the locations as

detailed and shown on the drawings. Application - facing work 3.11 SOLID BEDDING Adequately support and restrain cladding with durable fixings and continually and solidly

fill between backs and supporting structure with mortar. 3.12 SPOT BEDDING Adequately support and restrain cladding with durable fixings and provide mortar bedding

continuously around fixings and in the form of mortar dabs elsewhere. 3.13 JOINTING Prime surfaces in contact, fit backing rods to ensure correct depths of jointing material

and/or sealant, keeping panel surfaces completely clear and unmarked by masking, all to the jointing manufacturer's requirements.

Application - walling work 3.14 BED AND JOINT Bed and joint stone where possible in one operation on a full bed of mortar. Solidly fill

and grout vertical joints, joggles, cramps and the like as the work proceeds and point up joints around flashings.

3.15 SET STONE Set stone on its natural bed. 3.16 BEDDING SEDIMENTARY STONE Clean the bed area of dust and impurities and thoroughly damp it down before laying the

mortar bed. 3.17 RACKING Raise advanced work no more than 1 metre above the general level and rack back. Do

not tooth stonework unless shown on the drawings or when approved in writing.


3.18 SUPPORT Provide support to the stone while mortar cures by bracing or joint spacers of non-

staining softwood. When curing is complete remove spacers without damage to the stonework and point to match.

Finishing 3.19 PROGRESSIVE CLEANING Keep the stone faces clean as the work proceeds. Prevent mortar or jointing material

from coming into contact with the external face of the stone. Perform the cleaning procedure, including removal of stains as necessary, without damage to the work.

3.20 COMPLETE DAMP-PROOFING Damp-proof the back and not less than 25mm on return of bedding faces with two coats

of bitumen sealer. Avoid contact of bitumen with the face of the stone. Completion 3.21 PROTECT Protect newly erected stonework against inclement weather. 3.22 KEEP FACEWORK CLEAN Keep facework clean during construction and until completion of the contract works.

Clean off, rub down and leave stonework in the specified condition, immediately before handing over.

3.23 REPLACE Replace damaged, cracked or marked elements. 3.24 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.25 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 STONE SAMPLES PROVIDE SAMPLES OF ALL PROPOSED STONE PRIOR TO CONFIRMING ORDERS. 4.2 RED IMPERIAL GRANITE Selected igneous plutonic stone. Colour: Imperial Red Granite Thickness: Varies refer to Drawings Finish: Polished 4.3 MARBLE Colour: White Inlay Letters Finish: Polished 4.4 OMARU STONE Selected sedimentary stone. Name/source: Omaru Stone Thickness: Varies refer to Drawings Finish: Brush Honed~ 4.5 MT SOMERS LIME STONE SHAPED TIPS Selected sedimentary stone to match Oamaru stone. Name/source: Mt Somers Lime Stone Thickness: Varies refer to Drawings Finish: Brush Honed


4.6 ANCHORS, CRAMPS, DOWELS Channels: DURAGAL Cast in Channels: 32 x32 UNISTRUT Clips: STONECLIP 4.7 SEALANT Brand: Sika AT Facade

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 3411 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK H&R Page 64

3411 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK H&R 1. SEE HADLEY AND ROBINSON STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATION

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 3411D DHS PURLINS AND GIRTS H&R Page 65

3411D DHS PURLINS AND GIRTS H&R 1. SEE HADLEY AND ROBINSON STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATION

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 3821 TIMBER FRAMING Page 66

3821 TIMBER FRAMING 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and erection of timber framing, as a framed structure, or

as part of a partitioning system. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to ~ for ~. Refer to 4161 WRAPS, UNDERLAYS AND DPC for wraps, underlays, foils and DPC. 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations

and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section: MSG Machine stress graded VSG Visual stress graded Documents 1.3 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC B2/AS1 Durability AS/NZS 1748.1 Timber - Solid - Stress graded for structural purposes - General

requirements AS/NZS 2904 Damp-proof courses and flashings NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3604:1999 Timber framed buildings NZS 3631 New Zealand timber grading rules NZS 3640 Chemical preservation of round and sawn timber AS/NZS 4347 Damp-proof courses and flashings - Methods of test OSH Guidelines for the provision of facilities and general safety in the

construction industry. BRANZ BU 475 Structurally fixed cavity battens 1.4 DIMENSIONS All timber sizes except for roof battens are actual minimum dried sizes. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 TIMBER FRAMING, TREATED Species, grade and in service moisture content to NZS 3602, NZBC B2/AS1 and

treatment to NZS 3640, NZBC B2/AS1. Either mechanically stress graded to AS/NZS 1748.1, or visual grading to NZS 3631.

2.2 TIMBER FRAMING, CHEMICAL FREE, MECHANICALLY STRESS GRADED Species, grade and moisture content in service as set out in NZS 3602, NZBC B2/AS1.

Machine stress graded to AS/NZS 1748.1, with an average moisture content at supply of 16% or less.

2.3 APPEARANCE TIMBERS Graded to NZS 3631, treated where required by NZBC B2/AS1, NZS 3602, table 1, and

treatment to NZS 3640. 2.4 STRAPPING Graded to NZS 3631, treated to NZBC B2/AS1, NZS 3602, table 1 and to NZS 3640,

clause 6.3.1. Species: Radiata pine


Grade: No.1 framing Size: 70mm x 45mm, 45mm x 45mm or 45mm x 19mm 2.5 EXTERIOR CAVITY WALL BATTENS - TIMBER - NON-STRUCTURAL H3.1 Radiata pine battens, minimum 20mm thickness, width and height to match timber

framing studs. Temporary fix battens before being fixed into the framing with the cladding fixings. To NZS 3602, table 1, reference 1D.10, Requirements for wood-based building components to achieve a 50-year durability performance.

2.6 EXTERIOR CAVITY WALL BATTENS - TIMBER - STRUCTURAL Suitable for horizontal weatherboards only, to BRANZ BU 475. H3.1 Radiata pine battens, minimum 20mm thickness, 40mm minimum width, and height

to match timber framing studs. Permanently fix battens onto the framing using 60x2.8mm jolt head hot-dip galvanised nails, or 64x2.8mm power driven stainless steel annular grooved nails at 300mm centres maximum, and staggered 12mm either side of the batten centreline. To NZS 3602, table 1, reference 1D.10, Requirements for wood-based building components to achieve a 50-year durability performance.

2.7 EXTERIOR CAVITY WALL BATTENS - PROPRIETARY - NON-STRUCTURAL Extruded polypropylene battens, size approximately 45mm wide x 18mm thickness.

Temporary fix battens before being fixed into the framing with the cladding fixings. To the scope limitations of NZBC Acceptable Solution E2/AS1, and NZS3604 Building Wind Zones up to, and including "Very High"

2.8 DPC Refer to 4161 WRAPS, UNDERLAYS AND DPC section Components 2.9 NAILS Type to NZS 3604, section 4: Durability, and of the size and number for each particular

types of joint as laid down in the nailing schedules of NZS 3604, sections 6-10. 2.10 BOLTS AND SCREWS Bolts and screws of engineering and/or coach type complete with washers, to the

requirements of NZS 3604, section 4: Durability, and of the number and form required for each particular junction to NZS 3604, sections 6-10.

2.11 THREADED RODS Use stainless steel threaded rods of the required length, with washers and nuts at both

ends, when stainless steel bolts of the required length are not available. 2.12 TIMBER CONNECTORS AND FIXINGS Supply for each particular joint the connectors and fixings as noted on the drawings.

Comply with the requirements of the manufacturer, NZS 3604, section 4: Durability, and of the number and form required for each particular junction to NZS 3604, sections 6-10.

2.13 BRACING STRAPS Nail-on type to the requirements of NZS 3604, section 4: Durability, and of the number

and form required for each particular application to NZS 3604, sections 6-10. 2.14 POWDER ACTUATED FASTENERS To type, size and charge required by the powder actuated tool manufacturer for each

particular member and the substrate. 2.15 CORROSION RISKS Use stainless steel fixings, connectors, etc in all zones, with the timber treatments CuAz

(Preservative code 58) and ACQ (Preservative code 90). 3. EXECUTION Conditions


3.1 PROTECT TIMBER Protect all timber against damage and from inclement weather. Ensure that any variation

in moisture content is kept to a minimum, before and after erection and before enclosure. 3.2 EXECUTION Execution to comply with NZS 3604, except as varied in this specification. Execution to

include those methods, practices and processes contained in the unit standards for the National Certificate in Carpentry and the National Certificate in Joinery (cabinetry, exterior joinery, stairs).

3.3 SEPARATION Separate all timber framing timbers from concrete, masonry and brick by: - - a full length polyethylene damp-proof membrane overlapping timber by at least 6mm; or - a 12mm minimum free draining air space 3.4 FRAMING MOISTURE CONTENT Maximum allowable equilibrium moisture content (EMC) for non air-conditioned or

centrally heated buildings, for framing to which linings are attached. - At erection: 24% EMC maximum - At enclosure: 20% EMC maximum - At lining: 16% EMC maximum 3.5 TOLERANCES Permissible deviations from established lines, grades and dimensions equal to or less

than the following. Multiples of given limits are not cumulative. - Deviation in plan, up to 10 metres, 5mm - Deviation in plan, over 10 metres, 10mm total - Deviation from horizontal, up to 10 metres, 5mm - Deviation from horizontal, over 10 metres, 10mm total - Deviation from vertical position per 3 metres, 3mm - Deviation from horizontal and vertical, within openings, 3mm. Application 3.6 SET-OUT Set-out framing generally in accordance with the requirements of NZS 3604, to carry

superimposed loads and as required to support sheet linings and claddings. Set back nogs 12.5mm from face of studs where required for back-blocking of plasterboard non-tapered ends or edges.

3.7 SET TIMBERS Set timbers true to required lines and levels with mitres, butt joints, laps and housings cut

accurately to provide full and even contact over the whole of the bearing surface. 3.8 TIMBER CUTTING Select and cut spanning members to minimise allowable defects and avoiding knots and

short grain on edges in the middle third, and shakes, splits and checks at mid-span and close to ends.

3.9 TIMBER PLATES AND FURRING Fix to steelwork with bolts and washers or approved proprietary fastenings at 1 metre

maximum spacing and not less than 2 fixings to each member, or to engineering specific design.

3.10 HOLES AND NOTCHES Limit holes and notches, checks and half-housing for the structure to those allowable in

NZS 3604. Neatly form holes and notches for services without lessening the structural integrity of the member.


3.11 CUTTING Cutting for straightening to comply with NZS 3604, 8.5.3. 3.12 EXPOSED TIMBER CONNECTORS AND FIXINGS Do not use steel timber connectors and fixings on any structural framing exposed to view

unless detailed on the drawings. 3.13 POWDER ACTUATED AND MECHANICALLY POWERED FIXING Comply with the OSH: Guidelines for the provision of facilities and general safety in the

construction industry, part 5, section 5.7. To be operated by a licensed applicator. 3.14 ADDITIONAL FRAMING Position and fix all necessary members for the fixing of all services, fittings, fixtures,

edges of linings or claddings, and to provide lateral support to load carrying framing. 3.15 FORM NAILED JOINTS Fully drive nails in all structural joints with the number and location for each particular

joint, to the requirements of the nailing schedules of NZS 3604. Where splitting could occur, pre-drill to 80% of nail diameter.

3.16 FORM BOLTED JOINTS Drill for and set bolts to ensure full bearing and development of the joint strength, with

tension to just set the washers into timber or to engineering specific design. 3.17 FIT CONNECTORS AND FIXINGS Fit connectors and fixings to obtain full bearing over all contact surfaces and full

development of the required loading capacity for that particular joint and in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements or to engineering specific design.

3.18 FIT CAVITY BATTENS Fit and fix cavity battens, fully nail to timber studs to the requirements of the manufacturer

or to NZS 3604. 3.19 FIT BRACING Fit and fix subfloor, wall and roof bracing elements to the requirements of the

manufacturer or to NZS 3604, to develop the full number of bracing units required. 3.20 DPC TO LOSP TREATED TIMBER Refer to 4161 WRAPS, UNDERLAYS AND DPC section 3.21 DPC TO TIMBER Refer to 4161 WRAPS, UNDERLAYS AND DPC section Completion 3.22 CLEAN UP Clean up timber framing as the work proceeds so no offcuts, chips, sawdust or any other

matter or items remain behind the claddings or linings. 3.23 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.24 REMOVE

© CIL Masterspec 2011 4121 SELLEYS LIQUID APPLIED VAPOUR BARRIER Page 70

4121 SELLEYS LIQUID APPLIED VAPOUR BARRIER 1. GENERAL This section relates to the application of SELLEYS VBS 2 pot Epoxy Vapour Barrier to the

concrete slab. Related work 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS Refer to 5432 TIMBER STRIP FLOORS for timber floor requirements and application. Refer to 4161 WRAPS AND UNDERLAYS Refer to 4711 INSULATION Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO Documents referred to in this section are: Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992 Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: SELLEYS Copies of the above literature are available from Ph: 0800 SELLEY (735 539)

Fax: 0800 804 583 Web: www.selleystrade.com.au Requirements 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS Carry out all work with applicators experienced in bituminous coating work. Provide

evidence of experience prior to commencing work. 1.5 HEALTH AND SAFETY As per OSH and Manufacturer Specifications Warranties 1.6 WARRANTY Warrant this work under normal environmental and use conditions against failure of

materials, waterproofing and execution. Warranty period: 20 years Refer to the general section for the required form of 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT

and details of when completed warranty must be submitted. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 LIQUID VAPOUR BARRIER SELLEYS VBS two-pack epoxy vapour barrier system. Accessories


2.2 SEALANT Rubberised bitumen sealant to the tanking manufacturer's requirements. 2.3 ADHESIVE Rubberised bitumen adhesive for cold application to the tanking manufacturer's

requirements. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 COMPLY Comply with the requirements and instructions of the manufacturer of the tanking. 3.2 STORAGE, SOLVENT BASED PRODUCTS Store under cover in a cool dry place under conditions complying with the Hazardous

Substances Regulations and keep containers sealed. 3.3 HANDLING, SOLVENT BASED PRODUCTS Handle and apply to the tanking manufacturer's recommended safety precautions and to

the requirements of the Health and Safety in Employment Act. 3.4 WEATHER CONDITIONS Apply vapour barrier only in fair weather with temperature above 5°C. 3.5 CHECK SUBSTRATE Check that the substrate will allow work of the required standard. Any remedial work

identified to be completed before any work is commenced. 3.6 CURING OF NEW CONCRETE Allow concrete and masonry to dry to the tanking manufacturer's requirements before

applying tanking. Minimum curing of new concrete to be 28 days. 3.7 BEFORE APPLYING Before applying ensure that the substrate is dry enough to avoid blowing and delaying of

curing. Application - preparation 3.8 ENSURE SUBSTRATE Ensure all surfaces are free from voids, spalled areas, loose particles, and sharp

protrusions. Ensure no projections of sharp materials exist that will cause damage to tanking. Check that masonry joints are struck off flush.

Ensure form oils or release agents and curing compounds are completely removed. 3.9 PREPARE SUBSTRATE Remove any projections, wire-brush and remove debris, leaving the surface dust-free, oil-

free and clean, with nothing that could diminish the adhesion of primers. Fill tie holes flush and smooth with mortar. Grind off steps or sharp protrusions caused by formwork joints.

3.10 CLEAN SURFACES Clean surfaces with a broom or compressed air to remove all dust, loose particles and

material that could affect bonding. 3.11 CRACKS AND VOIDS Identify cracked areas and confirm that the cracks viewed are stable and non-structural.

Apply a primer coat of 50/50 waterproofing emulsion/water into crack and void extending 75mm outwards. Allow to cure. Apply a heavy brush coat of waterproofing emulsion over the primer and while still wet lay in a fibreglass membrane extending 75mm outwards. Allow to cure.


3.12 CRACKS AND VOIDS, SEALANT Repair cracks and voids less than 25mm deep with sealant to the tanking manufacturer's

requirements. Application - generally 3.13 COATING Apply Coats as per Manufacturer Specification. Apply one coat of waterproofing emulsion

in one direction. Allow to cure - in average conditions 10 to 12 hours. Apply a second coat of waterproofing emulsion in the other direction. Allow to cure - average conditions 10 to 12 hours. Brush apply at the rate of 0.75 litres/m2 per coat.

3.14 MOVEMENT Over expansion joints and where excessive movement is anticipated lay a fibreglass

membrane into the first coat of waterproofing emulsion, extending 75mm outwards from the affected area.

3.15 JOINTS Where construction joints are necessary on the surface, at corners, or at edges, lap

continuing coats 75mm over the existing layers. 3.16 PENETRATIONS Seal around pipes and penetrations, using a fibreglass membrane extending 75mm

outwards from the penetration. Application - Protection 3.17 SECTIONAL COMPLETION As sections of the tanking are completed, arrange for inspection of the work before

covering with protective sheets, walls, or slabs. 3.18 PROTECT VERTICAL SURFACES Protect the vertical tanking from damage before covering with protective sheets. 3.19 PROTECT HORIZONTAL SURFACES Protect the horizontal tanking from damage during laying by ensuring applicators wear

soft soled shoes. Completion 3.20 CLEAN UP Clean up as the work proceeds. 3.21 LEAVE Leave this work in a sound, coherent, voidless and impermeable smooth condition,

completely waterproof, free of any defect and with protection sheets firmly in place. 3.22 REMOVE Remove all debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 VAPOUR BARRIER EMULSION Manufacturer: SELLEYS Brand name: VBS Two Pot epoxy

© CIL Masterspec 2011 4161 WRAPS, UNDERLAYS AND DPC Page 73

4161 WRAPS, UNDERLAYS AND DPC 1. GENERAL This section relates to the application of DPC, DPM, , wall wraps and roofing underlays: 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 4711 for INSULATION 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations

and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section: NZMRM New Zealand Metal Roofing Manufacturers Inc. Documents 1.3 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture NZS/AS 1530.2 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and

structures - Test for flammability of materials NZS 2295 Pliable, permeable building underlays AS/NZS 2904 Damp-proof courses and flashings NZS 3604:1999 Timber framed buildings NZS 4200 Pliable building membranes and underlays NZS 4214 Methods of determining the total thermal resistance of parts of

buildings AS/NZS 4347 Damp-proof courses and flashings - Methods of test AS/NZS 4389 Safety mesh AS/NZS 4534 Zinc and zinc/aluminium-alloy coatings on steel wire NZMRM NZ Metal Roof and Wall Cladding - Code of Practice Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.

However this specification takes precedence in the event of it being at variance with the cited document.

1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Tasman Insulation product manual and technical data sheets. Thermakraft product manual and technical data sheets. Relevant BRANZ Appraisals 1.5 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY Warrant this work under normal environmental and use conditions against failure of

materials and execution. Warrant performance of products if design and installation complies with relevant Manufacturers technical literature, NZBC, and recognised industry Codes of Practice.

1.6 INTERPRETATION Wall Wraps used in this specification has the same meaning as wall underlays in

NZS 3604 and NZBC E2/AS1. Requirements 1.7 NO SUBSTITUTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to any specified materials, or associated products,

components or accessories.


1.8 INSTALLATION SKILL LEVELS Installers to be experienced in the installation of the products and familiar with the

manufacturers technical literature and the related documents listed in this design i.e. NZMRM NZ Metal Roof and Wall Cladding - Code of Practice.

2. PRODUCTS Materials DPM 2.1 DAMP-PROOF MEMBRANE Moistop 759, a heavy duty high impact film, 250 microns thick and manufactured for the

building industry, with a water vapour resistance of no less than 670MNs/g, to NZBC Clause E2/AS1. All joints lapped 150mm and sealed with 48mm PVC jointing tape.

DPC 2.2 HEAVY KRAFT BITUMINOUS COATED AND POLYMERIC FILM LAMINATE Thermakraft MirraBlack DPC, a bitumen saturated kraft with high strength polymeric

film, to BRANZ Appraisal 560. Refer to SELECTIONS for type of jointing tape. Wall wraps / underlay 2.3 SYNTHETIC, ABSORBENT NON WOVEN BREATHER TYPE WALL UNDERLAY Thermakraft CoverTEK™, tear resistant 5 layer polymer self supporting non woven

building underlay with micro perforated pores that allow the membrane to breathe. A fire retardant product, Flammability Index of ≤ 5, when tested to NZS/AS 1530.2. The product has a BRANZ Appraisal 356.

2.4 FIRE RETARDANT FOIL VAPOUR BARRIER Flamestop 524, Puncture resistant Self Supporting Foil. Flammability Index not greater

than 5 (AS 1530 Part 2; NZS 4214) Accessories 2.5 WINDOW AND DOOR SEALING TAPE Thermakraft Aluband™ Window Sealing Tape system consists of synthetic faced

reinforced bituminous window sealing tape, Thermakraft Aluband™ Corner Moulding™ piece, used in conjunction with the Thermakraft Aluband™ Hand Tool to ensure good adhesion and a tight fit into corners. See Thermakraft Data Sheet 312 for installation details and BRANZ Appraisal 614.

2.6 TAPE PVC tapes to compliment the underlay. Pressure sensitive aluminium foil tapes for

joining foil insulation and vapour barriers. Thermakraft Aluband™ Window Sealing Tape can be used to repair damaged bituminous building papers.

3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Design application and installation of Wraps, DPC and DPM Building products to

NZBC E2/AS1, BRANZ Appraisals, Manufacturer Technical Literature and Industry Codes of Practice.

3.2 STORAGE Store building underlays and accessory materials, under conditions that ensure no

deterioration or damage. Store rolls in an upright position on a smooth floor and protected from sunlight, UV radiation and moisture.


3.3 INSPECTION Before starting work, check that the building construction phase will allow work of the

required standard. Carry out remedial work identified before laying underlay. Application DPC / DPM 3.4 DPC TO LOSP/CCA TREATED TIMBER Lay Supercourse 500 / MirraBlack DPC under LOSP or CCA treated bottom plate of all

timber framed walls on concrete, in a single layer with 50mm overlaps at joints to provide a waterproof barrier.

3.5 DPC TO TIMBER / STEEL / ALUMINIUM Lay DPC under the bottom plate of all timber, steel, aluminium on concrete, in a single

layer with 50mm overlaps at joints to provide a waterproof barrier. 3.6 DPM TO CONCRETE FLOOR Lay DPM to concrete floor in a single layer with 150mm overlaps at joints to provide a

waterproof barrier. Tape all joints and penetrations with PVC tape. Application - Wall underlay 3.7 WALL UNDERLAY Fix horizontally to outside face of framing in true alignment, with succeeding sheets

overlapping 150mm to NZS 3604 Table 4.1 and 4.2 requirement for fastenings. Fix to Thermakraft Industries Technical Data specifications. Scribe neatly around penetrations and openings to leave no gaps. Tape all penetrations. Keep clean, undamaged and without visible weather deterioration until closed in.

Gutter roof underlays 3.8 FOIL ROOF UNDERLAY AS VAPOUR BARRIER Lay horizontally across battens as detailed. Start at the gutter and work towards the ridge

with a minimum lap of 150mm. Tape joints using tape 493 foil reinforced x 48mm. 3.9 ROOF UNDERLAY INSTALLATION Apply from the lowest point to allow laps to shed water. All edge and end laps must be

overlapped by a minimum of 150mm. Ensure that the underlay is properly fixed to the surface at perimeters or around penetrations.

Completion 3.10 CLEAN UP Clean up as the work proceeds. 3.11 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.12 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise. 4.1 DPC Location: Junctions Concrete to Timber, Steel or Aluminium~ Type: Supercourse 500™ Jointing tape: Aluband™ 50mm


4.2 DPM Location: Floor and Walls Type: Moistop 759 Polyethylene 0.25mm Jointing Tape: 48mm black PVC tape 4.3 FIRE RETARDENT BUILDING WRAP Location: Titan board walls, Alucobond Soffit Type: Covertek Fire Retardant Breathable Wrap Jointing: 150mm Lap, Self Supporting. 4.4 FOIL ROOFING VAPOUR BARRIER Location: Roof Gutter Type: Flamestop 524 Fire Retardant Foil Jointing tape: 3M 425 Foil tape 48mm Accessories 4.5 WINDOW/DOOR SEALING SYSTEM Location: Windor and Door Junctions Type: Thermakraft Aluband™ Window Sealing Tape

© CIL Masterspec 2011 4231HF JAMES HARDIE TITAN FACADE CLADDING Page 77

4231HF JAMES HARDIE TITAN FACADE CLADDING 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and fixing of James Hardie fibre cement Titan® Facade

Panel 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to SECTION 3821 for TIMBER FRAMING. Refer to painting section/s for the protective coating required to meet the NZBC durability

requirements. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind actions AS/NZS 2908.2 Cellulose-cement products - Flat sheet NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3604:1999 Timber framed buildings AS/NZS 4284 Testing of building facades 1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS James Hardie documents relating to this part of the work: Titan® Facade Panel/ExoTec® Facade Panel Rainscreen technical specification BRANZ Appraisal 467 - Titan® & Exotec® Facade Panel Rainscreen Manufacturer/supplier contact details Web: www.jameshardie.co.nz Telephone: 0800 808 868 Warranties 1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty: 15 years: For James Hardie™ . (refer to James Hardie™ product warranty) 15 year: For accessories supplied by James Hardie (refer to James Hardie™

product warranty) From: Date of purchase - Provide this warranty on the manufacturer's standard form. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. Requirements 1.5 NO SUBSTITUTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to any specified system, or associated components and

products. 1.6 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Provide relevant James Hardie maintenance requirements at completion of the work. Performance 1.7 PERFORMANCE, WIND The design wind pressures are to AS/NZS 1170.2. James Hardie Technical Specification

are suitable for these conditions. Refer to technical specification to check the wind pressure limits.

Up to;


2.5kPa ULS Titan® Facade Panel on CLD® Structural Cavity Batten. 4.5kPa ULS Titan® Facade Panel on timber cavity battens. 5.0kPa ULS ExoTec® Facade Panel on steel top hat section. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 BUILDING WRAP Refer to section 4161 WRAPS, UNDERLAYS AND DPC. 2.2 TITAN FACADE PANEL James Hardie Titan® Facade Panel, medium density autoclaved sheet, 1190mm wide x

9mm thick manufactured from treated cellulose fibre, Portland cement, sand and water. Cured by high pressure autoclaving and manufactured to AS/NZS 2908.2. BRANZ appraised, tested to AS/NZS 4284 for weathertightness. Both faces and all edges presealed.

Components 2.3 FASTENER TYPE Fasteners to minimum durability requirements of the NZBC. Refer to NZS 3604, Section

4 Durability, for requirements for fixing's material to be used in relation to the exposure conditions.

Exposure conditions & nail selection prescribed by NZS 3604, Section 4, Table 4.3 Steel

items such as nails and screws used for framing and cladding.

Zone Fixings MaterialSea Spray Zones* Grade 316 Stainless Zone 1 (outside sea spray zone), Zones 2 - 4 & Geothermal hot spots

Hot-dipped galvanized or 316 stainless

Bracing - All zones Grade 316 Stainless * Zone 1 areas where local knowledge dictates that increased durability is required,

appropriate selection shall be made Refer to NZBC E2/AS1, Table 20, Material selection, and Table 21, Compatibility of

materials in contact, for selection of suitable fixing materials and their compatibility with other materials.

2.4 NAIL / SCREWS, CLD® STRUCTURAL CAVITY BATTEN FIXING Hot-dip galvanized 65mm x 2.8mm RounDrive ring shank nail for fixing to timber framing.

50mm x 9-10g countersunk head steel screw (Class 3 or 4) for fixing to steel framing 2.5 SCREWS, FACADE PANEL FIXING TO TIMBER BATTEN Grade 316 stainless steel countersunk wood screws 65mm x 10 g for ExoTec® and Titan®

Facade Panels. 2.6 NAIL/SCREWS, TITAN FACADE PANEL FIXING TO CLD® BATTEN Titan® Facade Panel fixing to CLD® Structural Cavity Batten. Stainless Steel C-25 'T' Head brad nail for wind pressure up to 1.5kPa. For wind pressures up to 2.5kPa (select one of the following): 25mm x 2.5mm annular threaded fibre cement nail. 25mm x 8-10g or pan / wafer head exposed screw (Class 3/ 4) 25mm x 8-10g countersunk screw (Class 3/ 4 or stainless steel) 2.7 STAINLESS STEEL NAILS 316 stainless steel HardieFlex™ nails for Titan® Facade Panel fixing. 60mm x 3.15mm diameter for cavity construction. Accessories


2.8 SEALING STRIPS Inseal® 3259, 1.5mm thick x 50mm wide black compressible medium density closed cell

foam tape. Butyl rubber black membrane with a 6mm x 9mm Inseal 3109 adhered along each edge

of one face with pressure sensitive acrylic adhesive. 50mm wide for vertical joints and 80mm wide for corners.

Polypropylene / Polyethylene flashing for internal and external corners used with CLD®

structural cavity batten. 2.9 SEALANT Silaflex MS sealant or similar. Refer to the sheet manufacturer's technical literature for

selection and use requirements. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 STORAGE Take delivery of products dry and undamaged on pallets, and keep on pallet. Protect

edges and corners from damage and covered to keep dry until fixed. 3.2 HANDLING Avoid distortion and contact with potentially damaging surfaces. Do not drag sheets

across each other, or across other materials. Protect edges, corner and surface finish from damage.

3.3 SUBSTRATE Do not commence work until the substrate is of the standard required for the specified

finish; plumb, level and in true alignment. Moisture content of timber framing must not exceed the requirements specified by NZS 3602 to minimise shrinkage and movement after sheets are fixed.

For facade panel confirm that 75mm framing for vertical joints and 125mm nogs for

horizontal joints have been correctly installed when using timber cavity battens. 3.4 SEAL EDGES Seal site cut sheet edges prior to installation. Seal sheet edges around window and door

openings, meter boxes and at other penetrations. Application - generally 3.5 FIX BUILDING WRAP Refer to 4161 WRAPS, UNDERLAYS AND DPC. 3.6 PENETRATIONS AND FLASHINGS Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all

window and door frames and other penetrations through the cladding. Required preparatory work includes the following:

- Building wrap appropriately incorporated with penetration and junction flashings. - Materials lapped in a way that water tracks down to the exterior face of the building

wrap. - Wall cladding underlay/building wrap to openings finished and dressed off ready for the

installation of window and door frames and other penetrations - Claddings neatly finished off to all sides of openings - Installation of flashings (those required to be installed prior to installation of penetrating

elements). Install Titan® Facade Panels


3.7 FIXING GENERALLY All panel edges must be supported. The screws must be driven perfectly tight against the

panels so that there is no movement between the panels and framing. Use a hand screw driver to finally tighten all screws. The minimum edge distance as per technical specification must be maintained when fixing screws or nails through the rainscreen panels. When countersunk screws are used the screw head must be set between 1.5mm minimum to 2.0mm maximum below the panel surface.

Use James Hardie countersinking drill bit to drill holes in the panel. The drill speed must

be set between 400 and 560 rpm. 3.8 FINISHING SITE CUT EDGES Any penetrations as well as site cut sheet edges must be sealed with an appropriate

sealer that is compatible with the finishing coat. 3.9 FINISHING SEALANTS Apply and use of sealants to manufacturer's instructions. Check with sealant

manufacturer prior to coating over sealants. 3.10 FINISHING SCREW FILLER Fill all countersunk screw holes with an epoxy filler. The countersunk holes must be

clean and dry before they are filled. Ensure that the screws are perfectly tight and there is no movement between the panel and framing before the holes are filled. Use Nuplex Fairing Cream or a similar product for this purpose. Refer to the epoxy manufacturer recommendation before use.

3.11 FINISHING GENERAL Refer to painting section/s for protective coating system. Panels must be coated within

90 days of installation. Completion 3.12 REPLACE Replace all damaged or marked elements. 3.13 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required for following procedures. 3.14 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 TITAN FACADE PANELS Location: Link between stage 4 and Stage 3 Brand/type: James Hardie Titan® Facade panel Thickness: 9mm Fastener type: Stainless steel nail Fastener finish: 316 Stainless Steel Finishing 4.2 PAINTING Refer to painting section/s for details.

© CIL Masterspec 2011 4251 ALUMINIUM COMPOSITE SOFFIT Page 81

4251 ALUMINIUM COMPOSITE SOFFIT 1. GENERAL This section relates to the fabrication, supply and installation of 4mm ALUCOBOND pre-

finished aluminium composite panels to the Soffit, Apex Fascia and Ceiling. Related work 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS Refer to SECTION 4421N for NURALITE ROOF. Refer to SECTION 4161 for WARPS AND UNDERLAYS. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO Documents referred to in this section are: AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind actions NZS 1170.5 Structural design actions - Earthquake actions - New Zealand AS 1397 Steel sheet and strip - Hot-dipped, zinc-coated or aluminium/zinc-

coated AS 1866 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Extruded rod, bar, solid and hollow

shapes AS 2848 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Compositions and designations -

Wrought products NZS 3604:1999 Timber framed buildings AS/NZS 4284 Testing of building facades AS/NZS ISO 9001 Quality management systems - Requirements AAMA 2604-98 Voluntary specification, performance requirements and test

procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminium Extrusions and Panels

Window Association of New Zealand: Specification for powder organic coatings on

architectural aluminium products Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: ALUCOBOND South Island Agent S.I.A.C Terry Ryan - Cell: 0212 880 867 Copies of the above literature are available from ~ Web: siac.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 03 377 9180 Facsimile: 03 377 9181 Requirements 1.4 SAMPLES Submit for assessment samples of all materials before beginning fabrication: 300mm x

450mm for sheets and 300mm long for aluminium extrusions. Provide one sample for each material/finish visible in the finished work. In addition provide a sample of a completed joint.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS Provide shop drawings and installation details to show, but not be limited to: - design calculations - fully dimensioned elevations of all elements (minimum scale 1:20) - complete details of construction, connections and all support systems (scale 1:10) - dimensions of all typical elements and of any special sizes and shapes


- provision for the exclusion and/or drainage of moisture - jointing details and method of fixing between individual elements and between this

installation and adjacent work, including adjustment - adjustment of fixings to ensure accurate alignment of composite cladding - sealant types and full size sections of all sealants and backing rods - provision for thermal movement - provision for seismic movement and movement under wind loads - sequence of installation - co-ordination requirements with other work - a full schedule of materials, finishes, componentry, hardware and fittings. Refer to the general section 1235 SHOP DRAWINGS for the requirements for submission

and review and the provision of final shop drawings. Warranties 1.6 WARRANTY Warrant this work against all failures, including but not limited to a warranty that work will

be weathertight, structurally sound and free from distortion and deformation under load, and that materials and finishes will not crack, peel, blister, delaminate or otherwise deteriorate or corrode.

Warranty period: 5 years Refer to the general section for the required form of 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT

and details of when completed warranty must be submitted. Performance 1.7 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Refer to SELECTIONS for requirements. 1.8 FIXINGS, WIND Design and use the fixings appropriate for the wind zone (R) and topographical

classification (T) of this site and building height; as required by NZS 3604 and the wind loads on various wall areas as given by AS/NZS 1170. Refer to SELECTIONS for requirements.

ElementSLS (Serviceability limit state) ~ ULS (Ultimate limit state) ~

1.9 FIXINGS, EARTHQUAKE Use fixings and methods capable of sustaining the loads appropriate to the area as

required by NZS 1170. 1.10 LABORATORY TESTING Conduct laboratory testing of a prototype of the building facade to AS/NZS 4284. 1.11 QUALITY CONTROL Maintain an approved quality control system in accordance with AS/NZS ISO 9001,

covering all stages of design, fabrication, installation and completion of the aluminium cladding and soffits.

1.12 PERFORMANCE Accept responsibility for the weather-tight performance of the completed cladding system,

including all penetrations. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 BUILDING WRAPS AND UNDERLAYS Breather type, waterproof. Thermakraft CoverTEK


2.2 ALUMINIUM COMPOSITE PANELS Composite aluminium-faced solid; polyethylene cored, non combustible mineral fibre

cored or phenolic-resin cored sheet, factory finished on face side with polyvinylidene fluoride PVF2 coating.

Components 2.3 PANEL STIFFENING Proprietary folded composite sheet, or galvanized steel top hat sections to AS 1397,

coating class not less than Z275, structurally glued and sealed to the back of the panels, as required by the panel manufacturer.

2.4 FIXING SECTIONS Extruded aluminium fixing sections. Aluminium alloy AA 6063-T5 to AS 1866 (designated

to AS 2848). 2.5 WALL FIXING SYSTEM Proprietary secret-fixing clamped gasket system, as required by the manufacturer. 2.6 SOFFIT SUSPENSION SYSTEM Proprietary-design, Z300 galvanized steel, fully braced seismic-resistant system, with all

elements from the one manufacturer and compatible with one another. 2.7 HANGERS Galvanized steel angle or strap hangers designed to resist compression, to AS 1397,

coating class not less than Z275. 2.8 STRONGBACKS Galvanized steel channel to AS 1397, coating class not less than Z275. 2.9 FURRING CHANNELS Galvanized steel top hat section to AS 1397, coating class not less than Z275. 2.10 FIXINGS AND FASTENINGS Designed, supplied and installed by the aluminium panel manufacturer. 2.11 SCREWS Type 316L stainless steel with countersunk Phillips heads finished to match surrounding

surfaces. Use concealed screws wherever practicable. 2.12 RIVETS Aluminium alloy blind rivets of the same composition as the materials being joined. 2.13 COMPATIBILITY All elements and accessories compatible on the electrochemical scale of metals so that

no sacrificial corrosion will occur. All elements and accessories of an appropriate quality, ensuring that no reduction in structural integrity or weathertightness occurs during the guaranteed life of the panel system.

Finishes 2.14 FLUOROPOLYMER COATING Fluorocarbon PVDF Containing 70% Kynar® 500 PVF2 polyvinylidene fluoride resin, to

AAMA 2604-98. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 INSTALLATION All work to be carried out by competent and experienced installers, who are currently

approved by the panel manufacturers or New Zealand distributors, in accordance with the


manufacturer's stated requirements and the approved shop drawings. Carry out all cladding manufacture and installation under the control and supervision of a nominated representative of the panel manufacturer.

3.2 NON-FACTORY METAL FINISHES Apply metal finishes using applicators currently approved in writing by the coating

manufacturer. 3.3 TOUCH-UP In situ touch up of factory applied finishes is not permitted unless a trial repair is

subsequently approved in writing. Replace all other panels with a damaged finish. 3.4 HANDLE AND STORE Handle and store pre-finished panels and materials so that no damage will be done to the

form, material, or finish. 3.5 UNLOAD Unload, handle and store preformed and pre-finished panels in accordance with the

manufacturer's stated requirements. 3.6 DO NOT DELIVER Do not deliver to site any elements which cannot be immediately unloaded into suitable

conditions of storage. 3.7 PROTECTION Avoid distortion of elements during transit, handling and storage. Prevent pre-finished

surfaces from rubbing together. Prevent contact with mud, plaster and cement, or with dissimilar metals.

3.8 DO NOT USE Do not use adhesive tape, film, papers, or sprayed protective coatings, or masking tape,

which might become bonded after exposure to sun or weather. Remove any temporary protection after installation. Remove any protective coating residues immediately.

Assembly 3.9 FABRICATION Do not start fabrication until shop drawings and erection drawings have been reviewed

and material samples approved. 3.10 FACTORY PRODUCTION Do not start factory production before shop drawings have been reviewed, prototypes

have been constructed and test results show compliance with the required quality standards.

3.11 FABRICATE Fabricate aluminium composite panels and elements in the workshop wherever possible,

ready for assembly and erection on the building site. Application 3.12 INSTALL UNDERLAY Install underlay to all exterior timber walls and strapping being clad with aluminium

composite panels. Fix paper with proprietary three-pronged suspension system, or similar broad-based fixing staples.

3.13 PENETRATIONS Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all

window and door frames and other penetrations through the cladding. Required preparatory work includes the following:

- wall cladding underlay/building wrap to openings finished and dressed off ready for the installation of window and door frames and other penetrations

- claddings neatly finished off to all sides of openings


- installation of flashings (those required to be installed prior to installation of penetrating elements).

3.14 INSTALL PANELS Install aluminium composite panels in accordance with the drawings, stated design

parameters (including joint size and design modules) reviewed and approved shop drawings, approved prototypes and installation details. Co-ordinate with related work. Consult and coordinate as necessary with installers of adjoining work, including window and door installations.

3.15 FIX SOFFITS AND APEX FASCIA Suspend and fix aluminium composite soffits on a proprietary suspension system. Supply

and fix all edge flashings and edgings as detailed. 3.16 APPLY SEALANTS Clean joints with solvent, mask adjoining surfaces, install backing rod or breaker tape and

install sealant in accordance with the reviewed shop drawings, sealant profiles and sealant manufacturer's instructions.

3.17 COMPLETE Ensure the work is complete with all flashings, finishings and trim properly installed so the

cladding system is completely weathertight. Completion 3.18 PROTECTION Protect all surfaces and finishes for damage as long as practicable, including the

retention of all or any protective coatings provided by the panel manufacturer. Remove protective coatings, using only the methods required by the panel manufacturer.

3.19 CLEAN Clean panel surfaces with soft, clean cloths and clean water and in accordance with the

panel manufacturer's stated requirements. Finish with a clean squeegee. Do not use abrasive or alkaline materials.

3.20 ON COMPLETION Trade clean all panel surfaces to remove all marks, dust and dirt to enable a visual

inspection of all surfaces at completion of the installation and again at contract completion.

4. SELECTIONS 4.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ~ 4.2 FIXINGS, WIND

ElementSLS (Serviceability limit state) ~ ULS (Ultimate limit state)

4.3 BUILDING WRAPS/UNDERLAYS Brand/weight: Thermakraft CoverTEK Flashing tape brand: Aluband™ 50mm 4.4 ALUMINIUM COMPOSITE PANELS Brand: ALUCOBOND Panel type: Alucobond PE Panel thickness: 4mm (3mm Polyethylene Core) Aluminium Skin thickness: 0.5mm Aluminium each side Colour: 500 Silver Metallic


4.5 FLUOCARBON PVDF COATING Brand: Alcan ALUCOBOND Colour: 500 Silver Metallic Gloss level: 30-40% Thickness: 25 microns Min Location: Soffit and Apex Fascia 4.6 SEALANTS Sikaflex AT Facade

© CIL Masterspec 2011 4337 PLYWOOD ROOFING AND FLOORING SUBSTRATE Page 87

4337 PLYWOOD ROOFING AND FLOORING SUBSTRATE 1. GENERAL This section relates to the use of plywood sheets for: - 17.5 MBH (Marine Bonded hardwood) Plywood substrate floor substrate. - 19mm CD grade H3.2 Plywood substrate for Roof Gutter 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS Refer to SECTION 4421 for NURALITE ROOF. Refer to SECTION 4711 for INSULATION. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO Documents referred to in this section are: NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind actions NZS 1170.5 Structural design actions - Earthquake actions - New Zealand AS/NZS 1604.3 Specification for preservative treatment - Plywood AS/NZS 2269 Plywood - structural - specifications NZS 3604:1999 Timber framed buildings Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


Performance 1.3 STRUCTURAL FIXINGS, WIND Design and use the fixings appropriate for the wind zone (R) and topographical

classification (T) of this site and building height; as required by NZS 3604 and the wind loads on various wall areas as given by AS/NZS 1170.2.

1.4 STRUCTURAL FIXINGS, EARTHQUAKE Use fixings and methods capable of sustaining the loads appropriate to the area as set

out in NZS 3604 and as required by NZS 1170.5. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 PLYWOOD Radiata pine veneer ply to AS/NZS 2269, face sanded, grade as scheduled. H3 CCA treated to AS/NZS 1604.3 when used as a deck substrate. Confirm compatibility

with adhesives being used with the waterproofing membrane. Components 2.2 SCREWS Stainless steel, counter-sunk. Refer to the plywood manufacturer's requirements for size

and use. 17 - 21mm plywood: No. 10 x 45mm 2.3 ADHESIVE Single pack waterproof general purpose construction adhesive, as recommended by the

manufacturer. 3. EXECUTION Conditions


3.1 HANDLE Handle sheets carefully and reject those with damaged faces or edges. 3.2 STORE Store sheets in stacks clear of the ground, supported without sagging on evenly spaced

horizontal bearers. Protect from damage and weather. 3.3 SUPPORT FRAMING Ensure support framing is completed to the plywood manufacturer's stated requirements

for laying plywood sheets. Application 3.4 SUPPORT EDGES AND JOINTS Fully support edges and joints on square edged sheets. 3.5 FIXINGS Minimum 7mm, maximum 15mm from the edge, 150mm centres along edges and 300mm

centres on intermediate supports. 3.6 FIXING PLYWOOD SHEETS Fix sheets to the plywood manufacturers requirements. Lay sheets in a staggered layout,

face-grain of sheet at right-angles to support and with sheets in square, true alignment and plane.

3.7 UNDER MEMBRANES To NZBC E2/AS1, External moisture, 8.5 Membrane roofs and decks. Screw and

adhesive fix sheets for membrane type roofing to the plywood and membrane manufacturers' requirements. CD grade plywood with the C face up (or better).

Provide falls as shown on the drawings, or to the membrane manufacturer's requirements, or to the local Building Consent Authorities requirements - whichever is the greater.

Completion 3.8 PROTECTION Protect work from the weather until it is covered, coated or sealed. 3.9 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.10 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.11 REMOVE Remove all debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 PLYWOOD, ROOFING Location: Roof Manufacturer: ~ Brand/grade: CD Thickness: 19 mm Treatment: H3 CCA Fixing: Stainless Steel Screw 4.2 PLYWOOD, T&G ROOFING Location: Timber Floor Substrate Manufacturer: ~ Brand/grade: MBH Thickness: 17.5mm Treatment: H3 CCA


Fixing: Stainless Steel Screw

© CIL Masterspec 2011 4421N NURALITE ROOFING Page 90

4421N NURALITE ROOFING 1. GENERAL This section relates to the application of NURAPLY 3P TWO LAYER roofing systems as

external membrane waterproof coverings, adhesive bonded to construction plywood to produce a fully adhered bituminous membrane system. TWO Prices are required 1 Price For Two Layer Paint Finish 2 Price for Two Layer Mineral Aggregate Finish 1.1 DOCUMENTS Documents referred to in this section are: BRANZ BU 345 Flat membrane roofs - design and installation BRANZ BU 346 Flat membrane roofs - materials BRANZ Good practice guide Membrane roofing Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


1.2 SUPPLIER'S DOCUMENTS Supplier's documents from Nuralite Waterproofing Ltd relating to work in this section are: BRANZ Appraisal 547 - Nuraply Roof Membranes NURAPLY Systems design and specification manual NURALITE Waterproofing Limited: CAD drawings Copies of the above literature are available from NURALITE Waterproofing Limited. Web: www.nuralite.co.nz Telephone: 0-9-579 2046 Auckland 0800 Nuralite (0800 687 254) Facsimile: 0-9-579 5136 Auckland Warranties 1.3 WARRANTY - INSTALLERS The Nuraply applicator warrants this work under normal environmental and use

conditions against failure of materials, waterproofing and execution. 5 years: By the NURAPLY Applicator From: Date of completion of the application Provide this warranty on the installer's standard form. 1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER The NURAPLY applicator to provide warranty for the system under normal environmental

and use conditions against failure. 20 years: Warranty period From: Date of completion of the application Provide this warranty on the NURALITE Waterproofing Limited Materials Performance

Warranty form. Requirements 1.5 NO SUBSTITUTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to any specified system, or associated components and

products.


1.6 QUALIFICATIONS Roofing to be carried out by competent workers licensed by NURALITE Waterproofing

Limited and experienced with NURALITE materials systems and specialist techniques. Provide on request evidence of experience prior to commencing work.

Performance 1.7 TEST Flood test horizontal applications with a minimum 50mm depth of water for 24 hours.

Make good any lack of watertightness when the surface is completely dry. 1.8 PERFORMANCE Accept responsibility for the weather-tight performance of the completed NURAPLY

roofing system, including all penetrations through the roof and junctions with walls and parapets. In the event that there are issues relating to any aspect of this work, arrange for a meeting to resolve these issues. The following should attend:

- NURAPLY roofing applicator - NURALITE Waterproofing Limited representative - Contractor - Principal - Principal's consultant(s) 1.9 AS APPROVED "As approved" means that the materials are compatible with NURAPLY 3P roofing and

are part of the system required by the roofing supplier for each specific location. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 NURALITE WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE, BASE LAYER NURAPLY 3PB provides a 3mm thick first layer in two layer applications on plywood. 2.2 NURALITE WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE, MINERAL FACE NURAPLY 3PM second layer, 4mm thick reinforced fibre asphalt waterproofing

membrane with textured mineral aggregate finish. Top layer over NURAPLY 3PB or NURAPLY 3PV basesheet.

2.3 NURALITE WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE, PLAIN FINISH NURAPLY 3P second layer, 3mm thick reinforced fibre asphalt waterproofing membrane.

Sand surface for smooth NURACOLOUR or NURACOAT dressing. Alternative Top layer over NURAPLY 3PB or NURAPLY 3PV basesheet.

2.4 EDGE TRIM To Nuralite Waterproofing Limited details and to suit the specific location. NURATRIM

aluminium verge trim where detailed. 2.5 OUTLETS As detailed and rebated into surfaces as required by NURALITE Waterproofing Limited. 2.6 VENTILATORS NURAVENTS in plywood roofs to NURALITE Waterproofing Limited specification. Round or square NURAVENTS as described in SELECTIONS. 2.7 ACCESSORIES Accessories as required including: Adhesives: NURABOND No. 10 Primer: NURAFLUX Sealants: Seal'n'Flex Paving supports: NURAJACKS 2.8 COATING OVER NURAPLY 3PM Surface dressing: NURAGLAZE.


3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 GENERALLY Work and materials to BRANZ Bulletins 345 and 346, BRANZ Good practice guide -

Membrane roofing, and to NURALITE Waterproofing Limited installation instructions. 3.2 STORAGE Take delivery of rolls undamaged and include for site handling facilities where required.

Stack on end, off the ground on a level surface and with accessories. Store in shade or cover in hot sun. Protect liquid components from freezing.

3.3 LAYOUT If not detailed on the drawings, confirm the layout to suit site conditions and for the

performance of the NURAPLY 3P system. Confirm if NURAPLY 3P ROLL-CAP batten finish is required. Confirm shape, size and spacing for rollcap timber battens. Stagger junctions of NURAPLY 3P rolls to avoid 4 layer membrane build-up at corner lap joints. Confirm the location and type of NURAVENTS.

Application - preparation 3.4 PRELIMINARY WORK Ensure that preliminary work, including formation of falls, flashing rebates, grooves,

ducts, provision of battens and fillets and location of NURAVENTS and outlets rebated to levels, is complete and properly constructed to enable the system to work as intended. This work and the substrate to be smooth, clean and dry.

3.5 ACCEPTANCE OF SUBSTRATE Confirm that the substrate, including fillets, sumps, rebated outlets and projections, will

ensure NURAPLY work of the required standard. Ensure the substrate is smooth, clean and dry and falls on roofs are 1 in 40 minimum and 1 in 60 minimum for decks and 1 in 100 for gutters.

3.6 PLYWOOD SUBSTRATE Ensure that sheets have been stretcher bond laid to falls, are rigid, with joints flush,

edges arrised, upstands filleted, no lumps or hollows, smooth, clean, dry and free of debris. Plywood grain across the line of supports below.

3.7 CONCRETE SUBSTRATE Ensure wood float concrete substrate has been allowed to cure for at least 28 days

before commencing application. Prepare surface, including vacuum cleaning and patching as necessary to leave smooth, clean, dry and free of debris.

3.8 MOISTURE ABSORBENT SUBSTRATE Lay NURAPLY to cover the moisture absorbent dry-laid base on the same day the base

is laid, or ensure that the base is kept covered and dry until NURAPLY is laid. Seal exposed NURAPLY edges at the end of each work period.

Application - NURAPLY 3P two layer system 3.9 FIRST LAYER ON PLYWOOD Lay the first NURAPLY 3PB layer into NURABOND NO.10 bedding compound to the

NURAPLY 3P suppliers requirements, with joints to be welded lapped a minimum of 80mm down the roll edges and 100mm across the roll ends. Lay in order from low points, sumps, through gutters, valleys, eaves, verges main roof and upstands to cover flashings.

3.10 LAYING AND JOINTING SECOND LAYER Lay the second NURAPLY 3P (M) layer by heat fusing over the cleaned repaired and

NURAFLUX primed (if necessary) surface of the first layer in the same sequence. Joints in the second layer must not correspond with joints in the first layer. Second layer joints to be welded lap-joints, minimum 80mm wide down roll edges and minimum 100mm wide across roll ends, to the NURAPLY 3P(M) supplier's requirements. Roll junctions must be


staggered to avoid 4 layer lap-weld build-up of NURAPLY 3P at corners. Ensure unobstructed drainage flow at outlets.

3.11 WELD JOINTS Heat fuse joints minimum width 80mm side and 100mm end laps using NURALITE

Waterproofing Limited self checking lap welding techniques. 3.12 PENETRATIONS Form mould, weld and flash all upstands, downturns and penetrations to NURALITE

Waterproofing Limited details including raised, anti-ponding water deflectors on the upside of penetrations.

3.13 MOVEMENT JOINTS Form and weatherproof movement joints as designed to NURALITE Waterproofing

Limited details. 3.14 JUNCTIONS Check that adjoining walls and parapets are prepared ready for the installation of

NURAPLY roofing. Confirm that openings have been prepared ready for the installation of skylights and other penetrations through the roof.

Required work includes the following: - Roofing installation neatly finished to all sides of openings and to all wall and parapet

junctions. - Installation of flashings (those required to be installed prior to installation of penetrating

elements and/or wall linings). 3.15 COATINGS, TOPPINGS AND OVERLAYS Ensure the specified NURACOLOUR, NURAGLAZE or NURACOAT coating or topping

system is placed within 5 days of completing laying. Thoroughly wash clean NURAPLY 3P surface before application of NURASTONE SEALER and NURACOLOUR, NURACOAT or toppings/overlays.

Finishing 3.16 APPLY SURFACE DRESSING TO NURAPLY 3P Apply NURASTONE SEALER and NURACOLOUR to NURALITE Waterproofing

LIMITED details. 3.17 APPLY SURFACE DRESSING TO NURAPLY 3PM Apply NURAGLAZE as two thin coats to NURALITE Waterproofing LIMITED details. 3.18 ACCESS BOARDS Provide access boards for later operations and remove when no longer needed. 3.19 FOOT TRAFFIC Do not allow construction foot traffic on the NURAPLY 3P installation after laying to avoid

dirt and damage to the surface. 3.20 ACCEPTANCE Arrange for an inspection of the completed work. Protect and maintain roofing until

completion of the contract works. 3.21 SUBSEQUENT WORK Make good any covering cut or deformed by later work. Making good to take the form of

inserting a new whole or part infill sheet to maintain the appearance of the covering as originally laid.

Completion 3.22 CLEAN UP Clean up as the work proceeds.


3.23 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures as specified and to

NURALITE Waterproofing LIMITED details. 3.24 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise. 4.1 TWO LAYER NURAPLY 3P SYSTEM ON PLYWOOD Location: Roof Brand: NURALITE Waterproofing Limited First layer: NURAPLY 3PBT Substrate adhesion: NURABOND 10 Second layer: NURAPLY 3P Colour: TBA Ventilators: NURAVENTS Number: One NURAVENT per 20 m2

Finishes 4.2 COATING Brand: NURALITE Waterproofing LIMITED Primer: Nurastone Primer Type: Nuracolour Colour: TBA Number of coats: 2

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 4521AC COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS AND DOORS Page 95

4521AC COMMERCIAL ALUMINIUM WINDOWS AND DOORS 1. GENERAL This section relates to the fabrication, supply and installation of NALCO 150mm and

100mm FRONTLINE Aluminium Windows and Doors Or Equivalent Approved: - 150mm Double glazed Flushglaze sections 100mm Double glazed Flushglaze sections Nulook Narrow Stile Commercial Doors - Hardware and furniture - Powdercoat Aluminium Fixings, Flashings and Stiffeners Sealants 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to appropriate glazing sections for glass types Refer to SECTION 4611 and 4614 for METROGLASSTECH GLAZING. Refer to SECTION 4822 for SIKA SEALANTS. 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMS PVF² Polyvinylidene Fluoride SLS Serviceability limit state ULS Ultimate limit state WANZ Windows Association of New Zealand PQAS Powder Coating Quality Assurance System Documents 1.3 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture NZBC F4/AS1 Safety from falling AS/NZS 1170.2 Structural design actions - Wind loads NZS 1170.5 Structural design actions - Earthquake actions - New Zealand AS/NZS 1734 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Flat sheet, coiled sheet and plate AS/NZS 1866 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Extruded rod, bar, solid and hollow

shapes AAMA 2604.05 Performance requirements and test procedures for high performance

organic coatings on aluminium extrusions and panels NZS 3604:1999 Timber framed buildings AS 3715 Metal finishing - Thermoset powder coatings for architectural

applications BS 3900 Methods of tests for paints, Part C5: Determination of film thickness NZS 4211:1985 Performance of windows NZS 4223.3 Glazing in buildings - Human impact safety requirements AS/NZS 4680 Hot-dip galvanized (zinc) coatings on fabricated ferrous articles WANZ Window installation system - An Alternative Solution for the installation

of windows and doors WANZ Powder Coating Quality Assurance System (PQAS) WANZ SFA 3503-03:2005 Anodising Standard BRANZ BU 337 Protecting Window Glass from Surface Damage US Federal Specification TT-S-001543A Sealing compound, silicone rubber base (for caulking, sealing and

glazing in buildings and other structures) TT-S-00230C Sealing compound, elastomeric type, single component (for caulking,

sealing and glazing in buildings and other structures) 1.4 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are contained

within: NuLook Specifier's Guide


Nalco Specifier's Guide Copies of the above literature are available from: Web: www.nulook.co.nz www.nalco.co.nz Warranties 1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/FABRICATOR Provide a material manufacturer/fabricator warranty: 5 years: For fabrication Refer to the general section for the required form of 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT

and details of when completed warranty must be submitted. 1.6 WARRANTY - INSTALLER Provide an installer/applicator warranty: 2 years: For installation - Provide this warranty in the installer/applicator standard form. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. Requirements 1.7 SECTION SAMPLES Submit for assessment before preparing shop drawings samples of full size sections, or

half size drawings and details of all profiles offered. Include Stiffeners, Condensation channels, Seismic frame Etc.

ASSEMBLY SAMPLES Submit for assessment before fabrication a complete assembly of members and

components of windows, doors and frames. Include Stiffeners, Condensation channels, Seismic frames Etc.

1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS Any Substitutions will need to be approved by the Architect prior to a tender being

accepted. If substitutions do not have written approval from the Architect then it will be assumed that the specified system has been allowed for in the tender.

1.9 QUALIFICATIONS Work to be carried out by tradesmen experienced, competent and familiar with the

materials and techniques specified. 1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS AND INSTALLATION DETAILS Shop drawings to show the general arrangement of the aluminium joinery including, but

not be limited to: Construction details (minimum scale 1:5) showing the interface between joinery elements

and the building structure including: - - Jointing details and method of fixing between individual elements and between this

installation and adjacent work - Interaction between claddings and linings - Flashing details - Sealants and air seals - Non standard fixing details including bracketing And where required the following: - - Design calculations - Producer Statement in the form PS1 Producer Statement Design - Rebate sizes - Dimensions of all typical elements and of any special sizes and shapes - Provision for the exclusion and/or drainage of moisture


- Provision for adjustment of fixings to ensure true alignment of windows and doors - Sealant types and full size sections of all sealants and backing rods - Provision for thermal movement - Provision for seismic movement and movement under wind loads - Sequence of installation - Glazing specification and details Where requested provide the following additional information - Information of Professional Indemnity Insurance held by the person providing the

calculations and shop drawings Complete shop drawing review before commencing fabrication. Performance 1.11 WIND ZONE Construct windows, exterior doors and frames to withstand wind pressures for building

wind zones as determined from table 5.1 of NZS 3604. 1.12 SPECIFIC DESIGN The windows, doors, their installation and all fixings to comply with NZS 4211:1985 Refer to SELECTIONS for ULS and SLS Refer to SELECTIONS for Air leakage level. 1.13 STRUCTURAL/WEATHER-TIGHTNESS The structural and weather-tight performance of the completed joinery, the glazing and

infill panels is the responsibility of the window fabricator. 1.14 AIR INFILTRATION To NZS 4211 section 8 Air infiltration 1.15 CERTIFICATION Provide evidence of a certificate by a laboratory accredited by International Accreditation

of New Zealand that the windows and doors offered comply with the requirements of NZS 4211 and the specified design wind pressure and air leakage level.

Finishes 1.16 CERTIFY COATINGS Certify on request compliance with this specification and support with control and

sampling records. Test for film thickness to BS 3900, part C5, method No. 4, using method (b) for certifying thickness and method (a) where any dispute arises as to the thickness provided.

The coating to be applied by an applicator who can certify that the coating has been

applied in accordance with the specification. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 DOORS Refer to SELECTIONS for type and finish. 2.2 FLUSHGLAZE Refer to SELECTIONS for type and finish. Materials 2.3 ALUMINIUM EXTRUSIONS Alloy designation to comply with AS/NZS 1866. Branded and extruded for anodising or

powder coating. See Plans and detail drawings for Aluminium Sections required.


2.4 ALUMINIUM SHEET AND STRIP Complying with AS/NZS 1734 of suitable thickness. Rolled for anodising or powder

coating. Alloy designation: 5251 - H16 or 5005 - H16 Accessories 2.5 SEISMIC SUB-FRAMES Where required units to have seismic sub-frames. Refer to NZS 1170.5. Refer to

SELECTIONS for requirements 2.6 FLASHINGS GENERALLY Material, grade and colour of head flashings to match the window frames. Ensure that

materials used for head, jamb and sill flashings are compatible with the window frame materials and fixings and cladding materials.

Components for installation - direct fix systems 2.7 SILL PAN FLASHING Flashing for direct fix claddings to collect and drain water that may penetrate through the

window or door unit. Size to extend from the inner most point of the aluminium frame out over the external face of the cladding.

2.8 SUPPORT ANGLE A Standard aluminium support angle for use with the sill pan for deeper claddings to

transfer the weight of the window back to the frame. Components 2.9 GLAZING GASKETS Thermoplastic rubber. Do not stretch glazing gaskets during installation. Measure and

cut gaskets 5-10% over length before installation. 2.10 HARDWARE AND FURNITURE Hinges, stays, catches, fasteners, latches, locks and furniture as offered by the window

and door manufacturer. Refer to SELECTIONS for type and finish. Key alike all lockable window hardware able to be keyed alike.

2.11 FIXING BRACKETS Designed by manufacturer to specific design. Sealants 2.12 STRUCTURAL SEALANT Silicone chemically curing sealant specifically formulated and tested or approved

equivalent with not less than a ± 40% movement factor complying with US Federal Specification TT-S-001543A.

2.13 WEATHERING/INSTALLATION SEALANT Building sealant used in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for weather sealing

aluminium frames to the cladding, complying with US Federal Specification TT S 0011534A, or a one-part polyurethane moisture curing, elastic joint sealant of medium modulus (± 25% movement) to US Federal Specification TT S 00230C.

Finishes 2.14 INTERPON POWDER COATED ALUMINIUM Polyester powder organic coating in accordance with WANZ Powder Coating Quality

Assurance System and AS 3715. 3. EXECUTION Conditions - generally


3.1 DO NOT DELIVER Do not deliver to site any elements which cannot be unloaded immediately into suitable

conditions of storage. 3.2 UNLOAD WINDOW JOINERY Unload, handle and store elements in accordance with the window manufacturer's

requirements. 3.3 AVOID DISTORTION Avoid distortion of elements during transit, storage and handling. 3.4 PREVENT DAMAGE Store windows and doors on site in a clean and dry environment in such a manner as to

prevent damage to prefinished surfaces. Stack the units in a vertical position resting on their sills, with layers interleaved between to prevent rubbing. Keep paper and cardboard wrappings dry.

3.5 PROPRIETARY ELEMENTS Fix in accordance with the window manufacturer's requirements. 3.6 PROTECTIVE COVERINGS Retain protective coverings and coatings to BRANZ BU 337 and keep in place during the

fixing process. Provide protective coverings and coatings where required to prevent marking of surfaces visible in the completed work and to protect aluminium joinery from following trades. Remove protection on completion.

3.7 ADDITIONAL PROTECTION Supply and fix additional protection as necessary to prevent marking of surfaces which

will be visible on completed work. Assembly 3.8 FABRICATION Fabricate frames as detailed on shop drawings. Install fixing brackets, glazing, hinges,

stays and running gear as scheduled. Provide temporary bracing and protection. Temporarily secure all opening elements for transportation.

3.9 TIMBER / PVC REVEALS Before fixing to aluminium frames, ensure that timber reveals which are being painted

have been primed on all surfaces. Securely fix reveals through aluminium fin. 3.10 HARDWARE GENERALLY Factory fit all required and scheduled hardware. Account for all keys and deliver

separately to the site manager. Installation - windows and doors 3.11 SUPPLY OF FIXINGS Use only fixings and fastenings recommended by the manufacturer of the component

being fixed and to comply with the ULS wind pressure stated in SELECTIONS. 3.12 EXPOSED FIXINGS AND FASTENINGS Ensure fixings and fastenings exposed to the weather are of aluminium, or Type 304

stainless steel. 3.13 PROTECTED FIXINGS AND FASTENINGS Fixings and fastenings not exposed to the weather may be hot-dip galvanized steel with a

coating weight of 610 g/m² complying with AS/NZS 4680. 3.14 CORROSION PROTECTION Before fixing, apply suitable barriers of bituminous coatings, stops or underlays between

dissimilar metals in contact, or between aluminium in contact with concrete.


3.15 CONFIRM PREPARATION OF EXTERIOR WALL OPENINGS Confirm that exterior wall openings have been prepared ready for the installation of all

window and door frames. Do not proceed with the window and door installation until required preparatory work has been completed.

Required preparatory work includes the following: - wall cladding underlay/building wrap to openings finished and dressed off ready for the

installation of window and door frames to NZBC E2/AS1:9.1.5 Building wrap to wall openings.

- claddings neatly finished off to all sides of openings - installation of flashings (those which are required to be installed prior to frames). - application of waterproof sealer to all door and window sills in concrete floor or concrete

sill situations. To door sills only, apply a suitable membrane over the sealer. - all in accordance with the shop drawings, where applicable. 3.16 INSTALLATION Fix to comply with the reviewed shop drawings and installation details including flashings

and bedding compounds, pointing sealants and weathering sealants. 3.17 INSTALLATION DIRECT FIX Install to window manufacturers details and drawings including sill pans to window and

door units. 3.18 INSTALL FLASHINGS Install flashings to heads, jambs and sills of frames as supplied and required by the

window manufacturer and as detailed on the drawings. Finish head flashings to match window finish.

Place all flashings so that the head flashing weathers the jamb flashings, which in turn

weathers over the upstand of the sill flashing. Ensure that sill flashings drain to the outside air.

Except where window/door frames are recessed, ensure that head flashings over-sail unit

by 30mm minimum at each end. 3.19 COMPLETE AIR SEAL To NZBC E2/AS1:9.1.6 Air seals. Form an air-tight seal by means of proprietary

expanding foam or sealants used with PEF backing rods, applied between the window / door reveal and structural framing to a depth of 10 - 20mm, to provide a continuous air tight seal to the perimeter of the window or door.

3.20 FIX HARDWARE Fix all sash and door hardware and furniture as scheduled. Application - jointing and sealing 3.21 SEAL FRAMES ON SITE Seal frames to each other and to adjoining structure and finishes, to the requirements of

the window and sealant manufacturer and to make the installation weathertight. Do not seal the junction between the sill member and the cladding or sill flashing which must remain open.

3.22 PREPARE JOINTS Ensure joints are dry. Remove loose material, dust and grease. Prepare joints in

accordance with the sealant manufacturer's requirements, using required solvents and primers where necessary. Mask adjoining surfaces which would be difficult to clean if smeared with sealant.


3.23 BACK UP When using back-up materials do not reduce depth of joint for sealant to less than the

minimum required by the manufacturer of the sealant. Insert polyethylene rod or tape back-up behind joints being pointed with sealant.

3.24 SEALANT FINISH Tool sealant to form a smooth fillet with a profile and dimensions required by the sealant

manufacturer. Remove excess sealant from adjoining surfaces, using the cleaning materials nominated by the sealant manufacturer and leave clean.

Completion - cleaning 3.25 REMOVE TRADE DEBRIS Remove trade debris by appropriate means on a floor by floor basis as each floor is

completed and again before any work is covered up by others. Arrange for general removal.

3.26 TRADE CLEAN Trade clean window frames, operable windows and doors, glass and other related

surfaces inside and out at the time of installation to remove marks, dust and dirt, to enable a visual inspection of all surfaces.

Completion 3.27 PROTECTIVE COVERINGS Retain protective coverings and coatings and keep in place during the fixing process.

Provide protective coverings and coatings where required to prevent marking of surfaces visible in the completed work and to protect aluminium joinery from following trades. Remove protection on completion.

3.28 REPLACE Replace damaged, cracked or marked elements. 3.29 PROTECTION Protect finishes against damage from adjacent and following work. 3.30 IN - SITU TOUCH-UP TO POWDER COATED ALUMINIUM In situ touch-up of polyester or fluoropolymer coated aluminium is only permitted to minor

surface scratching. Otherwise replace all damaged material. 3.31 SAFETY Indicate the presence of transparent glasses for the remainder of the contract period, with

whiting, tape or signs compatible with the glass type. Indicators other than whiting must not be applied to the glass surface. Masking tape must not be used for this purpose.

3.32 MANIFESTATIONS Apply manifestations to comply with NZS 4223.3, 303.1 Manifestations. 4. SELECTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to the following selections. Performance 4.1 WIND ZONE - DESIGN TO NZS 3604 Building wind zone: ~ (as determined from table 5.1of NZS 3604) 4.2 SPECIFIC DESIGN TO NZS 1170.2 ULS: 1.15 kPa SLS: ~ Pa 4.3 THERMAL PERFORMANCE R-value: ~ (as determined from NZBC H1/VM1 or H1/AS1)


4.4 SEISMIC SUB-FRAMES The following units to have seismic sub-frames.

Windows No: Seismic movement to be provided for~ ~mm

Finishes 4.5 INTERPON - POWDER COATING FINISH Type: Polyester organic powder coating System integrity: 10 Years Thickness: Average of 80 microns with a minimum of 50 microns Colour: Ultriva Slate grey Matt YY218A Glazing 4.12 GLASS Refer to SECTION 4611 ND 4614 for METROGLASSTECH

GLAZING. Hardware 4.6 DOOR HARDWARE Locks & handles: Allow PC Sum of $2,000.00 Ex GST for Supply of Door Hardware and

Locks - EXCLUDING DORMA HORIZON AUTO DOOR GEAR See SECTION 4571 4.7 MANIFESTATIONS Location: Entrance Doors Type/details: Allow PC Sum of $5,000.00 Ex GST for Supply of Door Fenestration. Flashings and Sealant 4.8 FLASHINGS Material/type: Powdercoat Aluminium Pattern: Formed to suit details provided 4.9 WEATHERING SEALANT Type: 1-part polyurethane moisture curing, elastic joint sealant Colour: TBA Components 4.10 ALUMINIUM ADAPTOR/INFILLS Type: ULLRICH; - UA1105 AND UA1043 Finish: Powdercoat 4.11 RHS STIFFENERS Type: 150x100x9mm RHS Finish: Powdercoat Window and door system – NALCO FRONTLINE SYSTEM Flushglaze 4.12 100mm & 150mm FLUSHGLAZE Brand: NALCO FRONTLINE Window No.: W1 to W14 Frame size: 100mm Entry AND 150mm Main Windows Glazing system: Double Glazed Flush glazing


Commercial doors 4.13 NULOOK COMMERCIAL DOORS Brand/type: NULOOK Narrow Stile Doors Door No.: D1, D2, Sliding D8 Hinged Top rail type: Nulook Narrow Stile Commercial Bottom rail type: Nulook Narrow Stile Commercial Stile type: Nulook Narrow Stile Commercial

© CIL Masterspec 2011 4554 SOLARTUBE SKYLIGHTS Page 104

4554 SOLARTUBE SKYLIGHTS 1. GENERAL This section relates to the manufacture, supply, and installation of SOLATUBE tubular

skylights Including: - accessories including natural ventilation systems and flashings. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 4251 for ALUMINIUM COMPOSITE SOFFIT Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS/NZS 1734 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - flat sheets, coiled sheet and plate AS/NZS 2208 Safety glazing materials in buildings NZS 3604:1999 Timber framed buildings AS 3715 Metal finishing - Thermoset powder coatings for architectural

applications NZS 4223.1 Glazing in buildings - Glass selection and glazing NZS 4223.4 Glazing in buildings - Wind, dead, snow and live action AS/NZS 4666 Insulating glass units To BRANZ BU 349 "Finishes for aluminium". Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: SOLATUBE Mike Cullen Copies of the above literature are available from Web: www.solatube.co.nz Telephone: 09 525 2215 Mobile: 021 626 887 Mike Cullen Warranties 1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty: 10 years: For the supply of product as specified in SELECTIONS - Provide this warranty on the manufacturer/supplier standard form. - Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. 1.5 WARRANTY - INSTALLER Provide an installer/applicator warranty: 10 years: For the installation of product as specified in SELECTIONS. - Provide this warranty on the installer/applicator standard form. - Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. Requirements


1.6 QUALIFICATIONS Work to be carried out by tradespeople experienced, competent and familiar with the

materials and techniques specified. 1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS Submit shop drawings showing product profile, components, installation details, including

fixings flashings and accessories. Performance 1.8 PERFORMANCE, WIND, DEAD, SNOW, AND LIVE ACTIONS The design wind pressures, dead, snow and live loads are to comply with NZS 4223.4,

Glazing in Buildings. This is within the scope of the manufacturer's literature and details. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS SOLATUBE 750DS-OC Tubular skylight consisting of a double skin roof dome, reflective

tube, and diffuser. Refer to SELECTIONS for type, finish and accessories. Components 2.2 ALUMINIUM EXTRUSIONS Alloy designation to comply with AS/NZS 1866. Branded and extruded for anodising or

powder coating. Trim to match with Alucabond ceiling. 2.3 FIXINGS Ensure all fixings and brackets are compatible with the roof window/skylight. Do not use

electroplated zinc fasteners or brass fastenings. 2.4 FLASHINGS GENERALLY Material, grade and colour of flashings to be compatible with the roofing material. Use

proprietary flashing kits where supplied by the manufacturer. Finishes 2.5 ORGANIC POWDER COATING FINISH To AS 3715 for powder coatings on architectural aluminium products. All finished

surfaces to show uniformity of gloss and colour (to match approved sample) free of all coating defects.

3. EXECUTION Generally 3.1 CONFIRM Confirm framed openings on site for dimensions, to suit the proprietary roof

window/skylight. 3.2 EXECUTION GENERALLY Check that the preparation of the opening is to NZBC E2/AS1 8.1.7 Roof penetrations. 3.3 HANDLING Avoid distortion of elements during transit, handling and storage. Prevent pre-finished

surfaces from rubbing together. Prevent contact with mud, plaster and cement. Do not deliver to site any elements which cannot be immediately unloaded into suitable conditions of storage.

3.4 RETAIN PROTECTIVE COVERINGS Retain protective coverings and coatings in place during fixing wherever possible.

Provide additional protection to prevent marking of surfaces visible in the completed work. Remove protection on completion.


Tunnel Skydome 3.5 INSTALL TUNNEL SKYLIGHTS Check that the trimmed openings are formed and constructed to suit the required units.

Do not proceed until roof and structural openings are properly formed. Install and fix the units strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and installation instructions, to make the installation completely weatherproof.

Completion 3.6 CLEAN FRAMES AND DOMES On completion clean down both sides of skylight frames and domes, using the methods

required by the respective manufacturer's. Remove any manufacturer's stickers and clean glass. Ensure all installed units are adequately protected from damage and adverse weather during construction.

3.7 CONFIRM Confirm the proper operation of hardware and operating systems on completion of the

installation and again at completion of the contract works. 4. SELECTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise. Skylights 4.1 TUNNEL SKYLIGHTS Location: See Sheet A25.40 Brand: SOLATUBE Model: 750DS-OC Details: Double Layard Dome, Acrylic Diffuser and extension tubes required. Components 4.2 FLASHINGS Material/type: supply with roof window/skylight kit Roofing profile: Nuralite

© CIL Masterspec 2011 4571D DORMA HORIZON AUTOMATIC DOORS Page 107

4571D DORMA HORIZON AUTOMATIC DOORS 1. GENERAL This section covers the supply, installation and commissioning of DORMA NZ Ltd

Horizon automatic door technology products and systems for: - swing doors - sliding doors 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to SECTION 4521 for ALUMINIUM WINDOWS AND DOORS. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO Documents referred to in this section are: NZS 4239 Automatic sliding door assemblies AS 5007 Powered doors for pedestrian access and egress DIN 18650.1 Powered pedestrian doors: Product requirements and test methods Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: DORMA Automatic Catalogue BWA Certificate of Test No. TC 2224000B.1 (HD4) Copies of the above literature are available from ~ Web: www.dorma.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 09 830 2052 Facsimile: 09 820 4909 Warranties 1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide warranty for: 1 year: For installation by DORMA certified installers 2 years: For DORMA Horizon automatic door technology products and

systems - Provide this warranty on DORMA NZ Ltd standard form. - Commence the warranty from the date normally applicable for this part of the work. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. Requirements 1.5 NO SUBSTITUTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to any specified DORMA system, or associated

components and products. 1.6 SUPPLIER'S SCHEDULE Refer to the DORMA NZ Ltd site specific hardware specification that has been prepared

and appended to this section. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS Installation and commissioning to be carried out by DORMA NZ Ltd certified installers. 2. PRODUCTS


2.1 SLIDING DOOR OPERATOR To NZS 4239 and AS 5007, automatic sliding door assemblies. Tested to DIN 18650

Powered pedestrian doors. Refer to BWA Certificate of Test No. TC 2224000B.1 for Dorma horizontal sliding door operator model No. HD4 60W motor type. Refer to SELECTIONS for product selection.

2.2 SWING DOOR OPERATOR To AS 5007. Refer to SELECTIONS for product options. 2.3 ACCESSORIES Refer to SELECTIONS for product selection. 3. EXECUTION Installation 3.1 INSPECTION Before starting the hardware installation, check frames, doors, sashes and adjacent

finishes are ready for the proper installation of the hardware. 3.2 LOCATE Locate hardware units at heights and/or locations shown on the drawings, or as required

to comply with relevant Codes and Standards. Before proceeding, confirm any dimension not shown or known.

3.3 INSTALL HARDWARE Install each hardware unit in accordance with DORMA requirements using templates and

tools supplied or recommended by them. Set units level, plumb and true to line and required location, with all moving parts and actions freely and easily operating. Do not make any modifications to supplied units.

Completion 3.4 COMMISSIONING Commissioning to only be done by DORMA certified Agents to DORMA NZ Ltd

requirements. 3.5 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.6 PROTECT Protect hardware units from damage or marking. 3.7 FINAL ADJUSTMENT Where hardware is installed more than a month prior to project completion, contact

DORMA NZ Ltd to make a final check and adjustment of hardware units to ensure they are operating correctly, fitted properly and are undamaged.

4. SELECTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise. Sliding door - Standard operators 4.1 SLIDING DOOR - HEAVY DUTY Door/location: D1, D2 Door type: Aluminium Framed Glass Doors Brand/operator: DORMA AL401, heavy duty, chain driven operator Weight: < 400 kg Opening size: See Door Schedule Configuration: Refer to DRAWINGS Actuator: Keypad Lock, Emergency Exit Button and Sensor on both sides


Locking device: Keypad Electronic Lock Accessories: Refer to ACCESSORIES Miscellaneous 4.2 ACCESSORIES Brand: DORMA Type: Infrared safety sensor, Type: Allow for People counter to be supplied and fitted by others Type: Security monitoring Type: Emergency Power Supply Unit

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 4611ME METRO GLASSTECH GLAZING Page 110

4611ME METRO GLASSTECH GLAZING 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and fixing of Metro GlassTech products for external

joinery in complex residential and commercial buildings, including: - window and doors - balustrade systems 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to SECTION 4521 for ALUMINIUM WINDOWS AND DOORS. Refer to SECTION 4571D for DORMA HORIZON AUTOMATIC DOORS 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations

and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section: PVB Polyvinyl Butyral CIP Cast in place Documents 1.3 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC B1/AS1 Structure NZBC F2/AS1 Hazardous building materials NZBC F4/AS1 Safety from falling NZBC H1/AS1 Energy Efficiency NZS 3604:1999 Timber framed buildings NZS 4218 Thermal insulation - Housing and Small Buildings NZS 4223.1 Glazing in buildings - Glass selection and glazing NZS 4223.3 Glazing in buildings - Human impact safety requirements NZS 4223.4 Glazing in buildings - Wind, dead, snow and live action NZS 4243.1 Energy Efficiency - Large Buildings - Building thermal envelope AS/NZS 2208 Safety glazing materials in buildings AS/NZS 4666 Insulating glass units BRANZ BU 337 Protecting window glass from damage 1.4 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: Metro GlassTech Catalogue & Reference and Guide - 6th edition Copies of the above literature are available at: Web www.metroglasstech.co.nz Telephone: 0800 65 89 45 Facsimile: 0800 65 63 45 Warranties 1.5 MANUFACTURERS WARRANTY Warrant glass under normal environmental and use conditions against failure of

materials. Special Warranty period: 10 years for insulating glass units 10 years for laminated glass 10 years for toughened glass 10 years for screen printed glass Refer to the general section for the required form of 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT

and details of when completed warranty must be submitted.


Requirements 1.6 SAMPLES Submit samples of selected glass for review if required. Performance 1.7 THERMAL STRESS ANALYSIS For non heat treated glass obtain a thermal stress analysis for spandrel panels, tinted,

reflective and other solar control vision glass including IGU's for review before placing final order.

1.8 ENERGY EFFICIENCY Provide glazing to meet the energy requirements of, NZS 4218 and NZBC H1/AS1 for

housing small buildings, or NZS 4243.1 for large buildings. Refer to SELECTIONS and schedules for location and type of glazing. 2. PRODUCTS 2.1 NO SUBSTITUTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to any specified Metro GlassTech, products or systems. Materials 2.2 LAMINATED GLASS Safelite Grade A Safety Glass to AS/NZS 2208 with PVB or CIP resin interlayer. 2.3 TOUGHENED GLASS Tempafloat Grade A Safety Glass to AS/NZS 2208. 2.4 GLASSTECH INSULATING GLASS UNITS (IGU's) To AS/NZS 4666 and the IGU Manufacturers Association (IGUMA) requirements. Components, general 2.5 JOINTING, PUTTY AND SEALING MATERIALS Ensure jointing, putty and sealing materials are compatible with glass substrates.

Confirm compatibility with laminated glass, IGU's and coatings. Components, aluminium glazing 2.6 GLAZING TAPE AND GASKETS Single/double sided pressure sensitive self-adhesive low/medium/high density foam

tapes/butyl tapes selected to suit the glazing detail to window manufacturers' requirements.

2.7 SETTING BLOCKS Santoprene/Neoprene, 80-90 Shore A hardness, set at quarter points or to detail, to

support the weight of glass panes. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS To NZS 4223.1, NZS 4223.3 and NZS 4223.4 with all external glazing is wind and

watertight on completion. 3.2 DELIVERY Keep glass dry and clean during delivery and bring on to site when ready to glaze directly

into place. Comply also with the storage requirements set out in BRANZ BU 337.


3.3 GLASS CONDITION All glass to have undamaged edges and surfaces. 3.4 GLASS THICKNESS If not specifically stated in the glazing schedule determine the minimum thickness of glass

for each sheet as required by NZS 4223.1, NZS 4223.3 and NZS 4223.4. Determine the final glass thickness based on whether wind loading or human impact

considerations govern. 3.5 REBATE DIMENSIONS Provide rebates for glazing to the widths and depths necessary for each situation

including minimum glass edge cover to NZS 4223.1, Section 4 Glazing. Conditions - human impact safety requirements 3.6 SAFETY GLAZING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Glazing of doors, side panels, low level and window seat glazing, stairwell landings and

similar locations to NZS 4223.3 in respect of thickness, maximum areas of panel Grade A Safety Glass.

3.7 SAFETY GLAZING MATERIAL Use only materials from NZS 4223.3, Appendix 3.A Schedule of safety glazing materials

that also comply with the relevant requirements of AS/NZS 2208. Ensure material is permanently marked and if cut by the distributor or installer mark each piece to NZS 4223.3, clause 303.7 Identification of safety glazing materials.

3.8 CONTAINMENT Edge cover to comply with NZS 4223.1, Section 4 Glazing, table 5. Otherwise to

NZS 4223.3, clause 303.2 Containment. Assembly 3.9 WORKING OF GLASS All working of glass as required in NZS 4223.1. 3.10 EDGE WORK AND BEVELLING Edgework other than a clean cut. Refer to SELECTIONS/drawings for type. 3.11 SURFACE TREATMENT Refer to SELECTIONS/drawings for finish. 3.12 SURFACE CUTTING Refer to SELECTIONS/drawings for finish. Application aluminium 3.13 INSTALL GLASS TO ALUMINIUM FRAMES Install glass to NZS 4223.1. - Bead glaze to Section 4 Glazing. - Channel glaze to Section 4 Glazing, and Section 5 for Framed, Unframed, Partly

Framed Glass Assemblies. 3.14 INSTALL SAFETY GLASS To NZS 4223.3, as modified by NZBC F2/AS1. Application miscellaneous 3.15 INSTALL GLASS BALUSTRADES Confirm/design and carry out installation to NZBC B1/AS1: Structure, 7 Glazing NZBC F2/AS1: Hazardous building materials, 1.0 Glazing NZBC F4/AS1: Safety from falling, 1.0 Barriers in buildings.


Finishing 3.16 SAFETY Indicate the presence of transparent glass for the remainder of the construction period,

with whiting, tape or signs compatible with the glass type. Indicators other than whiting must not be applied to the glass surface.

3.17 MANIFESTATIONS To NZS 4223.3, clause 303.1 Manifestation (making glass visible). See Manifestation PC Sum allowance in SECTION 4521 ALUMINIUM WINDOWS AND

DOORS Completion 3.18 TRADE CLEAN Clean off or remove safety indicators at completion of the building. 3.19 REPLACE Replace damaged, cracked or marked glass. 3.20 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.21 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 WIND ZONE Building wind zone:High (as determined from NZS 3604, NZS 4223 or NZS 4211) Specific Design Wind Pressure1.15kPa Glass by type 4.2 INSULATING GLASS UNITS (IGU's) Location: Windows and Doors Brand/type: GlassTech (Double glazing) 26mm Outer glass type: 6mm Toughened N-70 Low-E Coated surface: #2 Outer glass: 6mm Spacer width: 12mm Space gas: air Inner glass type: 8.38 Laminated Inner glass: 8.38mm Glass balustrades 4.3 GLASS BALUSTRADE Location: Framless glass balustrade around Josephine Locomotive. Exterior glass balustrade Brand/type: Tempafloat Toughened Glass Safelite Laminated Glass Glass: Toughened Glass Thickness: 10mm

© CIL Masterspec 2011 4711 THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC INSULATION Page 114

4711 THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC INSULATION 1. GENERAL This section relates to materials installed, laid, hung or fitted as thermal insulation to the

building fabric. -Kingspan KOOLTHERM K10 45mm underfloor insulation -Kingspan KOOLTHERM K12 50mm wall insulation -Kingspan KOOLTHERM K112 75mm roof insulation -Sika Boom FR Polyurethane Foam Insulation - Autex AAB Acoustic Blanket -AUTEX Quietspace Acoustic panel strips between Oamaru Stone -TEXDECOR Acoustic Wall Covering 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 4161 WRAPS, UNDERLAYS AND DPC for building wraps, roofing underlays, Refer to 4421N NURALITE ROOFING for roofing underlays. Refer to 6700 AND 6721 PAINTING for roofing painting trades. 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations

and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section: BIB Building Insulation Blanket (term used by some manufacturers) NZECP New Zealand Electrical Code of Practice EPS Expanded polystyrene sheets Documents 1.3 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC H1/AS1 Energy efficiency NZS 4218 2004 Energy efficiency - Small building envelope NZS 4220 Code of practice for energy conservation in non-residential buildings NZS 4243.1 Energy efficiency - Large buildings - Building thermal envelope NZS 4246 Energy efficiency - Installing insulation in residential buildings AS/NZS 4534 Zinc and zinc/aluminium-alloy coatings on steel wire HSE Act Health and Safety in Employment Act NZECP 54 Code of practice for electrical installations of recessed luminaries and

auxiliary equipment 1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents related to this section are: Manufacturer/supplier contact details Company: Kingspan Web: www.kingspan.co.nz Telephone: 03 358 7536 Manufacturer/supplier contact details Company: Sika Web: www.sika.co.nz Telephone: 0800 SIKANZ – 0800 745269 Manufacturer/supplier contact details Company: Autex Industries Limited Web: www.autex.co.nz Telephone: 0800 428 839 Autex Insulation documents are also available on EBOSS Web: www.eboss.co.nz Manufacturer/supplier contact details


Company: Texdecor - Swinson Group Telephone: 0800 4 794 676 Requirements 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS Work to be carried out by tradesmen experienced, competent and familiar with the

specified insulation materials and techniques specified. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 KINGSPAN KOOLTHERM RIGID INSULATING BOARD super high performance, fibre-free rigid rigid thermoset modified resin insulation. 2.2 SIKA BOOM-FR One part ,high yield, fire rated, polyurethane foam. 2.3 POLYESTER FIBRE ACOUSTIC PANEL Autex QuietStuf® AAB - 100% polyester fibres thermally bonded to form a flexible

panel/sheet. Refer to SELECTIONS for details. 2.4 TEXDECOR VINACOUSTIC OXYGEN ACOUSTIC WALL COVERING Texdecor Vinacoustic Oxygen PVC acoustic wall covering Alpha W=0.25. Refer to

SELECTIONS for details. Components 2.5 KOOLTHERM FASTNERS To Kingspan specification. 2.6 SILOCONE SEALANT 2.7 Approved silicone sealant to ensure compleat seal of insulation. 2.8 ADHESIVE TAPE Adhesive tapes to Kingspan Specification. Pressure sensitive aluminium foil tapes for

joining foil insulation and vapour barriers. 2.9 TEXDECOR ADHESIVE 2.10 Adhesive to TEXDECOR Specification. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 DELIVERY Keep insulation dry in transit. Take delivery of insulation dry and undamaged and store in

a location that protects them from the weather and damage. Reject all damaged materials.

3.2 STORAGE Accept materials undamaged and dry and store in a location that protects them from the

weather and damage. Avoid distortion, stretching, puncturing and damage to edges of sheet materials. Do not use damaged sheets.

3.3 HANDLING Wear protective clothing as necessary and when handling, avoid delamination or

distortion of the rectangular form. Maintain full thickness unless compression is an installation system requirement.


3.4 HAZARD MANAGEMENT Comply with HSE Act and take all safety precautions necessary to reduce potential

hazards. 3.5 INSPECTION Before starting installation of blankets and pads, check that the location and framing are

free from moisture, that the cavities are not interconnected and that mesh, netting, wraps, building papers and vapour barriers are in place.

Application 3.6 INSTALL INSULATION - GENERAL Lay, install, fit and fix to NZBC H1/AS1: Energy efficiency, 2.0 Building thermal envelope,

and to manufacturer's requirements. Install in housing to NZS 4218 and NZS 4246. Install in large buildings to NZS 4243.1 and NZS 4220. Allow insulation to re-loft/relax prior to installation. Do not cover vents and cut around all recessed light fittings and metal flues to the safety requirements of NZECP 54. Lift up electrical wires, lighting transformers/controllers and lay the insulation underneath.

3.7 INSTALL INSULATION - CLEARANCE Ensure insulation panels fit tight to framing with no gaps. Seal to framing with Silicone

sealant. Maintain the specified air clearance between the insulation and roofing. 3.8 VAPOUR BARRIER Ensure vapour barrier is maintained Fit and fix insulation with joints sealed with pressure-

sensitive tape. 3.9 ADHESIVE TAPES Fully seal all joins and all penetrations with adhesive tape. 3.10 FIT KOOLTHERM RIGID INSULATION BOARD FIt board using proprietary fixinGS. Cut oversize lengthways for a tight compression fit

between framing. Leave no gaps between, and maintain full thickness of the insulating segments over the whole of the installation. Do not cover vents. Leave a 200mm clear gap around recessed light fittings and metal flues

3.11 FIT POLYESTER FIBRE ACOUSTIC PANELS Attach Autex QuietStuf® AAB panels to substrate using mechanical fixings such as

insulation anchors, or contact type adhesive. Butt edges firmly to the adjoining panel. Adhesives are available for some applications and are to be used in accordance with Autex and the adhesive manufacturer's instructions.

Fix insulation anchors to the substrate at 600mm centres in both directions. Install

QuietStuf® AAB with the smooth slightly textured surface facing out from the substrate, i.e. facing the sound source.

Completion 3.12 CLEAN UP Clean up as the work proceeds, so no spare offcuts or any other matter or item remain

behind claddings or linings. 3.13 CHECK WALL WRAPS AND ROOF UNDERLAYS Ensure these are dry, clean, undamaged and free of debris before being covered. 3.14 CHECK VAPOUR BARRIERS Ensure these form one homogeneous sheet vapour barrier and remain as such

throughout the ensuing construction process. 3.15 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures.


3.16 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise. 4.1 KOOLTHERM INSULATING BOARD Location: Roof Brand: KOOLTHERM K12 Thickness: 75mm 4.2 KOOLTHERM INSULATING BOARD Location: Walls Brand: KOOLTHERM K12 Thickness: 505mm 4.3 KOOLTHERM INSULATING BOARD Location: Floor Brand: KOOLTHERM K10 Thickness: 45mm 4.4 SIKA BOOM-FR Location: Structural Steel where it penetrates the outer walls – Various locations Brand/type: Sika Material/Type: Sika BOOM-FR Thickness: 100mm – Build Foam thickness up to 100mm 4.5 POLYESTER FIBRE ACOUSTIC INSULATION, PANEL Location: Ceiling Brand: Autex QuietStuf® AAB Product: AAB 35-50 NRC: 0.90 Thickness: 50mm Colour: Black 4.6 AUTEX QUIETSPACE ACOUSTIC PANELS STRIP 4.6 Location: Walls Between Oamaru Stone strips Brand: Autex Quietspace Product: AP 75 High x 50 Thick Colour: TBA 4.7 TEXDECOR ACOUSTIV PVC WALL COVERING 4.7 Location: Walls 02A Brand: Texdecor Product: Oxygen Colour: Cream 9001 11 14

© CIL Masterspec 2011 4811S SIKA SEALANTS Page 118

4811S SIKA SEALANTS 1. GENERAL This section relates to the selection of sealants and application methods for sealants

nominated in other work sections. Related work 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS Refer to 4521 for ALUMINIUM WINDOWS AND DOORS. Refer to 4711 for THERMAL INSULATION. Refer to 3361 for STONEWORK. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO Documents referred to in this section are: ISO11600 Building construction - Jointing products - Classification and

requirements for sealants Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS Sika (NZ) Ltd product data sheets relating to work in this section are: Sika Primer Table Sikaflex / Sikabond. Version no: 02/08 Sikaflex® AT-Facade. Version no: 03/08 Sikaflex® Construction. Version no: 08/05 Sikasil® Roofing and Plumbing. Version no: 01/05 Sika Boom® Expanding Foam. Version no: 09/02 Sika Boom®- FR. Version no: 06/07 Independent VOC test certificates for quantity of VOC in grams per litre in accordance

with SCAQMD Rule 1168 to Green Star Office design V2 IEQ-13/ IEQ-03 Copies of the above literature are available from Sika (NZ) Ltd Web: www.sika.co.nz Email: [email protected] Telephone: 0800 SIKA NZ, 0800 745 269 Facsimile: 0800 SIKA FAX, 0800 745 232 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMS The following abbreviations and terms are used throughout this part of the specification: VOC Volatile Organic Compound Requirements 1.5 SEALANT SELECTION Refer to the Sika (NZ) Ltd current Technical Data Sheet before commencing sealant

installation. Ensure that the correct sealant has been selected for the intended application and substrates. Check that the joint design allows for movement and or substrate thermal expansion and contraction, and is within the sealants range of service.

1.6 SAMPLE JOINT Produce a sample joint for substrates or coatings not detailed in Sika (NZ) Ltd current

Technical Data Sheet. Upon full cure of the selected Sika sealant the test sample is to be used to assess sealant adhesion and compatibility with the substrate or coating. Following review and confirmation that work may proceed, the sample joint becomes the quality control standard for subsequent work of each type. Sample joints may be retained as part of the completed work.


1.7 QUALIFICATIONS Sealant work, including preparation, to be carried out by competent and experienced

sealant applicators, approved by Sika. Provide evidence of technical competence and experience for review before commencing work.

1.8 MANUFACTURER'S TECHNICAL SERVICES Sika (NZ) Ltd provides local testing and research and development assistance for non

standard applications. Use the research and development, and the technical information provided by Sika throughout the design, development, prototype testing and installation stages of sealant work.

Warranties 1.9 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide Sika (NZ) Ltd warranty for: ~ years: For material - Provide the warranty in the Sika form. - Commence the warranty from the date of practical completion of the contract works. - Sika (NZ) Ltd will warrant that Sika sealant products will perform in accordance with the

information stated in Sika (NZ) Ltd current Technical Data Sheets. - Refer to Sika (NZ) Ltd for further information on warranty. 2. PRODUCTS Materials Primers 2.1 SIKA CLEANER-205 Sika Cleaner-205, a transparent alkyl titanate in an alcohol solution, one component

cleaner with adhesion promoters. 2.2 SIKA PRIMER-3N Sika Primer-3N, transparent solvent based reactive epoxy resin compound, one

component primer. 2.3 SIKA PRIMER MB Sika Primer MB is a translucent blue 2 component epoxy moisture regulating coating

designed specifically for use with SikaBond timber floor bonding systems. Specialist building facade sealants 2.4 SIKAFLEX® AT FACADE Sikaflex® AT-Facade, a one component moisture curing elastic sealant based on silane

terminated polymers. Conforms to ISO 11600 F, Type25LM. Silicone sealants 2.5 SIKASIL® NG Sikasil ® NG, a one part fast cure neutral silicone sealant to provide a permanent

watertight seal to various substrates including plastics, ceramics and some powder coated surfaces.

Specialist building concrete floor sealants 2.6 SIKAFLEX®-11 FC Sikaflex®-11 FC, a fast curing one component polyurethane based, flexible joint sealant

and high strength adhesive. A non-slumping material that cures by reaction with atmospheric moisture to form a tough and resilient elastomer.


2.7 SIKADUR® 51 Sikadur® 51, a two component, joint sealing compound based on flexible epoxy resins.

When mixed is a thixotropic paste with non slump properties. 2.8 SIKAFLEX® TANK Sikaflex® Tank, a non sag one component polyurethane based, chemical resistant elastic

joint sealant. Sikaflex® Tank, once cured forms permanently elastomeric material. PU foams 2.9 SIKA® BOOM-FR Sika® Boom-FR, a one component, high yield, fire rated polyurethane foam applied with

the Sika Boom-G Dispenser gun. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 COMPATIBILITY Ensure compatibility by using only Sika branded sealants with Sika supplied joint fillers,

primers, backing rods, bond breaker tape and cleaning solutions. 3.2 NON SLUMP SEALANTS Use only thixotropic sealants capable of supporting their own weight (non slump) in

vertical applications. 3.3 SELF LEVELLING SEALANTS Use only self levelling sealants in contained horizontal applications. 3.4 SUBSTRATE STAINING Note that some silicon sealants can cause silicon oil staining on porous substrates such

as concrete and masonry. 3.5 SEALANT PAINTABILITY Ensure that a paintable sealant is selected when the sealant joint requires painting.

NOTE: This excludes silicon based sealants which are not paintable. 3.6 COLOURS Refer to SELECTIONS for colour option/s. Where colour is not specified, choose sealant

colours from the Sika standard/special colour ranges. 3.7 VISIT THE SITE Arrange for the Sika representative to visit the site to examine the site conditions, to

inspect the surfaces and joints and to discuss the installation procedures, before any sealing work proceeds.

Preparatory work 3.8 ENSURE Ensure that joints to receive sealants are suitable for the proposed application. Ensure

that surfaces are sound, dry, free from dust, dirt, scale, laitance, corrosion or other loose material, oil, grease, paint, release agents or other contaminants which may affect the bond, or the performance of the sealing material.

Ensure that joints and spaces receiving sealant are within the specified width to depth

ratio in accordance with Sika sealant product data sheet. Ensure that the joint design allows for movement and/or substrate thermal expansion and contraction that are within the sealants range of service.


3.9 TEST SUBSTRATES Test substrates for indications of staining or poor adhesion. If poor adhesion is evident

from initial tests, consult Sika about the application of a suitable primer. Only use combinations of sealants and substrates for which favourable adhesion and compatibility have been confirmed.

Do not apply sealant to concrete or concrete block until concrete and/or mortar has cured. 3.10 CLEAN JOINTS Clean joints as detailed in application instructions contained in Sika (NZ) Ltd product data

sheet to achieve acceptable joint surfaces for the application of sealant. Protect adjacent surfaces from abrasion or other damage.

3.11 CLEAN METAL SURFACES Clean metal surfaces with approved Sika (NZ) Ltd cleaners to remove any grease

deposits. 3.12 GRIND CONCRETE SURFACES Grind concrete surfaces to remove concrete laitance and other surface contaminates

prior to applying Sika Primers 3.13 MASK Mask adjacent surfaces alongside joints to prevent contamination. Mask off any surfaces

which would be difficult to clean if smeared with sealant, or where excess sealant could not be neatly trimmed off or removed.

3.14 VENTILATION Ensure adequate ventilation for sealant applicators during the preparation and application

of sealant work. Application 3.15 FINAL PREPARATION Prepare joints in accordance with approved Sika (NZ) Ltd cleaning methods. 3.16 BACKING Insert Sika PEF backing rod or bond breaker tape to avoid three sided adhesion. Sika

PEF backing rod diameter is be 25% larger than the gap size. Use only blunt instruments to install backing rods to avoid puncturing or damage. Do not twist rods when installing. When using backup material do not leave gaps and do not reduce the depth of the sealant joint to less than the minimum required by Sika.

3.17 PRIMING Use Sika supplied/recommended primers. Allow to cure for Sika recommended time

(minimum and maximum). Refer to Sika for instructions if maximum cure time is exceeded before sealant is applied. Do not contaminate bond breakers with primer.

Allow primer to dry as recommended by the manufacturer. Do not prime more than can

be completed in one day. Prevent contamination of the primed surfaces prior to applying sealant.

3.18 JOINT FILLING Fill joint cavity with sealant in accordance with Sika requirements and quality control

programmes. Use a pressure gun with a nozzle cut to suit the required joint width. Ensure sealant is deposited in a uniform, continuous bead, without gaps or air pockets and with clean, neat edges.

3.19 TOOLING Tool sealant to form a smooth, flat bead, or a smooth convex fillet, with a profile as

required by Sika. Complete tooling before the sealant surface starts to form a skin.


3.20 FINISHING Remove masking immediately after tooling and before sealant surface starts to skin.

Remove excess sealant from adjoining surfaces before the sealant has set, using the cleaning materials and methods required by Sika, leaving surfaces clean and the sealant runs undamaged.

3.21 SURROUNDING WORK Leave surrounding surfaces in a neat, clean condition with no evidence of spill overs. Completion 3.22 CLEAN UP Clean up as the work proceeds. 3.23 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.24 REMOVE Remove masking tape, used packaging and waste products from the site. 4. SELECTIONS Sika exterior sealants 4.1 WALLS / STONEWORK- SIKAFLEX® AT Substrate: Various Cleaner/primer: Sika cleaner-205, non porous substrates Sika Primer-3N, porous substrates Product: Sikaflex® AT-Facade (VOC content 113 grams/Litre vs. 250 grams

/Litre limit for architectural sealants) Application area: Panel joints and seams Location: ~ 4.2 WINDOWS/DOORS Substrate: Aluminium, Steel Primer/cleaner: Sika cleaner-205 Product: Sikaflex® AT-Facade (VOC content 113 grams/Litre vs. 250 grams

/Litre limit for architectural sealants) Application area: Frame, perimeter joints Location: ~ 4.3 CAVITIES - FIRE RATED Substrate: Various Primer: n/a Product: Sika Boom-FR Application area: General internal cavities

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 4821 FLASHINGS Page 123

4821 FLASHINGS 1. GENERAL This section relates to the fabrication and installation of flashing systems not forming part

of a proprietary system. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 4421N for NURALITE ROOFING. Refer to 7411 for RAINWATER HEADS AND DOWNPIPES. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: Code of practice NZ metal roof and wall cladding NZBC B2/AS1 Durability NZBC E2/AS1 External moisture AS/NZS 2728 Prefinished/prepainted sheet metal products for interior/exterior

building applications - Performance requirements AS 3566 Self-drilling screws for the building and construction industries -

General requirements and mechanical properties NZS 3604:1999 Timber framed buildings Requirements 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS Work to be carried out by tradesmen experienced, competent and familiar with the

materials and techniques specified. 1.4 VERIFY DIMENSIONS Verify dimensions against site measurements prior to fabrication. Standards of performance 1.5 DURABILITY REQUIREMENTS Design and install the flashings appropriate for the durability applications in accordance

with NZBC B2/AS1. NZBC B2/AS1, 3.2 requires that all hidden elements have at least the same durability as that of the element that covers it. Refer to NZBC B2/AS1 Table 1: Durability Requirements of Nominated Building Elements and NZBC E2/AS1 Table 20 Material selection.

1.6 COMPATIBILITY REQUIREMENTS Each flashing material shall be selected in accordance with NZBC E2/AS1 Table 20 to

minimise corrosion. Refer to either NZS 3604 Clause 4.2 or AS/NZS 2728 for the relevant exposure conditions. For compatibility of materials in contact and subject to run-off, refer to NZBC E2/AS1 table 21 and NZBC E2/AS1 table 22.

1.7 DESIGN For flashings where there are no specific details or drawings, provide a full size mock up

of the flashing to integrate components into the weathertight system. Co-ordinate with the trades affected by the installation.

2. PRODUCTS 2.1 FLASHING MATERIALS Acceptable materials for flashings are described in NZBC E2/AS1, 4.0. Material, grade

and colour as detailed and scheduled. Ensure that materials used for flashings are compatible with the building and cladding materials and their fixings. Fabricate flashings from a ductile grade of metal designed for lateral strength by folding, stiffening or ribbing on external edges, having a maximum un-stiffened width of 300mm.


2.2 FIXINGS Rivets, screws, nails and cleats to be compatible with the materials being fastened.

Fasteners complying with the corrosion requirements of AS 3566 are suitable for use with ZINCALUME® steel products. Use only low carbon non-conductive sealing washers.

2.3 JOINTS - SEALANTS Neutral curing silicone rubber sealant that is acetic acid free with low resistance to

compression and be-able to withstand large temperature variations. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 DELIVERY Keep flashings dry in transit. Take delivery of flashings in an undamaged condition.

Reject all damaged materials. 3.2 STORAGE Store materials and accessories on a level, firm base, in dry conditions, well ventilated,

out of direct sunlight and completely protected from weather and damage. Ensure storage areas are away from current work areas. Cover to keep dry until fixed.

3.3 HANDLING Avoid distortion and contact with potentially damaging surfaces/substances. Do not drag

flashings across each other, or across other surfaces. Protect edges, corners and surfaces from damage.

3.4 SUBSTRATE Do not commence work until the substrate is of the standard required by the installer for

the specified flashings, level and in true alignment. 3.5 PROTECT Protect surfaces, window and door joinery, and finishes already in place, from the

possibility of damage during the installation process. 3.6 CONFIRM LAYOUT Before commencing work confirm the proposed installation of the flashings and

expansion joints and other visual considerations of the finished work. 3.7 CO-ORDINATE INSTALLATION Co-ordinate installation of flashings with associated trades. Application 3.8 INSTALLATION Install flashings in accordance with NZ Metal Roof and Wall Cladding Code of Practice

and in compliance with NZBC E2/AS1, 4.0 Flashings. For very high wind zones and where the pitch of the roof is below 10° the flashing joint laps shall be sealed with sealant at each end of the lap to prevent the ingress of water.

Form hem on vertical upstands of hidden flashings to prevent capillary action. Refer to

NZBC E2/AS1 Table 7 for general dimensions of flashings. 3.9 FIXINGS Fix flashings with fasteners appropriate to the situation. For fixing flashings with

proprietary brackets or clips ensure they are aligned to allow for movement and are compatible with the flashing material.

Fix screws with the shank perpendicular to the surface of the flashing with the washer

fitted firmly against the flashing. Screws to be compatible with the flashing material. Rivets 'blind' or 'pop' are to be sealed when used. Aluminium rivets are compatible with

zinc or AZ coated steel. Monel and stainless steel rivets can be used to fix galvanized


steel flashings. Minimum diameter of rivet to be used is 4.0mm. Drill hole 1mm larger than the rivet size. Seal head of rivet with neutral cured silicone.

3.10 JOINTING - SEALANTS Clean surfaces to be lapped using a solvent ensuring all traces of the solvent are

removed with a clean rag. Apply sealant by gun in a continuous bead of approximately 5mm diameter. Width of sealant when compressed should not exceed 25mm. Sealant joints shall be mechanically fixed for strength. Refer to NZ Metal Roof and Wall Cladding Code of Practice for details.

3.11 FINAL INSPECTION A final inspection by the installer to take place after completion of the flashing work. Any

defects or subsequent damage to be made good. Completion 3.12 PROTECT Protect new work from damage. 3.13 REPLACE Replace all damaged or marked elements. 3.14 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required for following procedures. 3.15 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 FLASHINGS Type/material/colour General flashings: 0.55mm Colorsteel MAXX Colour TBA

© CIL Masterspec 2011 4924 STAINLESS STEEL METALWORK Page 126

4924 STAINLESS STEEL METALWORK 1. GENERAL This section relates to the fabrication and installation of stainless steel items of a general

nature. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 3411 for HADLEY AND ROBINSON STRUCTURAL STEEL. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO Documents referred to in this section are: BS EN 1011-3 Welding. Recommendations for welding of metallic materials. Arc

welding of stainless steels BRANZ BU 476 Principles of flashing design Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


Requirements 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS Metalworkers to be experienced in working with stainless steel and the techniques

specified. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS Provide shop drawings showing: - plans, elevations and sections - methods of fixing - methods of joint forming - finishing techniques - methods of fabrication and site assembly of large units. Refer to the general section 1235 SHOP DRAWINGS for the requirements for submission

and review and the provision of final shop drawings. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 STAINLESS STEEL SECTIONS Plates/rods/flat bars/equal angles/tubes/square tubes/chromium/nickel steel alloy. 2.2 STAINLESS STEEL SHEET Sheet/strip cold rolled chromium/nickel steel alloy, austenitic 300 series. Components 2.3 SCREWS Grade 316 stainless steel self-tapping with the type of head, length, gauge and thread to

suit the work and its location. 2.4 BOLTS Grade 316 stainless steel, type and size to suit the work and its location. 2.5 RIVETS Domed with similar composition and mechanical properties to the parent metal.


2.6 TUBULAR RIVETS Stainless steel or Monel metal with domed/countersunk head. 2.7 THREADED STUDS Grade 316 stainless steel with stud and nut threads to suit the base material and the nut

being used. 2.8 CLIPS Form clips to detail of the same metal as the metal sheet being fixed/secured. 2.9 NAILS Spiral rolled flat-head/clout type, with similar composition and mechanical properties to

the parent metal. Select length and gauge to suit the work and its location. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 HANDLING Do not deliver any elements to the site which cannot be unloaded immediately into

suitable storage conditions. Avoid distortion of elements during transit, storage and handling. Prevent surfaces rubbing together, and any contact with mud, plaster or cement. Keep protective coverings dry.

3.2 PREPARATION Ensure location and substrate is ready to receive the elements and will allow work of the

required standard. 3.3 MATERIALS Select and use sheet metals suited to the element, process or finish specified, jointing

them as necessary to allow full development of their expected durability with a minimising of potential corrosion.

3.4 FLASHINGS Form to BRANZ BU 467. Ensure the location and the substrate are ready to receive the

fabrication and will allow work of the required standard. Assembly 3.5 PROTECTION During fabrication protect all surfaces which will be visible in completed work. 3.6 COLD FORMED Ensure cold formed work is free from warping, buckling and fractures. Form bends with a

brake press or by cold rolling. 3.7 CORNERS Unless specified otherwise, mitre junctions of identical sections. 3.8 HOLES Form without distortion of surrounding metal. 3.9 MOVING PARTS When assembled, all moving parts must move freely and without binding. 3.10 CLEANING Remove all burrs and sharp arrises which would be visible after fixing, or a hazard to the

user. 3.11 AFTER CUTTING STAINLESS STEEL Grind off materials liable to corrode after thermal cutting.


3.12 BONDING Prepare surfaces of metals to receive adhesives by degreasing and abrading

mechanically or chemically. Use adhesives in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Form bond under pressure.

3.13 RIVETED JOINTS Draw riveted joints tightly together, with rivets closed to completely fill holes. 3.14 MECHANICAL JOINTS Ensure mechanical joints are tight with no visible gaps. 3.15 MECHANICAL JOINTS - ELEMENTS Bed in mastic all mechanical joints of elements which will be located externally, including

all mating surfaces, cleats and other fixings. 3.16 MECHANICAL JOINTS - CLEATS Unless specified otherwise connect cleats to frames with countersunk screws where they

will be visible after the component has been fixed and where raised heads would interfere with any moving part.

Assembly - welding 3.17 WELDING OF STAINLESS STEEL Welding stainless steel to BS EN 1011-3. 3.18 PREPARATION FOR WELDING Remove grease, dirt, moisture and oxide from edges to be welded. Remove scale and

residue from arc and power cutting by machining or hand grinding. 3.19 ACCURACY Ensure accurate fit using clamps and jigs where practical. Use tack welds for temporary

attachment where jigging is not practical. 3.20 WELDS Make joints with parent and weld metal fully fused throughout with no inclusions, holes,

porosity or cracks. 3.21 WELDING STAINLESS STEEL Use double level butt welds, backing bars to remove heat, jigging, tack welds and any

other measures necessary to minimise distortion. Remove slight distortion by light hammering, taking care not to damage the surface finish.

3.22 SPATTER Prevent weld spatter falling on surfaces of materials which will be self finished and visible

in completed work. 3.23 RESIDUES Ensure complete removal of flux residues and slag. 3.24 BUTT WELDS Grind butt welds which will be visible in completed work smooth and flush with adjacent

surfaces. Application 3.25 INSTALLATION Locate plugs accurately and use in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

Fix plumb, level and true to line. Fix to comply with the reviewed shop drawings and installation details, including brackets, bolts, fixings, bedding compounds and sealants.

3.26 LOADING Elements must not carry any structural load unless designed to do so. Do not use

elements as strutting or support when in place.


Application - sheet stainless steel 3.27 FABRICATE Fabricate and assemble in a workshop wherever practicable. 3.28 MARK OUT Mark out the work accurately, square and true to line allowing for correct radius folds and

laps to give the dimensions required for neat, close fits when in place. Use marking methods that do not damage, deface or cause future corrosive attack to the sheet metal being worked.

3.29 CUT SHEETS Cut sheets by mechanical methods leaving edges true to line, square, smooth and free

from all burrs. 3.30 FORMING Use mechanical methods wherever possible and form and fold sheets square and true to

line and face free of all deformation and defects. Minimise cold-working and stress build-up and their effects by limiting the amount of working and avoiding sharp radius bends (minimum 1 x sheet thickness).

3.31 PRE-ASSEMBLE Pre-assemble in the workshop and match mark elements being assembled or erected on

site. Do not strain, twist, bend or open such elements to force them into the correct position while assembling or erecting.

3.32 SEPARATION Isolate dissimilar materials (metal and non-metal) in close proximity by painting the

surfaces or fitting separator strips. Refer also to BRANZ BU 467. 3.33 JOINING STAINLESS STEEL SHEET Use self-secured seams, stainless steel rivets, Monel-metal rivets, bolts, self-tapping

screws and welding as best suits the form and location of the work. 3.34 INSTALLATION Locate fixings accurately and use in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

Fix plumb, level and true to line. Fix to comply with the installation details and complete with bedding compounds and sealants.

3.35 LOADING Fully support elements unless designed to be self-supporting. Completion 3.36 ENSURE Ensure all elements are free of marks or blemishes, with all moving parts working fully

and freely. 3.37 REPLACE Replace damaged, cracked or marked elements. 3.38 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.39 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 SEE DRAWINGS


© CIL Masterspec 2011 5112 FIBROUS PLASTER AND STO CEILINGS AND WALL LININGS Page 131

5112 FIBROUS PLASTER AND STO CEILINGS AND WALL LININGS

1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply, fixing and jointing of fibrous plaster and STO sheets

and accessories to timber and steel substrates: - wall linings - ceiling linings - Rondo Panther Access Panels Related work 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS Refer to 5172D for DECORTECH ACOUSTIC PANELS. Refer to 5311F for FORMAN SUSPENDED CEILINGS. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Documents referred to in this section are: NZBC G6/VM1 Airborne and impact sound AS 1397 Steel sheet and strip - hot-dipped, zinc-coated or aluminium/zinc

coated AS/NZS 2588 Gypsum plasterboard AS/NZS 2589 Gypsum linings - Application and finishing NZS 2592 Gypsum plaster for building purposes ASTM C557-03e1 Standard Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum

Wallboard to Wood Framing New Zealand Fibrous Plaster Association: Code of recommended practice for the

application, fixing and specification of fibrous plaster Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


Requirements 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS Fixing and stopping to be carried out by competent workers, experienced in the materials

and in the techniques specified and who are members of the New Zealand Fibrous Plaster Association.

2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 STANDARD FIBROUS PLASTER SHEET Form from gypsum plaster to NZS 2592, casting grade, reinforced with fibreglass or sisal

hemp to NZS AS/NZS 2588. 2.2 STOSILENT PANEL AND FIXINGS 15mm STOSILENT PANEL glass granulate panels finished with 2mm SUPERFEIN

sprayed fine grain texture. STO fixing channels and brackets to form 36mm cavity. Components 2.3 SECTIONS AND TRIM Form from galvanized steel of a coating class not less than Z275 to AS 1397 and fix with

30mm x 2.5mm galvanized clouts.


2.4 EXTERNAL ANGLE Perforated. 2.5 INTERNAL ANGLE Perforated. 2.6 CASING BEAD To suit sheet thickness. 2.7 RESILIENT RAIL Z profile for acoustic systems. Fix with 25mm x 6 gauge countersunk screws. 2.8 CEILING CHANNEL Top hat section of 0.7mm thick steel, galvanized coating class not less than Z275 to

AS 1397, 30mm deep and 50mm wide with 20mm flanges. 2.9 STO FIXING CHANNEL Use STO fixing channel and brackets as detailed to form 36mm cavity. 2.10 NAILS 30mm, 40mm and 50mm x 2.5mm galvanized flat head clouts as required for the New

Zealand Fibrous Plaster Association standard, fire rated and acoustic systems. 2.11 SCREWS 30mm, 40mm and 60mm x 6 gauge non-rusting gypsum screws as required for the New

Zealand Fibrous Plaster Association standard, fire rated and acoustic systems. Washers as required for fire rated systems.

2.12 TAPE Reinforcing type 40mm wide open-weave fibreglass. Accessories 2.13 ADHESIVES Wallboard: Solvent based wallboard adhesive to ASTM C557-03e1. Cornice: Water/plaster mix 2.14 JOINTING COMPOUND Finishing grade. 2.15 STOPPING PLASTER Finishing grade gypsum plaster. 2.16 STO SUPERFEIN 2MM sprayed fine grain texture. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 HANDLE AND STORE Handle and store sheets and accessories to the sheet manufacturer's requirements. 3.2 SUBSTRATE To the sheet manufacturer's requirements. Plumb, level, in true alignment before

commencing work. 3.3 PROTECT Protect joinery, fittings and finishes already in place from water staining or damage. Application - Standard Systems


3.4 FORM REBATES Form rebates for taping of joints except where joint wadding is specified. 3.5 LINE WALLS AND CEILINGS To AS/NZS 2589. Line walls and ceilings with the various sheets and fix to the New

Zealand Fibrous Plaster Manufacturers Association: "Code of recommended practice for the application, fixing and specification of fibrous plaster".

Application - finishing sections and trims 3.6 FIX EXTERNAL ANGLE Fix full length to external corners with clouts at 100mm centres each side staggered to

the sheet manufacturer's details and requirements. 3.7 FIX INTERNAL ANGLE Fix full length to internal corners with clouts at 100mm centres each side staggered to the

sheet manufacturer's details and requirements. 3.8 FIX CASING BEAD Fix between dissimilar materials and caulk with acoustic sealant to the sheet

manufacturer's details and requirements. 3.9 FIX J MOULD Fix between dissimilar materials and caulk with acoustic sealant to the drawings supplied. 3.10 TAPED CORNERS Form at ceiling to wall and wall to wall internal angles to the sheet manufacturer's details

and requirements. 3.11 FORM BEAM CASING Form ceiling beam casings from sheet material. Fix to the sheet manufacturer's details

and requirements and to the drawings supplied. Finishing - stopping 3.12 JOINTS Immerse reinforcing tape in the stopping and after removing excess lay evenly and

smoothly across the joints in the sheet rebates. Fill rebates and joint with the stopping plaster and finish off to the sheet manufacturer's requirements. LVL6 Finish.

3.13 FILLING Fill fastening holes, angles and damaged arrises with stopping plaster and flush off to the

sheet manufacturer's requirements. LVL6 Finish. Completion 3.14 REPLACE Replace damaged sheets or elements. 3.15 CLEAN DOWN Clean down completed surfaces to remove irregularities and finally finish to the sheet

manufacturer's requirements to leave completely smooth and clean. 3.16 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.17 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS


Standard systems 4.1 STOSILENT PANEL STOSILENT PANEL 15mm thick with STOSILENT SUPERFINE 2mm thick plaster Use STO channels and fixings as detailed to form 36mm cavity. 4.2 CEILING AND WALL SHEETS

Type Thickness Fixing Location Standard 12mm Adhesive and screw Ceiling and Wall

4.3 ACCESS PANELS –TWO Required Two Rondo Panther access panels. Location SHOP Ceiling Acoustic rating: NRC35 Finish/colour: White Size: 530mm x 530mm Edge: Standard Lock: Budget lock

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 5151 INTERNAL TRIM Page 135

5151 INTERNAL TRIM 1. GENERAL This section relates to simple lengths of trim fixed on site as of isolated internal members,

with simple end joints. It includes: - timber - MDF - metal - plastic Documents 1.1 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3604:1999 Timber framed buildings NZS 3610 Specification for profiles of mouldings and joinery 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 TIMBER TRIM To NZS 3610 and to profiles detailed on the drawings. Timber species, grade and

treatment to NZS 3602. 2.2 SEEDRAWINGS Components 2.3 NAILS Bright steel to dimension requirements of NZS 3604. Use galvanized where prone to

dampness. 2.4 BRADS Bright steel of a length three times the thickness of the member being fixed. Use

cadmium plated where prone to dampness. 2.5 SCREWS, STEEL Bright steel of a length to penetrate the substrate up to the shank. Use stainless steel in

wet areas. 2.6 SCREWS, CHROME PLATED Chrome plated of a length to penetrate the substrate up to the shank. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 GENERALLY To comply with NZS 3604, except as varied in this specification. Execution to include

those methods, practices and processes contained in the unit standards for the National Certificate in Carpentry and the National Certificate in Joinery (cabinetry, exterior joinery, stairs).

3.2 STORAGE Take delivery of trims undamaged and unmarked and store on site under cover, away

from moisture, heat and direct sunlight in adequately ventilated area and clear of areas


where work is in progress, to ensure materials are of the required standard when fixed in place.

3.3 ACCLIMATISE MATERIALS Remove materials from packaging, separate and allow to acclimatise in the proposed

installation area for 48 hours minimum prior to installation. 3.4 ENSURE Ensure that the substrate to trims will allow work of the required standard. If it does not,

do not proceed until the substrate has been remedied. Application - Generally 3.5 INSTALL TIMBER TRIM Use full lengths. Fit with scribed internal joints, mitred external joints and, mitred and

returned at stop ends. Fix plumb, level and true to line and face using nails or brads to suit. Leave secure and with no movement possible.

3.6 INSTALL PLASTIC SKIRTING Joint fit and fix, level and true to line and face all to the skirting manufacturer's

requirements. 3.7 INSTALL PROPRIETARY TRIM Use full lengths. Scribe joint and fix securely, plumb, level and true to line and face to the

trim manufacturer's requirements. 3.8 INSTALL PROPRIETARY METAL TRIM Mitre and weld where direction changes. Fold and weld stop ends. Site measure and

carry out all fabrication in a workshop. Screw fix securely, plumb, level and true to line and face, all as detailed.

Application - MDF trim 3.9 NAIL FIX Use full lengths. Fit with scribed internal joints, mitred external joints and returned on

itself at stop ends. Fix plumb, level and true to line and face using 40mm or 50mm brads to suit, ensuring fixing to a minimum depth of 25mm into framing timber. Leave secure and with no movement possible. Punch brads and fill with stopping compound to maintain the smooth surface.

3.10 ADHESIVE FIX Use full lengths. Fit with scribed internal joints, mitred external joints and returned on

itself at stop ends. Fix plumb, level and true to line and face using wallboard adhesive. 3.11 PNEUMATIC FASTENER FIX Use full lengths. Fit with scribed internal joints, mitred external joints and returned on

itself at stop ends. Fix plumb, level and true to line and face using resin coated narrow crown staples. Use fastener length to provide fixing depth into timber frame equal to the moulding thickness. Leave secure and with no movement possible. Fill with stopping compound to maintain the smooth surface.

3.12 SCREW FIX Use full lengths. Fit with scribed internal joints, mitred external joints and returned on

itself at stop ends. Predrill pilot holes equal to shaft diameter, a minimum 25mm from ends and curves. Fix plumb, level and true to line and face using trim manufacturer's required fasteners or particleboard screws. Leave secure and with no movement possible.

Finishing 3.13 PUNCH Punch all nail heads below the face of trim ready to receive stopping, as specified under

painting preparation.


3.14 COUNTERSINK Countersink screw heads not less than 2mm below the faces of trim to be painted. Stop

and finish off flush with the face, as specified under painting preparation. 3.15 PELLETING Countersink screw head 6mm below the faces of trim which is to be clear finished. Glue

in grain-matched pellets not less than 6mm thick and cut from matching timber. Finish off flush with the face.

Completion 3.16 LEAVE Leave the whole of this work free of blemishes, undamaged and to the standard of finish

required for following procedures. 3.17 PROTECTION Protect the completed work and make good before any surface finish is applied. 3.18 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.19 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 5172D DECORTECH ACOUSTIC AND DECORATIVE PANELS Page 138

5172D DECORTECH ACOUSTIC AND DECORATIVE PANELS 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and installation of: Decortech Decorative, Acoustic and Firesafe wall and ceiling systems including: - Decortech Plywood Decorative, Acoustic and Firesafe Wall and Ceiling Panels - Decortech Plywood Special Applications - Decortech MDF Decorative, Acoustic and Firesafe Wall and Ceiling Panels - Decortech Multigroove Decorative, Acoustic and Firesafe Planks and Panels - Decortech Concept and Firesafe Concept Tiles - Decortech Prestige and Firesafe Prestige Tiles - Decortech Effects Panels - Decortech Custom and Firesafe Custom Panels - All elements required to complete the systems. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 5112 for FIBROUS PLASTER 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS The following abbreviations are used throughout this part of the specification: FRR Fire resistance rating NRC Noise reduction coefficient Documents 1.3 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC C/AS1 Fire safety AS/NZS 1170.1 Structural design actions - Permanent, imposed and other actions NZS 1170.5 Structural design actions - Earthquake actions - New Zealand AS 1397 Steel sheet and strip - Hot dipped zinc - coated or aluminium/zinc -

coated AS/NZS 1530.3 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and

structures - Simultaneous determination of ignitability, flame propagation, heat release and smoke release

AS/NZS 2785 Suspended ceilings - Design and installation AS 2946 Suspended ceilings, recessed luminaires and air diffusers - Interface

requirements for physical compatibility NZS 4219 Seismic performance of engineering systems in buildings AS/NZS 4600 Cold - formed steel structures ASTM C423 Test method for sound absorption and sound absorption coefficients

by the reverberation room method ASTM E1414 Standard test method for airborne sound attenuation between rooms

sharing a common ceiling plenum (two room method) Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


1.4 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to this part of the work: Technical Specification Sheets Data Sheets Plywood Grading Sheets Fire testing Certificates Copies of the above literature are available at Decortech Limited Web: www.decortech.co.nz Email: [email protected]


Telephone: 0800 211 311 Warranties 1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty: 5 years: For Decortech Acoustic and Decorative panels. - Provide this warranty on the manufacturer/supplier standard form. - Commence the warranty from the date of purchase. Refer to the general section WARRANTIES for additional requirements. Requirements 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS Installers to be experienced, competent trades people familiar with the materials and

techniques specified. 1.7 NO SUBSTITUTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to any specified Decortech system, or associated

components and products. 1.8 SAMPLE SECTION Allow to erect a sample section of the system offered. Subject to confirmation in writing,

the sample section may form part of the completed installation. Refer to SELECTIONS for location of sample section. 1.9 SPARES Provide spare matching elements in the quantities specified in SELECTIONS. Deliver

into a dry store at the site or elsewhere as directed and at agreed times. Performance 1.10 LOADING CODE REQUIREMENT Comply with the requirements of AS/NZS 1170.1 and NZS 1170.5. 1.11 CERTIFICATION Provide: - certification of compliance with NZS 1170.5, section 8 for evaluation - certificates and other evidence that the system offered complies with the standards of

performance specified 1.12 ACOUSTIC REQUIREMENTS Refer to SELECTIONS for requirements. Use an independent testing authority to test a

specimen of the system to ASTM C423 and ASTM E1414, and submit the results for acceptance.

1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Design the system for use over its expected life without deterioration. Refer to

SELECTIONS for requirements. 1.14 REFLECTANCE Refer to SELECTIONS for requirements. 2. PRODUCTS Materials - Decortech Decorative, Acoustic Panels 2.1 DECORTECH MDF MULTIGROOVE PANELS Medium Density Fibreboard (MDF) panels with a choice of natural or painted finishes, or

timber veneer finish. Panels are mounted directly to timber framing using surface fix


screws, or by using a special staple gun to give a concealed fixing. Staple gun can be borrowed from Decortech (subject to availability.)

Refer to SELECTIONS. An acoustic backing of Decoustic 85 Felt (FR) is bonded to the back of the perforated

panels as standard. All panels have a very low formaldehyde emission. Components 2.2 SCREWS 25mm x 6 gauge stainless steel Type S self-drilling and self-tapping countersunk screws. 2.3 ADHESIVE Single pack waterproof general purpose construction adhesive. 2.4 STAPLES Galvanised wire staples to attach Multigroove planks to timber framing. Use special

staple gun available on loan from Decortech. Accessories 2.5 CLASHING Panels can be clashed on all four sides in veneer to match the face. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 STORAGE Store panels and accessories in dry conditions indoors and out of sunlight in neat flat

stacks. Store clear of the floor with no sagging and avoiding damage to ends, edges and surfaces. Reject damaged material. Storage requirements differ for each product. Contact Decortech for technical specification sheet.

Note: Sunlight will cause discolouration of the panels and they must be stacked squarely on top of one another and fully covered with an opaque cover.

3.2 CO-ORDINATE SERVICES Co-ordinate and co-operate with electrical and mechanical work to avoid conflict between

the panels and service outlets, luminaires, diffusers, pipework and ducting. Confirm the provision of support and fixings.

Ensure co-operation with work in and above the ceiling, including the marking of specific

ceiling panels below major access points to above-ceiling services. Colour coded markings to follow the standards laid down by mechanical and electrical services.

3.3 SITE CONDITIONS Do not begin installation until the building is closed in, fully glazed, the roof watertight,

and mechanical and electrical work is ready. 3.4 CEILINGS Comply with AS 2946 for interface requirements for physical compatibility. 3.5 RESPONSIBILITY Ensure that conditions are suitable for the installation. Arrange for the programming of

the work to suit required practice. Application 3.6 INSTALLATION To AS/NZS 2785. Installation to comply with the loadings code AS/NZS 1170.1.

Installation to comply with the requirements of NZS 4219; with related building services installations complying specifically with clauses 2.22, 2.25 and 2.29.


3.7 ACCESSIBILITY CEILINGS Provide access to the ceiling system and the in-ceiling and above-ceiling services so that

maintenance and removal of any part can be carried out without damage to the ceiling system or panels.

3.8 PENETRATIONS Accommodate light fittings, air conditioning outlets and other electrical and/or mechanical

services that are fixed to or pass through the system. Provide independent support for these as necessary.

3.9 INSTALLING MULTIGROOVE PANELS Fix panels to manufacturers instructions. Staple panels through the groove directly on to

the timber framing, using Decortech special staple gun (subject to availability on loan from Decortech) or use panel pins. Apply adhesive to rear of board as necessary.

3.10 PROTECT EXISTING WORK Protect adjacent existing work from damage during the installation. Completion 3.11 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.12 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.13 REMOVE Remove debris, unused elements and elements from the site. 3.14 CLEAN Clean the panels when required with a damp warm cloth. Avoid any solvents or abrasive

cleaners. 3.15 PROTECT Protect installed Decortech panels and finished surfaces from damage. 4. SELECTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to the following selections. 4.1 DECORTECH MULTIGROOVE WALL AND CEILING PANELS Location: Ceiling Brand Type: Decortech Multi groove Acoustic Panel Type: Plain MDF Panel size: 2400 x 1200mm Panel thickness: 18mm FRR rating: SFI - 0, SDI - 5 Acoustic rating (% open area): ~ Pattern: 3/16 Multigooove Finish: Prefinished Factory applied Paint. Colour: Resene Eighth Blanc

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 5231 INTERIOR DOORS Page 142

5231 INTERIOR DOORS 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and installation of interior: - doors and frames 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to glazing sections for glazing Refer to painting sections for finishes Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC C/AS1 Fire safety AS/NZS 1170.1 Structural design actions - Permanent, imposed and other actions NZS 3602 Timber and wood-based products for use in building NZS 3604:1999 Timber framed buildings NZS 3610 Specification for profiles of mouldings and joinery NZS 4211 Specifications for performance of windows NZS 4223.3 Glazing in buildings - Human impact safety requirements 2. PRODUCTS Materials - door and window frames general 2.1 STEEL DOOR FRAME AND DOOR SECTIONS To BS 6510. 2.2 GLAZING Refer to glazing section/s for glass type and thickness. Materials - doors general 2.3 TIMBER To NZS 3602. Moisture content 10-14%. To NZS 3610. Solid or hollow core. 2.4 STEEL FRAMES Doors Frames as detailed and dimensioned. Components 2.5 DOOR FURNITURE Refer to 5521 HARDWARE for type and finish. 2.6 SCREWS Stainless steel or non-corrodible metal. Length sufficient to penetrate into the

background support up to the shank. Screws for fixing hinges, hardware or furniture to match the item being attached.

2.7 NAILS Length sufficient to penetrate into the background support at least half the nail length,

except if into radiata pine then three-fifths their length. 2.8 DOOR HINGES Size and gauge to carry door size and weight. 3 hinges per door. Type: Loose pin Size: 89mm Material: Zinc-plated steel Pin: Loose-pin zinc-plated steel


2.9 DOOR SKIN (FACINGS) Doors skins as detailed and dimensioned. Finish 2.10 TIMBER - PAINT FINISH Factory applied coating system. 2.11 TIMBER - CLEAR FINISH Factory applied coating system. 2.12 STEEL FRAMES POWDER COATED Polyester powder organic coating in accordance with WANZ Powder Coating Quality

Assurance System and AS 3715. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 GENERALLY Execution to include those methods, practices and processes contained in the unit

standards for the National Certificate in Carpentry and the National Certificate in Joinery (cabinetry, exterior joinery, stairs).

3.2 DO NOT DELIVER Do not deliver any elements which cannot be unloaded immediately into suitable storage

conditions. 3.3 HANDLE Handle, unload and store elements without distortion and avoiding pre-finished surfaces

rubbing together, and contact with mud, moisture and other damaging materials. 3.4 PROTECT Protect all elements against damage to arrises and glazing beads. Store frames and

doors flat and away from moisture or direct sunlight. 3.5 FABRICATE DOORS Fabricate doors in the factory, with provision for door furniture. 3.6 CHECK ALL OPENINGS To NZS 3604.Check all openings on site for size and standard of execution before

installing window or door frames. Installation tolerances of windows subject to earthquake design to comply with AS/NZS 1170.1.

Assembly 3.7 TOLERANCES Construct windows to a dimensional accuracy to comply with NZS 4211, clause 8. 3.8 FABRICATION GENERALLY Manufacture and fabricate frames and doors as detailed. Install hinges and running gear

as scheduled. Provide temporary bracing and protection. Temporarily secure all opening elements for transportation.

Application - generally 3.9 FIXING FRAMES Fix and assemble frames rigidly in place, plumb, level and true to line and face without

distortion and with all opening sashes fully and easily operating. Fit architraves.


3.10 DISTORTION Do not distort frames when wedging or other packing, or when tightening fixings. If

necessary adjust packing and fixings to eliminate binding. Do not cut, plane or sand frames to remedy distortion.

3.11 FIXINGS Fix frames so that nail heads are covered by applied stops and beads. Punch all nail

heads below timber surfaces which will be visible in completed work. Ensure that at least one frame fixing is adjacent to each hanging point.

Application 3.12 PROPRIETARY ELEMENTS Fix in accordance with the door manufacturer's requirements. 3.13 INSTALLATION GENERALLY Wedge frames into opening and fix through into the wall framing. Locate all wedges and

fixing at hinge positions and opposite, with one fixing in the vicinity of the lock. Fixings concealed behind planted stops.

Hang doors on hinges, as specified and to operate freely. Fit all hardware and door

furniture. 3.14 INSTALL STANDARD DOORSETS Concrete walls - steel frames Fix in place with 10mm expanding masonry anchors with countersunk heads. At hinge

side fix direct to opening and pack on the other side to wedge in place. Fix at hinges and opposite, with one fixing in the vicinity of the lock.

Steel stud walls - steel frames Using a pilot hole in the frame, fix to steel studs with countersunk self-drilling corrosion

proof screws. Fix at hinges and opposite, with one fixing in the vicinity of the lock. Timber stud walls - steel frames Using a pilot hole in the frame, fix to timber studs with countersunk self-drilling corrosion

proof screws. Fix at hinges and opposite, with one fixing in the vicinity of the lock. 3.15 BOTTOM CLEARANCE Provide for specified floor coverings plus 5mm clearance at any point of swing. When

floor covering is not specified, allow 25mm total. For ventilated and/or air conditioned spaces allow 20mm clearance above finished floor

coverings for supply/return air. 3.16 REMOVE DOORS Remove doors from the frames if necessary to protect them, or for re-finishing, store

safely and near completion refit them, all without any damage. 3.17 INSTALL FURNITURE Install latches, locks and door furniture as scheduled. 3.18 CHECK Check and adjust operation of all doors, hardware and furniture. Completion 3.19 PROTECTION Protect all finishes against damage from adjacent and following work. 3.20 REPLACE Replace damaged, cracked or marked elements.


3.21 TRADE CLEAN Clean off or remove safety indicators at completion of the building. 3.22 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required for following procedures. 3.23 REMOVE Remove safety indicators and protective coverings, and wipe down all doorsets

thoroughly to leave them perfectly clean. Remove all debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

4. SELECTIONS 4.1 SEE DOOR SCHEDULE PLANS Hardware 4.2 HARDWARE Refer to 5521 HARDWARE section.

© CIL Masterspec 2011 5311F FORMAN SUSPENDED TILE CEILING SYSTEMS Page 146

5311F FORMAN SUSPENDED TILE CEILING SYSTEMS 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and installation of Forman Building Systems suspended

tile ceiling systems, including; Grid Tiled ceiling to STORE 1 and COAT / BAG ROOM Including; Suspension system - Ceiling tiles - Grid - Perimeter trim profile - All elements offered by the manufacturer to complete the system Rondo Ceiling Support System for Fibrous Plaster and Decortech Acoustic

Ceilings Including; Rondo Suspension system Foreman Fastmount clip for Concealed Decortech fixing 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS Refer to 5112 for FIBROUS PLASTER CEILINGS Refer to 5172 for DECORTECH ACOUSTIC CEILING 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS The following abbreviations are used throughout this part of the specification: FRR Fire resistance rating NRC Noise reduction coefficient CAC Ceiling attenuation class STC Sound transmission class Documents 1.3 DOCUMENTS Documents referred to in this section are: NZBC C/AS1 Fire safety AS/NZS 1170.1 Structural design actions - Permanent, imposed and other actions NZS 1170.5 Structural design actions - Earthquake actions - New Zealand AS/NZS 2785 Suspended ceilings - Design and installation NZS 4219 Seismic performance of engineering systems in buildings AS 2946 Suspended ceilings, recessed luminaires and air diffusers - Interface

requirements for physical compatibility ASTM C423 Test method for sound absorption and sound absorption coefficients

by the reverberation room method ASTM E1414 Standard test method for airborne sound attenuation between rooms

sharing a common ceiling plenum (two room method) Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


1.4 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents relating to work in this section are: Armstrong: Including grid systems and accessories, 30 year warranty, installation,

maintenance, safety data sheets, Green Star Assessment, Environmental Choice. Armstrong Humiguard: Ceiling tile range including RH99 and RH100 tiles Rondo: Concealed Suspended Ceiling Systems Access Panels Slimline and Panther Copies of the above literature are available at Forman Building Systems Web: www.forman.co.nz/products.php Telephone: 0800 45 4000


Requirements 1.5 NO SUBSTITUTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to any specified system, or associated components and

products. 1.6 INSTALLATION To AS/NZS 2785. Installation by a manufacturer's accredited installer, using the

manufacturer's technical services. Provide evidence of experience, listing completed projects of similar size and complexity. Installation of Firefly Cavity Barriers must be by trained installers.

Installation to comply with the loadings code AS/NZS 1170.1. Installation to comply with

the requirements of NZS 4219; with related building services installations complying specifically with clauses 2.22, 2.25 and 2.29.

1.7 CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS Supply information on the materials and method of cleaning the ceiling system over its

expected life. 1.8 SPARES Provide spare matching ceiling elements in the quantities specified in SELECTIONS.

Deliver into a dry store at the site or elsewhere as directed and at agreed times. Performance 1.9 LOADING CODE REQUIREMENT Comply with the requirements of AS/NZS 1170.1 or NZS 1170.5. 1.10 CERTIFICATION Provide: - certification of compliance with NZS 1170.5, section 8 for evaluation - certificates and other evidence that the system offered complies with the standards of

performance specified - a Producer Statement on completion. 1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Design the ceiling system for use over its expected life without deterioration. Refer to

SELECTIONS for requirements. 1.12 REFLECTANCE Refer to SELECTIONS for requirements. 2. PRODUCTS Materials - Armstrong two way exposed grid system 2.1 ARMSTRONG PEAKFORM SUSPENSION SYSTEM Grid finish/colour: Armstrong global white 2.2 PERIMETER TRIM - STEEL Brand/form: Armstrong PeakForm perimeter trim by Forman Building Systems Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel Finish/colour: Armstrong global white 2.3 CEILING TILES Supplied by Forman Building Systems. Materials - Rondo Key-Lock suspended flush ceilings


2.4 GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM System: Rondo Key-Lock building board suspension system Forman Fastmount Panel concealed mounting system Supplied by Forman Building Systems Freephone: 0800 45 4000. Hot-dip galvanized steel elements to AS/NZS 2785, including Furring Channels Top

Cross Rails, Suspension Clips and Suspension Rods and Brackets fixing to timber, steel and concrete.

Components 2.5 FASTENERS SUSPENSION SYSTEM Join furring channels and C channels using pop rivets or 8g-16 x 12mm (minimum) self

drilling wafer head screws. 2.6 SCREWS 25mm x 6 gauge non-rusting Type S self-drilling and self-tapping buglehead screws. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 CO-ORDINATE SERVICES Co-ordinate and co-operate with electrical and mechanical work to avoid conflict between

suspension members and luminaires, diffusers, pipework and ducting. Confirm the provision of extra hangers and fixings.

Ensure co-operation with work in and above the ceiling, including the marking of specific

ceiling tiles below major access points to above-ceiling services. Colour coded markings to follow the standards laid down by mechanical and electrical services.

3.2 SITE CONDITIONS Do not begin installation until the building is closed in, fully glazed, the roof watertight,

and mechanical and electrical duct work above the ceiling completed. 3.3 COMPLY Comply with AS 2946 for interface requirements for physical compatibility. 3.4 RESPONSIBILITY Ensure that conditions are suitable for the ceiling installation. Arrange for the

programming of the work to suit required practice. Application 3.5 INSTALL Install the system to AS/NZS 2785 minimum standards and the ceiling manufacturer's

requirements. 3.6 ACCESSIBILITY Provide access to the ceiling system and the in-ceiling and above-ceiling services so that

maintenance and removal of any part can be carried out without damage to the ceiling system or panels.

3.7 PENETRATIONS Accommodate recessed light fittings, air conditioning outlets and other electrical and/or

mechanical services that are fixed to or pass through the ceiling system. Provide independent support for these as necessary.

3.8 TILE QUALITY Use tiles that do not release fibres into the ceiling space, air conditioning or ventilation

system. Clip down tiles the grid to stop lifting.


3.9 FLUSH CEILING Install the Forman Rondo Keylock suspension system to AS/NZS 2785 minimum

standards. Screw-fix sheets to furring channel sections at the centres required by the ceiling lining manufacturer. Stagger joints and fully support on sections, with strongbacks at centres to suit the load and Rondo installation manual. Refer to 5112 FIBROUS PLASTER for stopping specification.

3.10 PROTECT EXISTING WORK Protect adjacent existing work from damage during the installation. Completion 3.11 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.12 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.13 REMOVE Remove debris, unused elements and elements from the site. 3.14 CLEAN Clean soiled or marked units. 4. SELECTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise. 4.1 SPARES Packs: 1 PACK (6 tiles) 4.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Grid and tile system 4.3 ARMSTRONG PEAKFORM SUSPENSION SYSTEM Module size: 1200mm x 600mm Face dimension: 24mm Perimeter: Longleg wall angle 4.4 CEILING TILES Brand: Armstrong Type: Humiguard Plus Acoustic Tile Pattern: Fine Fissured Thickness: 15mm Size: 1200mm x 600mm to suit grid Edge profile: Angled Tegular 4.5 FLUSH CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM Rondo Key-Lock building board suspension system from Forman Building Systems. Forman Fastmount Panel concealed mounting system. Location: Ceiling Ceiling lining: 12mm Fibrous Plaster And 18mm Decortech

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 5511 JOINERY AND CABINETRY FIXTURES Page 150

5511 JOINERY AND CABINETRY FIXTURES 1. GENERAL This section relates to custom joinery fittings and cabinetwork, purpose made in a factory

and fitted on site. Client will supply LOCKERS to site to be installed by the Contractor. Allow for Installation of RECEPTION COUNTER and LOCKERS in the tender price. Completion 1.1 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 1.2 LEAVE Leave work complete, clean and without blemish and to the standard required by

following procedures. 1.3 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 2. SELECTIONS 2.1 RECEPTION COUNTER See Plans for reception counter size 2.2 LOCKERS Supplied by Cliebnt Manufacturer: TBA Product name: TBA Allow to take delivery and Install

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 5521 HARDWARE Page 151

5521 HARDWARE 1. GENERAL This section covers the supply and installation of door and window hardware and

furniture. Allow the Prime Cost Sum (PC) of $10,000.00 Excluding GST for the supply of all Door

Hardware. Allow for fixing and Installation of Hardware in the tender price. 2. EXECUTION Conditions 2.1 RETAIN Retain hardware in the manufacturer's original packaging. Ensure that units are complete

with fixings and installation instructions. Label each unit separately with its hardware number and door/window number to match the submitted and approved schedule.

2.2 PACKAGE Package required hardware units in clear plastic and label each package with its

hardware and door/window number and location to match the drawings and the submitted and approved schedule. Place packages in cartons selected for "level", "location", and/or "sector" and label the packages and the cartons similarly.

2.3 STORE Store hardware packages in a shelved, dry and securely locked area. Provide

supervision when the secure area is unlocked and packages and cartons are being distributed; signing off each package from the schedule as released.

Installation 2.4 INSPECTION Before starting the hardware installation, check frames, doors, sashes and adjacent

finishes are ready for the proper installation of the hardware. 2.5 LOCATE Locate hardware units at heights and/or locations shown on the drawings, or as required

to comply with relevant Codes and Standards. Before proceeding, confirm any dimension not shown or known.

2.6 CUTTING AND FITTING Carry out cutting and fitting of the substrate necessary for installing any hardware unit

before painting or finishing of that surface. Remove hardware when required for painting, placing it in the packaging or carton originally supplied and returning it to the secure store until ready for re-installation.

2.7 INSTALL HARDWARE Install each hardware unit in accordance with the hardware manufacturer's requirements

using templates and tools supplied or recommended by them. Set units level, plumb and true to line and required location, with all moving parts and actions freely and easily operating. Do not make any modifications to supplied units.

Completion 2.8 ADJUST Adjust and check each operating hardware unit for correct and smooth functioning.

Replace those units that cannot be adjusted if they do not function correctly. Clean units and adjoining surfaces upon completing their installation. Only use lubricant if and when recommended by the hardware manufacturer/supplier.

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 5521 HARDWARE Page 152

2.9 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 2.10 LEAVE Leave work with parts fully and freely working and to the standard required by following

procedures. 2.11 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 2.12 PROTECT Protect hardware units from damage or marking. 2.13 FINAL ADJUSTMENT Where hardware is installed more than a month prior to project completion, return and

make a final check and adjustment of hardware units to ensure they are operating correctly, fitted properly and are undamaged.

© CIL Masterspec 2011 5811 SIGNS AND DISPLAYS Page 153

5811 SIGNS AND DISPLAYS 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and fixing of signs and displays, for internal and

external applications, this includes: - Vinyl sign systems - Engraved, individual letter, Braille, traffic and pylon sign systems - Illuminated sign systems, general signs and emergency exit signs - Custom design and made signs Allow the Provisional Sum (Prov) of $20,000.00 Excluding GST for the supply and

installation of the White Marble inlaid Letters at the entrance Allow the Provisional Sum (Prov) of $5,000.00 Excluding GST for the supply and

installation of exterior way finding signage.

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 6221 FLOOR AND WALL TILING Page 154

6221 FLOOR AND WALL TILING 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and installation of TIMARU BLUESTONE wall and floor

tiles to Concrete Substrates. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 3361 STONEWORK. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC D1/VM1 Access routes NZBC D1/AS1 Access routes NZBC E3/AS1 Internal moisture AS/NZS 3661.1 Slip resistance of pedestrian surfaces - Requirements AS 3958.1 Ceramic tiles - Guide to the installation of ceramic tiles NZS 4121 Design for access and mobility - Buildings and associated facilities AS/NZS 4671 Steel reinforcing materials AS4992.2 Ceramic tiles - Grouts and adhesives BRANZ Good practice guide: Tiling Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


1.3 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents referred to in this section are: TIMARU BLUESTONE 94 Coonoor Road, Timaru 7910 Telephone (03) 688 4158 Warranties 1.4 WARRANTY Warrant this work under normal environmental and use conditions against failure of

materials and execution Warranty period: 2 years Refer to the general section for the required form of 1237WA WARRANTY AGREEMENT

and details of when completed warranty must be submitted. Requirements 1.5 SAMPLES Submit on request samples of the tiles specified, sufficient to show the pattern and the

range of colour finish. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS Tiling to be carried out by competent workers experienced with the materials and in the

techniques specified. 1.7 DEFLECTION CRITERIA Check that the deflection of suspended floors does not exceed 1/360

th of the span under dead and live load.

1.8 ADHESIVES COMPATIBILITY Adhesives selected for use on proprietary substrates or waterproof membranes to have

documented compatibility approval from the respective manufacturers.


1.9 PROVIDE SPARE TILES Provide spare tiles. Refer to SELECTIONS for type and quantity. Performance 1.10 SLIP RESISTANCE FOR ACCESS ROUTES Slip resistance for tiles to comply with NZBC D1/AS1: 2.1 Slip resistance and 3.1 Slope. - when in place on a level access route, to have a mean coefficient of friction (µ) not less

than 0.4 when tested in accordance with AS/NZS 3661.1. - when in place on a sloping access route, to have a coefficient of friction (µ) not less

than 0.4 + 0.0125S (S = slope of surface expressed as a percentage). 1.11 PROVIDE EVIDENCE OF SLIP RESISTANCE Provide evidence that the tiles comply with the standard of performance specified. 1.12 CERTIFY SLIP RESISTANCE Provide certificates and any other evidence at the time of selection/supply that the tiles

comply with NZBC D1/VM1 and NZBC D1/AS1: Access routes. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 TILES Refer to SELECTIONS for product selection. Accessories 2.2 SCREED Mix of 3:1 Portland cement, coarse washed sand gauged with liquid polymer additive to

the tile manufacturer's stated requirements. 2.3 CEMENT MORTAR Sand and cement bedding coat with liquid polymer additive, to the tile manufacturer's

stated requirements. 2.4 TILE ADHESIVE To AS 4992.2. 2.5 SAND AND CEMENT GROUT 1 part Portland cement to 2-3 parts fine, washed sand, mixed to a paste consistency with

a minimum of clean, potable water. 2.6 PROPRIETARY GROUT Cement based, compressible and to suit particular location/use. To AS 4992.2. 2.7 MOVEMENT JOINT SEALANT To BRANZ Good practice guide: Tiling, section 5.0. - Neutral cured sealant for areas where waterproof membranes are used or where used

against aluminium. - Acid cured sealant except for areas where waterproof membranes are used or where

used against aluminium. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 HANDLING AND STORAGE Take delivery of packets of tiles undamaged and dry. Handle tiles with care to avoid

chipping, soiling and damage. Store on hard level standings in non-traffic, non work areas that are enclosed, clean and dry.


3.2 CHECK TILES Check tiles to ensure that they are as specified, from the same batch, of a consistent

colour and pattern and sufficient to complete the work. Reject tiles that vary widely in colour or pattern. Reject tiles that are damaged.

3.3 CONFIRM LAYOUT Before commencing work confirm the proposed layout of tiles and expansion joints and

other visual considerations of the finished work. 3.4 SETTING OUT Before commencing the setting out confirm the number and location of cut tiles. Minimise

in number with no cut tiles less than half size and only at the perimeter of the work. 3.5 GENERALLY Prepare surface and complete tiling work in accordance with AS 3958.1, as modified by

BRANZ Good practice guide: Tiling. Conditions 3.6 SERVICES AND ACCESSORIES Ensure that all services and accessories are in place and located to suit the tile layout,

and that the substrate, background and adjoining surfaces (with the preparation called for in this section) are of the quality necessary to allow tiling of the required standard.

3.7 DO NOT START Do not start laying tiles until concrete floors are cured, moisture content of floors is such

that shrinkage is complete, thermal movement has been accommodated and the levels and surface finish will achieve tile laying of the required standard.

3.8 SUBSTRATE TEMPERATURE Do not carry out tiling where the substrate temperature is below 5°C or above 40°C. 3.9 MOISTURE CONTENT Ensure the floor is dry and if in doubt check for moisture content by hygrometer. Do not

proceed with tiling work until readings for the whole area show 75% relative humidity or less.

Application - preparing new surfaces 3.10 CONCRETE FLOORS Completely remove surface contaminants such as paints, oils, release and curing

compounds. Remove projections, unevenness and loose material to leave a clean dust and dirt free surface.

3.11 SCREEDS Form screeds with a deviation from plane of not more than 5mm over 3 metres. Grouting 3.12 APPLY GROUTING Remove spacers. Apply grouting mix to as large an area as can be worked before setting

commences. Work with a grouting tool back and forth until joints are completely filled with no adhesive showing. Avoid damage to the surface of tiles, using masking tape where necessary. Finish to depth of cushion and flush with surface to cushion edge and square-edge tiles. Remove surplus grout with a damp sponge and tool the joints to finish the grout uniform in colour, smooth and without voids, pinholes or low spots.

3.13 APPLY PROPRIETARY GROUTING Remove spacers. Prepare joints, mix and apply grout and finish off to the grout

manufacturer's requirements, to finish the grout uniform in colour, smooth and without voids, pinholes or low spots.

Completion


3.14 REPLACE Replace damaged tiles or elements. 3.15 CLEANING Upon completion of setting and grouting, thoroughly sponge and wash the tiles to leave

them completely clean and without blemish. Finally polish glazed tiles with a clean dry cloth.

3.16 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.17 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.18 PROTECT TILES Protect tiles from damage. Ensure tiles are not disturbed by foot traffic for at least 24

hours after laying and after grouting. Provide protection to tiles by laying sheet material such as insulating board for the period between completion of laying and completion of the contract works.

4. SELECTIONS 4.1 SAMPLES Samples required for review: YES 4.2 TILES Manufacturer: TIMARU BLUESTONE INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR WALL Tile size 150mm x 400mm x 10mm OAMARU STONE SKIRTING Tile size 150mm x 400mm x 25mm FLOOR Tile size 1 400mm x400mm x20mm FLOOR Tile size 2 150mm x 400mm x 20mm Colour: Timaru Bluestone Honed~ Grout width: 3mm

© CIL Masterspec 2011 6312 SOLID TIMBER FLOORS Page 158

6312 SOLID TIMBER FLOORS 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply, laying and finishing of: -Herman Pacific Timber Solid Timber Floors over plywood substrates, or direct on joists. (Stage 3 Foyer) 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 4337 for PLYWOOD FLOORING SUBSTRATE. Refer to 4121 for SELLEYS LIQUID APPLIED VAPOUR BARRIER. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: NZBC D1/AS1 Access routes AS 1859.4 Reconstituted wood-based panels - Hardboard AS/NZS 2269 Plywood - Structural - Specifications AS/NZS 4586 Slip resistance classification of new pedestrian surface materials BRANZ BU 330 Thin flooring materials - 2 Preparation and laying Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


1.3 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Herman Pacific Timber documents relating to work in this section are: Construction details Herman Pacific: 91 Main South Rd ,

Sockburn, Christchurch Copies of the above literature and technical fixings detail are available from: Web: www.hermpac.co.nz Telephone 03 341 2173 Kyle Deans Warranties 1.4 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Provide a material manufacturer/supplier warranty Performance 1.5 SLIP RESISTANCE FOR ACCESS ROUTES Slip resistance for flooring to comply with NZBC D1/AS1: 2.1 Level access routes and 3.1

Ramps. - when in place on a level access route, to have a mean coefficient of friction (µ) not less

than 0.4 when tested in accordance with AS/NZS 4586. - when in place on a sloping access route, to have a coefficient of friction (µ) not less

than 0.4 + 0.0125S (S = slope of surface expressed as a percentage). 1.6 CERTIFICATES Provide certificates and any other evidence that the completed flooring will comply with

the standard of performance specified. 1.7 CERTIFICATES, SLIP RESISTANCE Provide certificates and any other evidence at the time of selection/supply that the

completed flooring will comply with NZBC D1/VM1 and NZBC D1/AS1.


1.8 TESTING Sample and test the substrate to BRANZ BU 330 to ensure that moisture content is within

the limits specified. Provide a written record. Requirements 1.9 SAMPLES Submit on request samples of the timber flooring specified sufficient to show the grain

pattern and the colour variance. Obtain written acceptance of sample panel. Keep samples on site, undamaged, for matching with the work as it proceeds.

Sample Requests: email [email protected] Refer to SELECTIONS. 1.10 SAMPLE PANEL Submit on request one sample panel of the flooring specified. Obtain written acceptance

of sample panel. Keep sample panel on site, undamaged, for matching with the work as it proceeds. Sample panel may be installed as specified in intended location and may later form a part of the specified flooring. Refer to SELECTIONS for requirements.

1.11 QUALIFICATIONS Floor layers to be experienced competent workers, familiar with the materials and the

techniques specified. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 TIMBER SOLID T & G FLOORING End matched and kiln dried to a moisture content to match the proposed finished

installation environment. Refer to SELECTIONS for species and size. 2.2 TIMBER TRIM Skirting, edge strip, reducer strip and nosing as detailed and to match overlay flooring. Accessories 2.3 CONCRETE SEALER Selleys VBS two part epoxy vapour barrier. SEE SECTION 4121 for SELLEYS LIQUID

APPLIED VAPOUR BARRIER 2.4 PRIMER AND LEVELLING COMPOUND Ardex 82 two part primer and Vibro K15 levelling compound with Ardon 25. 2.5 ADHESIVE, DIRECT STICK Selleys direct stick adhesive. Finishes 2.6 POLYURETHANE Uroxsys MCUV non-yellowing moisture cured polyurethane. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 STORAGE AND HANDLING Accept packs of timber and accessories undamaged and dry. Store on level, dry

surfaces in non-traffic, non-work areas that are enclosed and dry. Avoid damage to timber.

3.2 CHECK TIMBER Check that the timber supplied is as specified, is not damaged and that there is sufficient

to complete the work. Check the moisture content of the timber to ensure it is at the


required level for the installation environment. Laying the flooring is accepting the product is fit for purpose.

3.3 SUBFLOOR PREPARATION Dimond grind floor area to be covered, to remove surface layer, high spots and

construction debris to ensure the best possible key to the slab. Inspect the substrate to ensure it provides a suitable finish. Do not start laying if the substrate will not allow work of the required standard.

3.4 STARTING WORK Start installation only when the building is fully enclosed, when wet trades have finished

and when heating or air conditioning systems are operating. Starting work means the floor layer accepts the substrate as allowing work of the required standard.

3.5 LAYOUT Before beginning the installation, confirm the proposed layout of the timber, grain

direction, the colour range and any other visual considerations of the finished work. Allow for specified expansion requirements if any relating to the specified product.

3.6 SURFACE TOLERANCES, DIRECT STICK Substrate to have no deviations greater than 3mm over a 3 metre straightedge in any

given direction and no abrupt variations greater than 1mm over 250mm. 3.7 SURFACE TOLERANCES, FLOATING Substrate to have no deviations greater than 5mm over a 3 metre straightedge in any

given direction and no abrupt variations greater than 2mm over 250mm. 3.8 MOISTURE CONTENT, TIMBER SUBSTRATE Check for moisture content by hygrometer to BRANZ BU 330. Do not commence

installation until readings for the whole area show a moisture content of: 8 - 12% for air conditioned buildings 10 - 14% for intermittently heated buildings 12 - 16% for unheated buildings 3.9 MOISTURE CONTENT, CONCRETE SUBSTRATE Check for moisture content by hygrometer to BRANZ BU 330. Do not commence

installation until the hygrometer readings show 75% or less. Refer to allowable surface tolerances.

Application - Timber Solid T & G over existing plywood subfloor 3.10 SUBFLOOR PREPARATION Punch down existing nails. Sand floor to remove high spots and any other debris.

Thoroughly screw / nail existing loose or squeaky boards. If necessary inject Selleys Direct Stick into any joints. Fill any low spots with K15 levelling compound to manufacturer's specifications.

3.11 INSTALL SOLID TONGUE AND GROOVE FLOOR Ensure the joists are clean, dry and level. Check joist with a straight edge to maximum of

5mm in 3 metres. Sand or plane the joist flat if needed. Check moisture content of flooring prior to installation. Install Timber flooring over joists using double fixing system of Selleys Direct Stick adhesive and secret nailing with 60mm staples using a pneumatic flooring stapler / hit up gun. Apply the adhesive directly to the joists. Stagger all end joints. Boards to span more than 2 joists. Leave expansion gap at all fixed objects, walls and flooring transitions / junctions.

Finishing 3.12 SURFACE FINISHING, UNFINISHED FLOORS Allow the adhesive to cure fully and then finish the timber surface with five fine sandings.


3.13 POLYURETHANE COATING, UNFINISHED FLOORS Apply two coats of Uroxsys MCUV gloss non yellowing moisture cured polyurethane and

2 coats of Uroxsys MCUV low sheen non yellowing moisture polyurethane to the manufacturer's spread rates.

Completion 3.14 PROTECT FINISHED SURFACE Ensure that the completed surface is not used for traffic for 48 hours then allow only light,

clean traffic for 7 days until curing is complete. Continue to protect the surface with corrugated cardboard until completion of the contract works.

3.15 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.16 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.17 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 4. SELECTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise. Requirements 4.1 SAMPLE Flooring: 125 x 21mm RIMU Finish: Polyurethane Materials 4.2 CONCRETE SEALER Manufacturer: Selleys Type: VBS two part epoxy vapour barrier. 4.3 PRIMER AND LEVELLING COMPOUND Primer: Ardex 82 two part primer Levelling compound: Vibro K15 levelling compound with Ardon 25. 4.4 PLYWOOD UNDERLAY Brand: Structural Plywood Grade: MBH Marine Bonded hardwood Ply Thickness: 17.5mm 4.5 ADHESIVE Brand: Selleys Type: Direct Stick Timber Solid T & G flooring systems 4.6 SOLID T & G FLOORING OVER EXISTING PLYWOOD / TIMBER SUBFLOOR Brand: T & G Species: RIMU Pattern: Drop Tongue Size: 90 mm wide –To Match Existing Thickness: 21mm Finish: 4 Coat Polyurethane Finishes 4.7 POLYURETHANE Type: Uroxsys MCUV non-yellowing moisture cured polyurethane.


Sealer coats: 2 coats gloss Finish coats: 2 coats low sheen

© CIL Masterspec 2011 6411J JACOBSEN VINYL SURFACING Page 163

6411J JACOBSEN VINYL SURFACING 1. GENERAL This section relates to the supply and installation of Jacobsen: - GRANITE PVC sheet complete with coved edgings. Documents 1.1 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO Documents referred to in this section are: NZS/AS 1884 Floor coverings - Resilient sheet and tiles - Laying and maintenance

practices AS/NZS 4586 Slip resistance classification of pedestrian surface materials BS 2050 Electrical resistance of conducting and antistatic products made from

flexible polymeric material BRANZ BU 330 Thin flooring materials - 2 Preparation and laying Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


1.2 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and Jacobsen Creative Surfaces Ltd documents relating to work in this

section are: Copies of the above literature are available from Jacobsen Creative Surfaces Web: www.jacobsens.co.nz Telephone: 0-9-574 0640 Auckland 0-4-495 4300 Wellington 0-3-366 4153 Christchurch Requirements 1.3 NO SUBSTITUTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to any specified system, or associated components and

products. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS Layers to be experienced competent workers, familiar with the materials and the

techniques specified. 1.5 SAMPLES Submit on request samples of sheet, tile and accessories offered sufficient to show the

pattern and the range of colour finish. Warranties 1.6 WARRANTY Warrant this work under normal environmental and use conditions against failure. 5 years: Materials 1 year: Execution Provide the warranty in the standard form in the general section 1237WA WARRANTY

AGREEMENT. Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for additional requirements. 2. PRODUCTS Materials


2.1 VINYL SHEET Tarkett, with factory applied PUR (polyurethane) to ensure a low maintenance system

requiring no sealers or polish. 2.2 COVINGS Form commercial coving using pencil cove method, with butterfly mitres to external and

internal corners. Form domestic coving using either pencil cove or fillet cove method. 2.3 BRASS BARS Jacobsen's 40mm wide solid brass bar of varying profiles, to cover height transitions of

between 4mm and 18mm. 2.4 COVE CAPPING Jacobsen PVC top cap to top of coved vinyl. Accessories 2.5 ADHESIVE UZIN KE2000S acrylic floor and wall adhesive. 2.6 PRIMER AND SEALER To the adhesive manufacturer's requirements for the particular substrate. 2.7 FLOOR LEVELLING COMPOUND Davco Prolevel 133 2.8 THERMOWELDING Manufacturer supplied colour matched weld rod using the Tarkett weld nozzle. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 STORAGE Accept rolls of sheet, packages of tiles and accessories undamaged and dry. Store rolls

upright with other material on level surfaces in non-traffic, non-work areas that are enclosed, clean and dry.

3.2 HANDLING Avoid distortion, stretching, marking and damage to edges while shifting unrolling and

handling sheet, tiles and accessories. Do not use damaged material. 3.3 PREPARATION Check that each colour supplied is from the same batch. Follow the vinyl manufacturer's

requirements for preparatory conditioning of rolls and working temperatures and conditions before, during and after laying the selected vinyl. Protect work from solar heat gain and switch off under-floor heating during and for 48 hours either side of the work period.

3.4 DO NOT START Do not start work before the building is enclosed, wet work is complete, doors are hung

and lockable, finishes and trim complete and good lighting is available. 3.5 INSPECT Inspect the substrate to ensure it is a suitable finish 3.6 PROTECTION Protect adjoining work surfaces and finishes during the vinyl installation. 3.7 LAYING GENERALLY Carry out the whole of this work to NZS/AS 1884, BRANZ BU 330 and the flooring

manufacturer's requirements.


3.8 TECHNIQUE Before beginning the installation confirm the proposed layout of material, location of

seams and other visual considerations of the finished work. Application - substrate preparation 3.9 PREPARING NEW CONCRETE Clear substrate of debris, clean off surface contamination and carry out surface repairs

using Davco Lanko levelling compound. Carefully feather out at perimeters of repaired areas. Grind level, then vacuum to remove dust. Check for moisture content by hygrometer to BRANZ BU 330 and do not commence laying vinyl until readings for the whole area show 75% relative humidity or less.

Application - laying floors 3.10 APPLICATION OF ADHESIVE Apply UZIN KE2000S at the required spread rate, without leaving trowel marks after

setting. Follow requirements for open time, taking note of the substrate porosity, ambient temperature and relative humidity. Remove excess adhesive as the work proceeds using required techniques.

3.11 LAYING FLOOR SHEET Roll out, cut, leave to condition and install sheet vinyl to Tarkett's recommended

installation procedure, ensuring there are no air bubbles or twisting, the seams are kept clear of adhesive and immediately the sheet is adhered it is rolled with a 68 kg roller.

3.12 THERMOWELDING Machine groove and thermoweld seams in designated areas, using the Tarkett weld

nozzle, heating the sheet and weld rod to a sufficient temperature to melt and fuse them together in a single mass. Trim the weld to leave a smooth, flush surface with the sheet.

3.13 COVING VINYL Pencil cove flooring to the specified height and finish off as detailed. 3.14 COMPLETE MITRES Perform butterfly method to internal and external mitres, allowing to thermoweld mitres. Application - general 3.15 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES Scribe fit, adhere or otherwise fix true to line and face to the sheet manufacturer's

requirements for each particular location. Completion 3.16 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.17 CLEAN COMMERCIAL VINYL FLOORING Obtain a copy of the Tarkett cleaning instructions and carry out initial clean to those

instructions. 3.18 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 3.19 PROTECT Protect completed work from damage for the period between completion of laying and

completion of the contract works, or until acceptance/sign-off by ~. 3.20 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures.


4. SELECTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise. 4.1 VINYL SHEET Product: TARKRTT GRANITE Colour/number: TBA Thickness: 2mm Seam welding: Colour match 4.2 COVINGS Height: 150mm Type: Pencil Cove 4.3 JACOBSEN ADHESIVE Adhesive: UZIN KE2000S , acrylic floor and wall adhesive. 4.4 VINYL EDGINGS Type: Black 2.0mm bevel edge strip. 4.5 COVE CAPPING Type: Jacobsen PVC top cap. 4.6 FLOOR LEVELLING COMPOUND Type: DAVCO LANKO 133

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 6700R PAINTING GENERAL Page 167

6700R PAINTING GENERAL 1. GENERAL This section relates to the general matters related to Nyalic manufacturer specifications

and Resene painting work. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 6721 PAINTING INTERIOR Refer to 6711 PAINTING EXTERIOR RESENE AND NYALIC 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS Refer to the general section 1232 INTERPRETATION & DEFINITIONS for abbreviations

and definitions used throughout the specification. The following abbreviations apply specifically to this section: MPNZA Master Painters New Zealand Association Inc. Documents 1.3 DOCUMENTS Refer to the general section 1233 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS. The following

documents are specifically referred to in this section: Health and Safety in Employment Act 1992 MPNZA Specification manual 1.4 MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS Manufacturer's and supplier's documents related to this section are: Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual (hard copy or at www.resene.co.nz) Resene Putting your safety first Copies of the above literature are available from Resene Telephone: 0800 RESENE (0800 737 363) NYALIC NEW ZEALAND LTD P O Box 6138 Dunedin, New Zealand Freephone 0800 NYALIC Fax (03) 471 0424 Cellular 0274 351 069 Email. [email protected] Warranties 1.5 WARRANTY - MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER Warrant this work under normal conditions of use against failure referring to the Resene

Promise of Quality in the Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual. Warrant NYALIC coating for 10 years Requirements This painting specification is written based on information available at the time of writing. 1.6 NO SUBSTITUTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to any specified coating system, or associated

components and products. Do not combine paints from different manufacturers in a paint system.


If in the applicator's own expertise and judgement an amendment to this specification is

required, or where a substrate preparation, or required painting system is not covered in this specification, this shall be brought to the attention of the contract administrator and any amendment agreed before work proceeds any further.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS Painters to be experienced competent workers, familiar with the materials and the

techniques specified and with the coating systems and be members of the Master Painters New Zealand Association Inc.

The applicator is to have the necessary skill, experience and equipment to undertake the

work. The applicator remains responsible for ensuring proper completion of the work. Painters to be selected from the Resene Eco.Decorator programme. The Resene

Eco.Decorator programme is designed to recognise a nationwide network of environmentally responsible, quality focussed painting contractors.

Refer to www.resene.co.nz/ecodecorator.htm for a list of Eco.Decorators in your area. 1.8 CONTROL SAMPLES Prepare samples of the finished work, including the specified preparation. Refer to

SELECTIONS for location and type. Obtain approval in writing of the appearance before proceeding. Use the Resene Architectural Sample Box as a basis of standard where appropriate.

1.9 COLOUR SAMPLES Control reference: Check colours to Resene colour samples prior to application and keep

the Resene colour samples on site as a control reference. Colour matches are not permitted as they will differ in appearance, durability and performance to the original selected colour over the life of the coating. Samples of Resene colours may be ordered online from https://secure.clearfield.com/resene/SelectChart.asp?productType=3 or by calling 0800 RESENE (737 363). Use the Resene Architectural Sample Box as a basis of standard where appropriate.

1.10 PRIOR TO WORK COMMENCING Before any work commences painters should verify, with Architects or specifying

authority, that their paint matches a previously supplied standard card or panel. Differently coloured paints will vary in price, opacity and durability. Resene normally only specify two coats of colour but with certain colours, such as yellows and oranges, three coats may be needed. Refer to SELECTIONS for location and type.

1.11 HEALTH AND SAFETY Refer to and comply with the requirements of the Health and Safety in Employment Act

1992 including the obligation to: - Eliminate hazards and if hazards cannot be eliminated or isolated, then minimise the

hazards in this work by using the proper equipment and techniques as required by the MPNZA Painters hazard handbook and Resene Putting your safety first handbook.

- Supply protective clothing and equipment. - Inform the contractor as well as the employees and others on site of those hazards and

put in place procedures for dealing with emergencies. 1.12 SAFETY DATA SHEETS Obtain from Nyalic and Resene (phone 0800 RESENE, or www.resene.co.nz) the safety

data sheet for each product used and comply with the required safety procedures. Keep sheets on site.

Performance 1.13 RESENE INSPECTION Permit representatives of Nyalic and Resene to inspect the work in progress and to take

samples of their products from site if requested. Nyalic and Resene will take care when


inspecting the work, but does not accept any responsibility for the proper completion of the work before or after such inspection.

1.14 INSPECTION OF THE WORK Inspection of the whole of the work at each of the stages set out in SELECTIONS may be

made. Agree on a programme that will facilitate such inspection, including notification when each part and stage of the work is ready for inspection.

2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 MATERIALS GENERALLY Do not combine paints from different manufacturer's in a paint system. Use only Resene products (which are guaranteed for consistency and performance under

ISO 9001 and APAS) prepared, mixed and applied as directed in the Resene One-Line Specifications and Product Data Manual. This specification has been written using where practical and available both low/no VOC and Environmental Choice approved products.

2.2 EXPOSED DARK COLOURS Darker colours in areas of high sun exposure place significant stress on the coating and

substrate. Resene 'CoolColour' technology reduces heat absorption of a wide range of colours. Contact your local Resene Representative or visit www.resene.co.nz for more information or visit www.resene.co.nz/coolcolour. View a list of Resene colours that can be made using Resene CoolColour technology at www.resene.co.nz/colourlibrary.

2.3 THINNERS/ADDITIVES Use only if and when expressly directed by Resene for their particular product in a

particular application. Always wear gloves when handling any solvents including turpentine as harmful chemicals may be absorbed into the body through the skin.

Accessories 2.4 ACCESSORIES Contact your local Resene ColorShop for a full range of accessories and usage advice. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 EXECUTION To conform to required trade practice, which shall be deemed to include those methods,

practices and techniques contained in the Master Painters New Zealand Association Inc. Specification manual.

3.2 TREATED SURFACES Where surfaces have been treated with preservatives or fire retardants, check with the

treatment manufacturer that coating materials are compatible with the treatment and do not inhibit its performance. If they are not compatible, obtain instructions before proceeding.

3.3 ANCILLARY SURFACES The descriptions of areas in schedules and elsewhere are of necessity simplified. Coat

ancillary exposed surfaces to match similar or adjacent materials or areas, except where a fair-faced natural finish is required or items are completely prefinished. In cases of doubt obtain written instructions before proceeding.

3.4 HARDWARE AND ELECTRICAL FITTINGS Do not paint electrical fittings, hinges or hardware that cannot be removed. Before

commencing work carefully remove hardware, fixtures and fittings, electrical fittings, set aside where they cannot be damaged or misplaced and replace on completion.


3.5 PROTECTION Supply, lay and fix dropsheets, coverings and masking necessary to protect adjoining,

fixtures, fittings and spaces from paint drops, spots, spray and damage. Application - preparatory work 3.6 SURFACE PREPARATION Refer to the Nyalic manufacturer specifications and Resene One-Line specifications and

product data manual for surface preparation sheets (or obtain them by phoning 0800 RESENE, or at www.resene.co.nz) listed in the materials systems schedule clauses. Carry out the preparatory work required by them for each of the substrates.

3.7 SHARP EDGES, CRACKS AND HOLES Remove and/or repair sharp edges, cracks and holes if present, as outlined in the

preamble of the Nyalic and Resene One-Line specifications and product data manual. Elastomeric sealants, if used, should not be painted. The paint film will not match the

flexibility of the sealant and may severely limit its effectiveness. 3.8 REMEDIAL WORK If any substrate or surface, that even with the preparation work called for in this section,

cannot be brought up to a standard that will allow painting or clear finishing of the required standard then do not proceed until remedial work is carried out.

3.9 GAP FILLING Make good cracks, holes, indented and damaged surfaces. Use suitable gap fillers to

match the surface being prepared. Any special priming requirements of the fillers must be satisfied. Allow to dry or set before sanding back level with the surface. Prime or seal timber before using putty.

Exterior and wet areas: Use only Portland cement base or water-insoluble organic base

gap fillers. 3.10 OFF-SITE WORK Carry out this work under cover in a suitable environment with suitable lighting. Store

items, both before and after coating, in a clean, dry area protected from the weather and mechanical damage, properly stacked and spaced to allow air circulation and to prevent sticking.

3.11 PRIMING JOINERY Pre-treat any cut surfaces of preservative treated timber before priming. Ensure L.O.S.P.

treated joinery has dried sufficiently to lose solvent odour. Pre-treat bare timber with Resene TimberLock (see Data Sheet D48) to improve the durability of subsequent coats.

Liberally coat end grain, allow to soak in and then recoat. 3.12 CONCEALED METAL SURFACES Apply primer to suit the coating system to surfaces which will be concealed when

incorporated into the building. Application - generally 3.13 PAINTING GENERALLY Comply with the Nyalic manufacturer specifications and Resene One-Line specifications

and product data manual data sheets and the additional requirements of this work section.

Ensure large wall areas that require more than one container of paint per coat, have

enough paint boxed (mixed) together to complete the final coat. This will not apply if a single factory batch of paint, rather than shop tinted paint, is applied.


3.14 MIXING Although generally supplied ready-mixed, thoroughly mix paints. Lift any settled pigment

and ensure the paint is homogenous. 3.15 ENVIRONMENT Defer painting of exterior surfaces until weather conditions are favourable - warm dry

days without frost or heavy dews. Avoid painting in direct sunlight any surfaces that absorb heat excessively. As far as possible apply paint in the temperature range 15°C to 25°C. If temperatures fall outside the range of 10°C and 35°C do not paint unless paints with the necessary temperature tolerance have been specified. Do not apply solvent borne paint if moisture is present on the surface.

3.16 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS Painting work to generally follow the following sequences: - Complete surface preparation before commencing painting. - Apply primers, sealers, stains, undercoats, paints and clear coatings in the sequences

laid down by Resene. - Allow the full drying time between coats laid down by Resene. - Do not expose primers, undercoats and intermediate coats beyond Resene's

recommendations before applying the next coat. - Finish broad areas before painting trim. - Ensure batch numbers of tins are matched for whole areas. - Internally, paint ceilings before walls and walls before joinery, trim and other items. 3.17 APPLICATION Select brush, roller, or pad and apply coatings to the requirements of Resene to obtain a

smooth, even coating of the specified thickness, uniform gloss and colour. 3.18 LIGHTLY SAND Lightly sand primers, sealers, undercoats and intermediate coats to remove dust pick-up,

protruding fibres and coarse particles. Complete by removing dust immediately before applying the next coat.

3.19 DEFECTIVE WORK Correct defective work immediately and recoat as required, following precisely the

Resene system being applied. 3.20 EACH COAT Each coat of paint and the completed paint system to have the following qualities and

properties: - Uniform finish, colour, texture, sheen and hiding power and the proper number of coats

applied. - No blemishes such as runs, sags, crinkling, fat edges, entrained paint skins, hairs, dust,

bare or starved patches, cracks, brush marks, ladder marks and blistering. - Proper covering of corners, crannies, thin edges, cracks, end grain and other difficult

places of application. Completion 3.21 CLEAN Clean adjoining surfaces, glass and fittings of any paint contamination. Clean off glass

indicators at the completion of the building works. Clean glass inside and out to a shining finish. Use the Resene Washwise on site 'paint equipment clean-up water' reclamation system to minimise the environmental impact of cleaning paint application tools.

3.22 LEAVE Leave the whole of this work uniform in gloss and colour, of correct thickness, free from

painting defects, clean and unmarked and to the standard required by following procedures.


3.23 REMOVE Remove dropsheets, coverings and masking to leave surrounding surfaces and areas

clean, tidy and undamaged. Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site.

3.24 REPLACE Replace hardware without damage to it or the adjoining surface and leave hardware

properly fitted and in working order. 3.25 DISPOSAL OF PAINTS AND THINNERS Note: The use and disposal of paint and thinners represents a significant environmental

hazard. Ensure all paint and thinners are disposed of in the following manner: - When requested hand over part used paint containers to client for maintenance touch

ups. - Recycle leftover paint at a Resene ColorShop as part of the Resene "Paintwise

programme". Contact your local Resene ColorShop for details or view information online at www.resene.co.nz/paintwise.htm.

- Donate left over paint to local community groups. - Solvent based paints, paint thinners, turpentine, mineral spirits and solvents require

special disposal procedures. Do not pour down sewer or storm water drains, sinks or into the ground. If they cannot be recycled they must be disposed of in a refuse dump licensed to take toxic waste.

3.26 MAINTENANCE Good maintenance of coating systems involves a routine of regular cleaning as well as

regular inspections. Regular inspections of the coating systems are recommended to identify breakdown, accidental damage to or undesirable deterioration of the paint.

Refer the Resene Caring for your paint finish brochure and the Resene website,

www.resene.co.nz/comn/services/maintenance.htm. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 SELECTIONS Refer to 6711 PAINTING EXTERIOR and 6721 PAINTING INTERIOR for selections.

© CIL Masterspec 2011 6711R PAINTING EXTERIOR –RESENE AND NYALIC Page 173

6711R PAINTING EXTERIOR –RESENE AND NYALIC 1. GENERAL This section relates to the surface preparation, painting and clear finishing of exterior

substrates using Resene architectural and decorative coating systems. ALSO This section relates to the surface preparation and clear finishing of exterior STAINLESS

STEEL using NYALIC clear polymer resin coating systems. Refer to NYALIC specifications. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 6700 PAINTING GENERAL for general matters related to painting work. Refer to 6721 PAINTING INTERIOR for interior paint systems. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 PAINT TYPES GENERALLY/ THINNERS AND ADDITIVES Refer to 6700 PAINTING GENERAL for product clauses. Refer to NYALIC specifications. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 EXECUTION Refer to 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL for execution clauses. Refer to NYALIC Manufacturer specifications. Contact; NYALIC NEW ZEALAND LTD P O Box 6138 Dunedin, New Zealand Freephone 0800 NYALIC Fax (03) 471 0424 Cellular 0274 351 069 Email. [email protected] 4. SELECTIONS Substitutions are not permitted to the following, unless stated otherwise. 4.1 HARDWARE / ELECTRICAL FITTINGS Remove all door hardware AND Electrical cover plates and fittings that can be removed

prior to painting and reinstate once painting completed Nyalic And Resene exterior paint systems 4.2 EXTERIOR CEMENTITIOUS SURFACES Description: Exterior cementitious surfaces, waterborne satin System: Resene One-Line Spec. No. 1e 1.3 (EC) Surface prep: D83 1st coat: Self priming - Resene Lumbersider D34, waterborne satin 2nd coat: Resene Lumbersider D34, waterborne satin

© CIL Masterspec 2011 6711R PAINTING EXTERIOR –RESENE AND NYALIC Page 174

3rd coat: Resene Lumbersider D34, waterborne satin 4.3 EXTERIOR STEEL AND ZINC PRIMED STEEL Description: Exterior galvanised steel and Zincilite Primed Steel Surface prep: D801 1st coat: Resene Vinyl Etch Primer RA31 2nd coat: Resene Armourcote 510 RA40, High Solids Epoxy 125 micron Spray

applied. 3rd / 4th coat: Resene Imperite IF 503 Acrylic Epxy 75 micron Spray applied. 4.4 EXTERIOR STAINLESS STEEL NYALIC® 4.5 Single pack, "Nylonic" polymer resin coating. Prepare surfaces and apply single coat NYALIC to manufacturers specification to provide

a 10 year Warranty Description: Exterior Stainless Steel work Surface prep: As per NYALIC specification 1st coat: NYALIC self-priming, direct-to metal one coat system 4.6 CONCRETE WATERPROOFING MEMBRANES TO STONE CHIP PRECAST Description: Water repellent membranes, waterborne clear Surface prep: Resene Spec Sheet D83 1st coat: Resene Aquapel D65, waterborne water repellent 2nd coat: Resene Aquapel D65, waterborne water repellent

© CIL Masterspec 2011 6721R PAINTING INTERIOR Page 175

6721R PAINTING INTERIOR 1. GENERAL This section relates to the surface preparation, painting and clear finishing of new and

existing interior substrates using Resene architectural and decorative coating systems. 1.1 RELATED WORK Refer to 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL for general matters related to painting

work. Refer to 6711R RESENE PAINTING EXTERIOR for exterior paint systems. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 PAINT TYPES GENERALLY/ THINNERS AND ADDITIVES Refer to 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL for product clauses. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 EXECUTION Refer to 6700R RESENE PAINTING GENERAL for execution clauses. 3.2 HARDWARE / ELECTRICAL FITTINGS Remove all door hardware AND Electrical cover plates and fittings that can be removed

prior to painting and reinstate once painting completed Resene interior paint systems 3.3 INTERIOR STONE SURFACES Description: Water repellent membranes, waterborne clear Surface prep: Resene Spec Sheet D83 1st coat: Resene Aquapel D65, waterborne water repellent 2nd coat: Resene Aquapel D65, waterborne water repellent 3.4 INTERIOR TIMBER JOINERY AND TRIM Description: Interior timber, waterborne low sheen enamel System: Resene One-Line Spec. No. 2i 1.4 SC (EC) Surface prep: D82; and Resene TimberLock D48NEC, solventborne

preserver/conditioner 1st coat: For normal recommended system - Resene Quick Dry D45,

waterborne primer/undercoat; or For hardboard only - Resene Sureseal D42NEC, solventborne sealer; or For painting over varnish - Resene Waterborne Smooth Surface

Sealer D47a, waterborne sealer Self priming - Resene SpaceCote Low Sheen D311, waterborne low

sheen enamel 2nd coat: Resene SpaceCote Low Sheen D311, waterborne low sheen enamel 3rd coat: Resene SpaceCote Low Sheen D311, waterborne low sheen enamel 3.5 INTERIOR FIBROUS PLASTER Description: Interior Solid Plaster/fibrous plaster, waterborne low sheen System: Resene One-Line Spec. No. 15i 1.4 SC Level 5 (EC) Surface prep: D84; D85; D87; Resene Broadwall Surface Prep & Seal D807,

waterborne prep 1st coat (if reqd): For wet area, stained, porous or powdery areas - Resene Sureseal

D42NEC, solventborne sealer 2nd coat: Resene SpaceCote Low Sheen D311, waterborne low sheen enamel

© CIL Masterspec 2011 6721R PAINTING INTERIOR Page 176

3rd coat: Resene SpaceCote Low Sheen D311, waterborne low sheen enamel For Level 5 Resene Broadwall 3 in 1 system - Resene One-Line Spec. No. 15i 1.41 SC

Level 5 (EC) Replace Resene Broadwall Surface Prep & Seal with Resene Broadwall 3 in 1 in the

clause above Description: Interior fibrous plaster, waterborne flat- ceiling System: Resene One-Line Spec. No. 15i 1.5 Level 5 Ceiling (EC) Surface prep: D84; D85; D87; Resene Broadwall Surface Prep & Seal D807,

waterborne prep 1st coat (if reqd): For wet area, stained, porous or powdery areas - Resene Sureseal

D42NEC, solventborne sealer 2nd coat: Resene Ceiling Paint D305, waterborne flat 3rd coat: Resene Ceiling Paint D305, waterborne flat For Level 5 Resene Broadwall 3 in 1 system - Resene One-Line Spec. No. 15i 1.51

Level 5 Ceiling (EC) Replace Resene Broadwall Surface Prep & Seal with Resene Broadwall 3 in 1 in the

clause above 3.6 INTERIOR STEEL AND ZINC PRIMED STEEL Description: Exterior galvanised steel and Zincilite Primed Steel Surface prep: D801 1st coat: Resene Vinyl Etch Primer RA31 2nd coat: Resene Armourcote 510 RA40, High Solids Epoxy 125 micron Spray

applied. 3rd / 4th coat: Resene Imperite IF 503 Acrylic Epxy 75 micron Spray applied. 3.7 INTERIOR TIMBER FLOORS CLEAR FINISHES SEE SECTION 6312 FOR POLYURETHANE FINISH TO TIMBER FLOOR

© CIL Masterspec 2011 APR 7310 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM FPE Page 177

7310 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM FPE 1. SEE FPE- FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEERS FIRE SPRINKLER SPECIFICATION

© CIL Masterspec 2011 7352 AUTOMATIC FIRE AND SMOKE ALARM SYSTEM FPE Page 178

7352 AUTOMATIC FIRE AND SMOKE ALARM SYSTEM FPE 1. SEE FPE- FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEERS FIRE AND SMOKE ALARM

SPECIFICATION

© CIL Masterspec 2011 7411 STASINLESS STEEL RAINWATER HEADS AND DOWN PIPES Page 179

7411 STASINLESS STEEL RAINWATER HEADS AND DOWN PIPES

1. GENERAL This section relates to the stainless steel rainwater heads and down pipes. Related work 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS Refer to 4421N for NURALITE ROOFING. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO Documents referred to in this section are: NZBC E1/AS1 Surface water MRM NZ Metal roof and wall cladding - Code of practice Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.

However this specification takes precedence in the event of it being at variance with the cited document.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMS The following abbreviations are used throughout this part of the specification: BMT Base metal thickness MRM New Zealand Metal Roofing Manufacturers Inc Spouting Roof gutter bracketed off the roof edge or fascia. Gutter Internal gutter or gutter formed as integral part of the roof fabric. Requirements 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS Work to be carried out by tradesmen experienced, competent and familiar with the

materials and techniques specified. Warranties 1.5 WARRANTY Warrant this work under normal environmental and use conditions against: 3 years: For weatherproofing by substandard workmanship: From: Commence the warranty from the date of completion of installation Form: Installers standard warranty form Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for details of when completed warranty

must be submitted. 1.6 WARRANTY - MATERIAL Warrant this work under normal environmental and use conditions: 10 Years For failure of coating adhesion 10 Years For weatherproofing by material penetration Form: Manufacturer's standard warranty form From: Commence the warranty from the date of completion of installation Refer to the general section 1237 WARRANTIES for details of when completed warranty

must be submitted. Performance


1.7 TEST Test the completed rainwater disposal system with water to ensure spoutings are laid to

correct falls, that both spouting and downpipes are unobstructed and that no ponding occurs in spoutings.

2. PRODUCTS Materials –Stainless Steel 316 Metal 2.1 DOWNPIPES Complete with stand-off brackets, screw fixed. Refer to SELECTIONS for type. Components 2.2 FASTENERS GENERALLY Minimum Class 4 durability and not less than the material being fixed. 2.3 RIVETS Sainless Steel minimum diameter 4mm. 2.4 SEALANT MS Polymer sealant. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 HANDLE AND STORE Handle and store downpipes, spouting and accessories to avoid damage. Store on site

under cover, on a clean level area, stacked to eliminate movement and away from work in progress. Avoid exposure to sunlight if strippable film is still on the product.

3.2 SUBSTRATE Check that fascias, barges or cladding are level and true to line and face and will allow

work of the required standard without distortion to the product alignment. Do not proceed until they are up to standard.

3.3 THERMAL MOVEMENT Make adequate provision in the fixing and jointing of the spouting for thermal movement

in the length of the spouting. Provide an expansion joint in spouting over 18 metres in length for steel gutter.

3.4 CORROSION Separate metals subject to electrolytic action from each other and from treated timber,

concrete and other lime substances by space, painting of surfaces, taping, or separator strips. Do not allow copper downpipes to discharge onto lower galvanized or zinc aluminium coated steel roofs.

Application - metal 3.5 INSTALLATION GENERALLY Install to MRM NZ Metal roof and wall cladding - Code of practice recommendations

where not otherwise specified. 3.6 INSTALL METAL DOWNPIPES Form downpipes complete with angle bends as needed with joints lapped and sealed.

Screw fix with pipe clips to rigidly stand off the wall plumb and discharging into stormwater gully or inlet pipe. All installation to MRM NZ Metal roof and wall cladding - Code of practice recommendations.


3.7 INSTALL DOWNPIPE SPREADERS Install downpipe spreaders where required to MRM NZ Metal roof and wall cladding -

Code of practice, clause 8.5.1 Downpipe spreaders. Provide spreaders to downpipes that discharge on to a lower roof. Ensure spreaders do not discharge directly over fasteners or laps. Spreaders to have holes equalling twice the diameter of the downpipe.

3.8 INSTALL RAINWATER HEADS Install rainwater heads where required to MRM NZ Metal roof and wall cladding - Code of

practice, clause 8.6.1 Rainwater heads. 3.9 INSTALL OUTLETS AND OVERFLOWS Install outlets and overflows where required to MRM NZ Metal roof and wall cladding -

Code of practice, clause 8.6.2 Outlets and overflows. 3.10 INSTALL SUMP PROTECTION Install leaf guards of the same area as the sump. Set the leaf guard above the calculated

level of flow; not directly in the outlet. Completion 3.11 REPLACE Replace damaged or marked elements. 3.12 LEAVE Leave the whole of this work discharging completely and freely into the stormwater

system and free of all debris. Leave work to the standard required by following procedures.

3.13 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 DOWNPIPES Brand: Stainless Steel Profile/size: 100mm DIA Material: 316 Stainless Steel Thickness: 2.0mm Finish: 2DR 4.2 DOWNPIPE BRACKETS Type: DB6 Material: 316 Stainless Steel 4.3 RAINWATER HEADS Brand/type: See Sheet A64.06 Stainless Steel Material: 316 Stainless Steel Thickness: 2mm Finish/colour: No.4

© CIL Masterspec 2011 7431 DRAINAGE - MSS Page 182

7431 DRAINAGE - MSS 1. SEE MSS DRAINAGE SERVICES SPECIFICATION

© CIL Masterspec 2011 7513 CENTRAL HEATING SYSTEMS - MSS Page 183

7513 CENTRAL HEATING SYSTEMS - MSS 1. SEE MSS MECHANICAL SERVICES SPECIFICATION

© CIL Masterspec 2011 7702 ELECTRICAL - MCL&ASSOC Page 184

7702 ELECTRICAL - MCL&ASSOC 1. SEE MACLEOD AND ASSOCIATES ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

© CIL Masterspec 2011 8222 ASPHALTIC PAVING Page 185

8222 ASPHALTIC PAVING 1. GENERAL This section relates to asphaltic paving laid over compacted granular basecourse and

including carpark marking. Related work 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS Refer to 8231 BASALT PAVING LANDSCAPING for landscaping and paving work. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO Documents referred to in this section are: TNZ M/01 Roading bitumens TNZ M/07 Roadmarking paints TNZ P/09 Construction of asphaltic concrete paving TNZ P/09P Construction of asphaltic concrete paving (Auckland) TNZ M/10 Asphaltic concrete TNZ M/10P Asphaltic concrete (Auckland) Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


Requirements 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS Asphaltic paving to be carried out using experienced, competent applicators, familiar with

the materials and techniques specified. 2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 PRIME COAT AQ 55/200 emulsion to TNZ specification M/01. 2.2 ASPHALTIC BINDER To TNZ specification M/01. 2.3 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE To TNZ specification M/10 (M/10P), wearing mix No. 10. 2.4 MARKING PAINT To TNZ specification M/07. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 PLANT Use only the correct and necessary plant to place the paving efficiently to ensure the

required standard of work is achieved. 3.2 INSPECTION Before starting work inspect the basecourse to ensure that it is compacted to specification

and will allow work of the required standard and that all kerbs, service outlets, gully traps and fittings are in place.


3.3 PROTECT Protect adjoining work and fittings at all stages. Repair any damage. 3.4 PROTECTION Protect the completed work from damage and from dropping other materials during the

remainder of the construction period. Do not use the completed work as a building platform or for material storage.

Application 3.5 ACCEPT AND PREPARE Prepare the surface to be paved to the requirements of TNZ specification P/09 (P/09P),

clause 2. 3.6 APPLY PRIME COAT Apply emulsion at a rate of 0.5 to 1.0 litre per square metre to suit surface conditions and

to form a seal over the basecourse. 3.7 SPREAD BINDING COAT Hand-spread a thin coat of the mix over the prime coat and roll it to eliminate damage to

the surface from plant. 3.8 LAY ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING Lay to the requirements of TNZ specification P/09 (P/09P) wearing mix No.10 to the

minimum compacted thickness. Where possible run joints with the fall and ensure that transverse and all joints are levelled to the generally smooth even surface required and to a flatness tolerance of 6mm maximum gradual deviation over a 5 metre straight-edge so that ponding does not occur. Carry out the TNZ specification P/09 (P/09P) specified actions if material temperature drops below 100°C in any particular situation. Compact only with the plant and the procedures laid down in TNZ specification P/09 (P/09P). Finish flush to edges and fittings with a tolerance of +3mm to -0mm.

Markings 3.9 SET-OUT Set out markings to a tolerance of ±25mm. 3.10 MARKING Ensure asphalt is cured before applying paint to the paint manufacturer's requirements

without runs, spills or drops on any other surface. 3.11 PROTECT Protect markings until completely dry and hard. Completion 3.12 CLEAN UP Clean up as the work proceeds. 3.13 LEAVE Leave the whole of this work in a sound, coherent, voidless and impermeable smooth

condition, free of any defects and to the standard required by following procedures. 3.14 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING Minimum compacted thickness: 25mm 4.2 MARKING PAINT Brand: TBA


Colour: TBA

© CIL Masterspec 2011 8231 BASALT PAVING LANDSCAPING Page 188

8231 BASALT PAVING LANDSCAPING 1. GENERAL This section relates to the bedding and laying of: - Timaru Bluestone Pavers - Timaru Bluestone Walls - Timaru Bluestone Steps - Timaru Bluestone Terrace Slab feature See Plan A10.41 for Scope of Bluestone paving, steps walls and features. See A94 Series drawings for Bluestone paving, steps and features details. Paving to be suitable for pedestrians and light vehicular traffic. 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS Refer to 3361 STONEWORK. Refer to 6221 BASALT FLOOR AND WALL TILING. Refer to concrete section/s for concrete work. Documents 1.2 DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO Documents referred to in this section are: AS/NZS 1428 Design for access and mobility - Means to assist the orientation of

people with vision impairment - Tactile ground surface indicators NZS 3104 Specification for concrete production NZS 3116 Concrete segmental and flagstone paving AS/NZS 4455.2 Masonry units, pavers, flags, and segmental retaining wall units -

Pavers and flags AS/NZS 4456 Masonry units, segmental pavers and flags - Methods of test Documents listed above and cited in the clauses that follow are part of this specification.


Requirements 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS Pavers to be experienced competent workers, familiar with the materials and the

techniques specified. 1.4 CONFIRM APPEARANCE Before commencing work confirm the layout and any elements affecting the visual

appearance of the work. Pavers should be mixed on site from several pallets to ensure blending and avoid colour contrasts. Ensure extra paving is required to be from the same batch number to avoid colour variation.

2. PRODUCTS Materials 2.1 STONE PAVERS Quarried natural stone pavers, to AS/NZS 4456 for transverse strength, and with a

minimum compressive strength of 170 MPa. 2.2 STONE FEATURES Quarried natural stone features, to AS/NZS 4456 for transverse strength, and with a

compressive strength of 170 MPa. Components 2.3 CONCRETE Prescribed mix to NZS 3104 (except where specified otherwise).


Haunching concrete: 17.5 MPa Infill concrete: 25 MPa. Components - bedding on concrete base 2.4 PRIMER Acrylic bonding agent. Apply to the underside of the pavers/flagstones to the

manufacturer's specifications. 2.5 MORTAR 3: 1 Sand and cement bedding coat with liquid polymer additive, to the paving

manufacturer's stated requirements. 2.6 GROUT Sand and cement with liquid polymer additive. Add colour oxide to pointing grout to

match the flagstone colour. Ensure the mortar is of a medium to stiff consistency. 2.7 MORTAR FOR STONE SETTS Mortar bedding for stone setts. Epoxy compound prepared and applied to the

manufacturer's specifications. Mix Grout to a suitable consistency to the manufacturer's specifications. Surface primer for epoxy mortar is not required. Accessories 2.8 PRECAST CONCRETE EDGE RESTRAINTS Precast concrete kerbing. 2.9 PVC EDGE RESTRAINTS Proprietary flexible PVC restraint system. 2.10 SEALER A clear, low viscosity urethane prepolymer liquid. 3. EXECUTION Conditions 3.1 STORAGE Take delivery of blocks and pavers in protected pallets, undamaged and dry. Store on

level hard standings, protect from damage and keep dry until laid. 3.2 DELIVERY OF SANDS Do not deliver to site any sands which cannot be immediately placed in final locations. 3.3 INSPECTION Before starting paving work inspect the area to ensure that kerbing, edge restraints,

drainage, cesspits, channels, basecourse and other services are in place to correct falls and to allow work of the required standard.

3.4 SURFACE TOLERANCES Final surface of paving: ±10mm of design level Surface level above drainage: 5mm minimum above drainage channels or gully entries

and continuously graded towards them Maximum deviation: 8mm in 3 metres without ponding Between adjacent blocks: < 2mm Application 3.5 FORM EDGE RESTRAINT Excavate for and set paver soldier course in concrete haunching to the levels shown.

Allow concrete to cure before making good the adjoining basecourse.


3.6 LAY PVC EDGE RESTRAINT Lay proprietary flexible PVC edge restraint to manufacturer's requirements. 3.7 LAY CONCRETE BED Refer to Concrete sections. Pavers/Flagstones - Concrete bed 3.8 LAY PAVERS/FLAGSTONES Lay pavers/flagstones on a wet mortar bed of nominal thickness 15mm to provide full

contact with the underside of the flagstone units. Ensure that cement is kept off the surface of the flagstones as it can cause staining. Remove surplus mortar as work progresses.

Prime the bonding face of flagstones with surface primer and place to the nominated laying pattern. Bed down pavers/flagstones and hit evenly over the whole surface with a rubber mallet to a level of approximately 2mm higher than the desired finish level.

3.9 COVER Cover slabs with hessian sheets and spray with water mist. Maintain moist for a

minimum of 12 hours. In areas subject to pedestrian construction traffic install and maintain barriers, boards or other protection, for the first 12 hours of curing.

3.10 GROUTING After a minimum of 12 hours curing grout the joints. Where necessary remove foreign

material from within the joints. Until joints are grouted protect the paver with a complete cover at all times.

Prepare grout mix. Dampen joints with a sponge and pour grout mix into joints ensuring full penetration for the thickness of the paving slab by lightly tamping down a trowel edge into the grouting mixture. Use a rubber squeegee to spread grout evenly into all joints until filled flush with the top of the paving unit.

Remove excess grout, allow initial set and lightly broom off remaining excess perpendicular to joints.

Wipe pavers/flagstones clean with a damp sponge. 3.11 LAYING STONE FEATURES See Sheets A94 Series for details of landscaping. Lay terrace tile edge feature sets on a bed of epoxy mortar of 10mm nominal thickness to

provide full contact with the underside of the setts. Ensure that mortar is kept off the surface. Remove surplus mortar as work progresses.

Place setts to the nominated laying pattern. Lay full units first, then closures to perimeter areas, and around drainage and other structures which are to be filled subsequently with part setts.

Form the sloped bluestone feature, first set out the pattern then lay out all the setts in

place prior to fixing, confirm that layout is acceptable with the Architect. Commence laying from the centre point and work outwards with the inner most setts cut to suit to achieve the desired layout.

Cut setts by breaking with an approved breaker to create a broken face matching the

manufactured faces of the setts. Form 10mm wide joints between the setts and fill with grout from the base to within 5mm

of the top of the setts. Make sure joints are even and form a continuous straight line between adjoining units to form an even pattern overall.

Align jointing of the paved surface to coincide with the construction joints in the concrete base.

Finishing 3.12 SEALER When inspections show no loss of jointing sand or settlement of pavers/flagstones, clean

paving, removing marks and stains and apply acrylic sealer to the surface to NZS 3116, clause 313.1 Surface coatings and the sealer manufacturer's requirements.


3.13 PROTECTION Protect the completed work from damage and from dropping other materials during the

remainder of the construction period. Do not use the completed work as a building platform or for material storage.

Special Features 3.14 SPECIAL FEATURES Allow for cutting around all features - bollards, light columns, handrails, posts, planters

etc. 3.15 RECESSED MANHOLE COVERS In fill manhole covers with the paving type and pattern of the adjoining pavement. 3.16 ANTI-SKATE INSERTS Supply and fit anti-skateboard devices at 1200mm centres as shown on the plans. Install

to the manufacturer's specifications, and to AS/NZS1428.4. 3.17 MAKE UP STRIPS Where paving will be laid against irregular structures, make the interface regular with the

construction of a concrete make-up strip. Construct the make-up strip prior to the preparation and laying of paver units. Build it

between 75mm and 150mm wide and a minimum of 150mm deep, laid with the surface flush with the proposed pavers. Form the vertical face which will receive the pavers straight and true, to ensure the pavers will abut closely.

Completion 3.18 REPLACE Replace damaged, cracked or marked elements. 3.19 LEAVE Leave work to the standard required by following procedures. 3.20 REMOVE Remove debris, unused materials and elements from the site. 4. SELECTIONS 4.1 NATURAL STONE PAVERS Brand: Timaru Bluestone Dimensions: 200mm x Varies x 40mm thick - See detail 2 Sheet A10.41 Colour: Timaru Bluestone Laying pattern: See detail 2 Sheet A10.41 Bed: Concrete Bond: Cement Mortar 4.2 SEALER Brand: Aquamix Type: Enrich N Seal 4.3 ANTI-SKATE INSERTS Location: Bluestone Walls See Sheet A10.41 Brand/Type: GRINDERMINDER

��

DWG No NAME REV

A00.01 DRAWING LEGEND. 0a

A00.02 FIRE PROTECTION ADDITIONAL NOTES 0a

A10.40 EXISTING SITE PLAN. 0a

A10.41 NEW SITE & LANDSCAPE PLAN. 0b

A21.40 FLOOR PLAN. 0a

A25.40 CEILING PLAN. 0a

A26.40 ROOF PLAN. 0a

A30.40 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS. 0b

DWG No NAME REV

A44.01 MAIN ENTRY PORTAL - PLANS & SECTIONS. 0a

A44.02 MAIN ENTRY PORTAL PRECAST. 0b

A44.03 STAGE 3 / 4 ENTRY LINK. 0a

A44.04 STAGE 3 / 4 AUDITORIUM LINK. 0a

A44.07 SECTION GRID E. 0a

A44.11 SECTION GRID 11 - TYPICAL SECTION. 0a

A44.12 SECTION GRID 11 + 2100 0a

DWG No NAME REV

A54.01 WINDOW & DOOR SCHEDULE. 0a

A54.02 DOOR TYPE 1 & 2 DETAILS. 0a

A54.03 DOOR DETAILS. 0a

A54.10 FLUSHGLAZE HEAD & SILL DETAILS. 0a

A54.11 FLUSHGLAZE JAMB DETAILS. 0a

A64.00 FLOOR DETAILS. 0a

A64.01 WALL DETAILS. 0a

A64.02 OAMARU STONE WALL. 0a

A64.03 LINK DETAILS. 0a

A64.04 CEILING DETAILS. 0a

A64.05 ALUCOBOND DETAILS. 0a

A64.06 ROOF DETAILS. 0a

A64.07 ROOF DETAILS. 0a

A64.08 SOLATUBE. 0a

A64.10 GLASS BARRIERS. 0a

A64.11 STRUCTURAL COLUMNS. 0a

DWG No NAME REV

A74.01 INTERNAL ELEVATIONS. 0a

A94.01 LANDSCAPE ELEVATIONS & SECTIONS. 0a

A94.02 LANDSCAPING DETAILS. 0a

A94.03 LANDSCAPING DETAILS. 0a

TENDER ISSUE 22.08.2011

36 SHEETS TOTAL (INCL TITLE SHEET)

FLWALL55102

Sealed Footpath

Grassed Area

Line of stones at edge of garden


Low concrete wall and wrought iron fence

Pillar and fence supportMH 102.541

OTA

GO

SET

TLER

S M

USEU

M

Historic Fence to remain. Allow to protect.

TK TK

Wall 102.44 Wall 102.43

top of step103.66

B 102.80Grassed Area

Demolish concrete steps.

STAGE 1 STORAGE BUILDING

Ja 1274 shed outline (recently removed)

MH 102.80

Remove crossing and replace with StandardDCC kerb and channel

Trees along fence are to be removed prior toContract being awarded.This work will be carried out by others (DCC)

Trees along boundary are to be removed prior to Contract being awarded.This work will be carried out by others (DCC).

Approx location of path andPaved area to be removed.

Fence to be carefully removed back to this pillar from theend of the Burnside Building (Otago Settlers Museum).Hand wrought Iron fence to DCC.Length of Fence removed approx 51.700m

Remove kerb along this fenceline to Stage 1 gate toallow for widening of carpark.

Provide site fencing to protect the public and others, for the proper execution of theworks and to meet the requirements of territorial or other authority.All Temporary and New Works is to Comply with NZBC:F5/AS1 Construction andDemolition Hazards in particular:Paragraph 1.0 Work Site Barriers and 1.1 Site Fences and Hoardings.

Main site Access. Note Traffic Management Plan required foraccess in and out of site across State Highway 1.

Extent of Site.

Unimpeded access for Fire Brigade at all times.

Extent of Site.

GATE

GATE

First FloorPlant Room.

L O W E R H I G H S T R E E T

LEGAL DESCRIPTION2 ANZAC AVENUESECTION 3SO PLAN 24068OT 15C/428

VAL REF 27170-93503.

B O U N D A R Y

ARCHITECTURAL ABBREVIATIONSCODE

AFFL

B/S

CLR

COS

C/W

FFL

FCL

FGL

TBA

dp

hwc

I.O

og

FA

TB

TV

HT

DESCRIPTION

above finished floor level.

Both Sides.

clear dimension between finished face.

confirm this dimension on site.

complete with.

finished floor level.

finished ceiling level.

finished ground level.

To be Advised.

downpipe

hot water cylinder

inspection opening.

overflow gully to head of drain.

From Above

To Below

Terminal Vent

Hose Tap.

sk

tub

wc

whb

WM

CT

F

Fr

Ov

WO

MW

BU

DW

Sh

sink

laundry tub

toilet

wash hand basin

Washing Machine.

Cook Top

Fridge

Freezer

Oven.

Wall Oven.

Microwave

Above Bench Boiling Unit.

Dishwasher.

Shower.

D/S

S/D

N/A

TH

FG

FGD

LAM

TFG

THD

TSD

S.S

M.S

Al.

PNT

S.SK

door size.

sliding door.

not applicable.

top hung

fixed glazed - single

fixed glazed - double

safety glazing - laminated.

safety glazing - toughened.

toughened glazing to door.

toughened glazing to sliding door.

Stainless Steel.

Mild Steel.

Aluminium.

Paint.

Stainless Steel Kickplate - nom 200mmhigh to both sides of door.

GENERAL NOTESGENERAL

G1: All work is to comply with the NZBC 1992, and any subsequent amendments, and to the satisfaction of the territorial authority.G2: Confirm all setout dimensions on site before commencing construction.G3: All trades shall visit site and make themselves fully conversant with all conditions concerning this scope of works and in in particular to ascertain the full extent and nature of the worksG4: Trades are to allow for scaffolding and any other equipment or necessary to carry out the works.G5: Allow to Protect the Public from gaining un supervised access to site and erect Hoardings in compliance with NZBC: F5. Typically 2.0m high Mesh Fencing is required around all externalwork areas likely to be able to be accessed by the Public.

CARPENTRY

C1: All work is to be carried out in accordance with NZS 3604:1999, and NZBC:1992.C2: All timber in contact with concrete is to have DPC placed between.C3: Allow to make good to all areas matching in with existing finishesC4: Allow to work in with all other tradesC5: Allow to retain water tightness' to all areas while under constructionC6: Allow to fit dwangs where required for other trades especially where items are hung off walls etc.C7: Allow to coordinate with client re any requirements for shelving.C8: Note check height of timber framed wall against table 8.4 NZS 3604:1999 & adjust accordingly.

FIRE DESIGN NOTESREFER TO FIRE DESIGN REPORT AS PREPARED BY COSGROVES LTD.ALLOW FOR FRR FIRE COLLARS AND/OR APPROVED FIRE RATED SEALANT TO THE REQUIRED RATING, TO ALL PENETRATIONS FOR SERVICES THROUGH SLAB/FLOOR ANDWALL STRUCTURE, AND ALLOW TO RETAIN INTEGRITY OF FIRE CELLS WHERE DUCTS, SERVICE PIPES, ELECTRICAL CABLING ETC PENETRATE FRR WALLS.REFER TO SHEET A00.02 FOR ACCEPTABLE SYSTEMS FOR THE PROTECTION OF PENETRATIONS IN FIRE RATED FLOORS, WALLS AND CEILINGS.

FIRE PROTECTION & SPRINKLERSREFER TO THE FIRE PROTECTION AND SPRINKLER'S PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS AS PREPARED BY FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER'S LTD.

PLUMBING & DRAINAGEREFER TO THE PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS AS PREPARED BY MECHANICAL SERVICES SOLUTIONS LTD.

MECHANICAL VENTILATIONREFER TO THE MECHANICAL DUCTWORK AND MECHANICAL PIPEWORK PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS AS PREPARED BY MECHANICAL SERVICES SOLUTIONS LTD.

ELECTRICAL (POWER, LIGHTING, PHONES, SECURITY AND DATA).REFER TO THE ELECTRICAL PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS AS PREPARED BY MACLEOD AND ASSOCIATES (NZ) LTD.

EMERGENCY LIGHTINGREFER TO THE EMERGENCY LIGHTING PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS AS PREPARED BY MACLEOD AND ASSOCIATES (NZ) LTD.

STRUCTURALREFER TO THE STRUCTURAL PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS AS PREPARED BY HADLEY AND ROBINSON LTD.Architectural Plans & Specifications are to be read in conjunction with Structural Engineer's plans and specifications.Any structural work omitted on the Architectural Plans but shown on the Structural plans, and vice versa, forms part of this contract and shall be allowed for in tender submission.

NOTE:DATEAMENDMENTNo.

APPROVEDCHECKEDDRAWNDESIGNED DATEAMENDMENTNo. PROJECT TITLE. PROJECT No. SHEET No.

COMMENCING CONSTRUCTION.DIMENSIONS ON SITE BEFORESHALL VERIFY ALLDRAWING. CONTRACTORDO NOT SCALE OFF THIS

DRAWING SCALES. ISSUED FOR.

CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.

ROBERT TONGUE FNZIA 1 : 200

OTAGO SETTLER'S MUSEUMSTAGE 4 REDEVELOPMENT

R.TONGUE

DPG 2374 A00.01.0a

OTAGO SETTLERS MUSEUM SPECIFIC CONDITIONSSITE ACCESS

Access to the site is limited to: Generally the NORTH ENTRANCE OFF THE ANZAC AVENUE CARPARK.

Also access will be allowed by arrangement with the OTAGO SETTLER'S MUSEUM management;

WORKING AREALimited to the designated working areas on the site - See Site Plan on Sheet A10.40.Final setout of Safety Barriers etc to be agreed with the OTAGO SETTLER'S MUSEUM MANAGEMENT and the ARCHITECTbefore erection.

SITE FEATURESContractor to check access roads are suitable for construction traffic prior to using the roads. Any damage to or soilingof the roadways will need to be made good during the project and at the end of the works.Check tree overhangs and landscaping features that encroach on the access ways and identify where potential damagemay occur to trees and landscape features before using access ways.Do not trim trees or any landscape feature without prior approval from the OTAGO SETTLER'S MUSEUM management.

REFERENCED DOCUMENTSPLEASE REFER TO THE FOLLOWING DOCUMENTS WHICH FORM COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE WORK.

NZBC F4/AS1 Safety from falling, 2.0 Construction site barriersNZBC F5/AS1 Construction and demolition hazards, 1.0 Work-site barriersBuilding Act 2004Building Regulations 1992 OSH: Approved code of practice for the safe erection and use of scaffolding

OSH: Guidelines for the provision of facilities and general safety in the construction industryHealth and Safety in Employment Act 1992Health and Safety in Employment Regulations 1995New Zealand Building Code 1992NZS 6803: Acoustics - Construction NoiseResource Management Act 1991Smoke Free Environments Act 1990

NOTICES AND APPROVALSSTATUTORY OBLIGATIONSComply with all statutory obligations and regulations of regulatory bodies controlling the execution of the works.

BUILDING CONSENT AUTHORITY AND NETWORK UTILITY APPROVALSAttend on Building Consent Authority officers, statutory and network utility inspectors, as necessary to obtain approvals(in addition to building consent approval) for and the satisfactory completion of, the works.

NOTIFY NETWORK UTILITY OPERATORSNotify all network utility operators of proposed works before commencing site operations. Ascertain location of servicesor confirm that none exist in the vicinity of the works. Take all necessary precautions to avoid damage to existingservices.

TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION, WORKS AND SERVICES.Provide as necessary temporary sheds, offices, lunch rooms, sanitary accommodation and other temporary buildingsrequired for storage, management of the works, for the use of workers while on site and as required by Acts andRegulations.Refer to adjacent plan for the Designated Contractor Area.

HOARDINGS, GANTRIES, LIGHTINGProvide temporary fencing, hoardings, planked footways, guard rails, gantries and lighting as necessary to protect thepublic and others, for the proper execution of the works and to meet the requirements of territorial or other authority.All Temporary and New Works is to Comply with NZBC:F5/AS1 Construction and Demolition Hazards in particular:Paragraph 1.0 Work Site Barriers and 1.1 Site Fences and Hoardings.

WATERProvide clean, fresh water for the works and make arrangements for distributing about the site.

ELECTRICITYSeparate site power supply is required to ensure that any overload caused by the site works only trips out the buildingsite and does not disrupt the MUSEUM operations.Nominate the person to install and be responsible for the complete temporary electrical installation. The name anddesignation of the person responsible is to be displayed prominently and close to the main switch or circuit breaker.

EXISTING SITE SERVICESMake good all damage to existing roads, footpaths, grounds, sewers or other services, caused in carrying out thecontract works.

EXISTING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMMaintain the integrity of the system at all times. Should work require de-activation of the system, give notice to the fireservice, follow their instructions and reinstate the system to their requirements.

PROTECT EXISTING BUILDINGSProtect existing buildings and other designated features which are to remain in position during the execution of theworks.

PROTECT EXISTING TREESProtect existing trees, fences, gates, walls, gardens and other designated site features which are to remain in positionduring the execution of the works.

SPECIAL PROTECTIONConstruction practices can impact on public wellbeing by the spreading of bacteria in dust. Special care must be taken tominimise dust throughout the works. Door ways between the Construction site and the Museum area must be sealedwith duct tape. Barriers, temporary walls and screens must be also sealed with duct tape.Walk off matts must be used in appropriate places and they must be cleaned regularly.Post signs to remind site personnel of the importance of dust containment.

Take care with welding, cutting of materials etc and avoid activation of the alarm system.No after hours welding or hot work is permitted unless supervised and discussed with OTAGO SETTLER'S MUSEUMManagement first.

0 FOR SCHEDULING 01-06-11

FOR TENDER 22.08.11

1 : 200

Site Plan - Contractors Access1

NORTH

0 BUILDING CONSENT 18-07-11

DRAWING LEGEND AND SITE PLAN0a FOR TENDER 22-08-11

DRAWNDESIGNED

PROJECT TITLE. PROJECT No. SHEET No.

OF.

ROBERT TONGUE FNZIA


R.Tongue

DPG

2374 A00.02.0a0 FOR SCHEDULING 01-06-11

FOR TENDER 22.08.11

NOTE:Alternative Fire Rated Sealing Systems may be used on site as long as they meetthe necessary Fire Rating Requirements and are subsequently approved by theArchitect/ Fire Engineer and Territorial Authority.

The above GIBBOARD systems are to be read in conjunction with WINSTONEWALLBOARDS "Penetrations In Fire Rated Systems - Issued August 2003".

pipes in and out unknown

102.56 GL

102.596 MH

FL

SEAL

WALL

CONC SEAL

BOXES VAR 103.04

COB PTH102.55

SS

102.56

55102

102.36

Sealed F/P

Sealed Footpath

Sealed Carpark

Grassed Area



Nib wall approx 0.10 above seal Levels on top of nib wall

Levels on top of kerb

Low concrete wall and wrought iron fence

Pillar and fence support

MH 102.541

Source of levels

Origin of levelsSurvey Standard 1HRL 102.365 on pinunder cover

OTA

GO

SET

TLER

S M

USEU

M

Historic Fence to remain.Allow to protect.

TK

102.78

TK

102.88

LP 102.86 TK 102.91 FL 102.77

SEAL 102.76

SEAL 102.44

SEAL 102.50

SEAL 102.57 102.56 SEAL 102.54

SEAL 102.74SEAL 102.74102.76 TK 102.73

SEAL 102.53

SEAL 102.61

102.80

102.86

103.14

103.05103.06

WALL 102.77

Tree 102.95Tree 103.06Tree 102.95Tree 102.93Tree 103.00Tree 103.07Tree 102.89Tree 103.05Tree 103.04Tree 103.10

stones 102.84

Wall 102.60 Wall 102.57 Wall 102.44 Wall 102.43

top of step103.66

B 102.93

B 102.96

B 102.94

B 102.80Grassed Area

B 102.48

stones 102.49

stones 102.49

tree 102.58

LP 102.65COB PTH102.57

tree 102.70

stones 102.56

tree 102.78

stones 102.60

stones 102.67

stones 102.71

stones 102.68

��

��

��

Concrete steps demolishedas part of STAGE 3.

All trees to be removed by aseperate Contractor (DCC).

STAGE 1 STORAGE BUILDING

G

F

E

D

1 4

Ja 1274 shed outline (recently removed)tree 102.69PP 102.47KL LOW

102.36

SEAL /CONCRETE

tk 102.47

cov.6sq 102.54

tk/tp 102.43

tk 102.41

PP 102.43

GAS 102.46

tk 102.36

tk 102.36

tk 102.35

PP 102.35

FH 102.34TK cross 102.33

KL 102.31TK cross 102.32

MH 102.52

B 102.89

B 102.93

B 102.78 B 102.78

102.65

102.72

102.71CRN PILLAR

Stone wall to base of fence.

seal 102.77

MH 102.80

MH 102.82

seal 102.84

Remove crossing andreplace with Standard DCCkerb and channel

Trees along fence are to be removed prior toContract being awarded.This work will be carried out by others (DCC)

Trees along boundary are to be removed priorto Contract being awarded.This work will be carried out by others (DCC).

Approx location of path andPaved area to be removed.

Fence to be carefully removed back to this pillar from theend of the Burnside Building (Otago Settlers Museum).Hand wrought Iron fence to DCC.Length of Fence removed approx 51.700m

Remove kerb along this fenceline to Stage 1 gate toallow for widening of carpark.

B O U N D A R Y

OUTLINE OF BUILDING (695m2)

ALLOW TO EXCAVATE ENTIRE SITE 300mm BELOW EXISTINGLEVELS, INCL REMOVAL OF TOPSOIL, REMOVAL OF STONEBED TO FOOTPATH.TREES WILL BE REMOVED BY OTHERS.REFER TO A10.41 FOR EXTENT OF FENCE TO BE REMOVED.





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A10.40.0a

1 : 100

Site Plan - Existing.1

SERVICES - WATER

SERVICES - STORM WATER

SERVICES - FOUL WATERSERVICES - ELECTRICITY

SERVICES - GAS

SERVICES - TELEPHONESERVICES - TELEPHONE - FIBRE OPTICSERVICES - TELSTRA CLEAR

TKMTSHMHBBLF/LNibSSPP

Top of KerbMud TankSpot HeightManholeBuildingBuilding LineFence Line(conc) nib wallSurvey standardPower Pole

T/LTCobpthBdyFH

Traffic LightTreeCobblestone / Path edgeBoundary.Fire Hydrant.

Boundary Line.

LEGAL DESCRIPTION2 ANZAC AVENUESECTION 3SO PLAN 24068OT 15C/428

VAL REF 27170-93503.


L O W E R H I G H S T R E E T

NORTH


EXISTING SITE PLANFOR TENDER 22.08.11

0a FOR TENDER 22-08-11

G11

G10

G8

G7

G9

G12

G6

G13

��

PC1 PC3

PC4 PC5 PC6 PC7 PC8 PC9 PC10 PC11 PC12 PC13

PC2 PC14

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

103.700 RLFIN FLOOR

103.000 eRL

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

1 in 50 slope

1.1°

2.3°

20m 15m 10m 5m 0m

1 in 25 slope

20m 15m 10m 5m 0m

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

103.070 eRL102.890 eRL

102.760 eRL seal

��

�

103.575 fin(.515 slab)

103.700mfin floor

103.700 RL FIN FLOOR102.600 RL FINISHED LEVEL of 75 mm CONCRETE TOPPING.

103.550 fin

150m

mris

eto

slab

Gra

dien

t 1:2

5ap

prox

40mm thick TIMARU BLUESTONE paver on 20mm cement mortar screed on100mm reinforced concrete slab (D147 mesh 30mm cover) laid to 1:100 falltypically. Slab to be on 25mm sand and compacted AP65 layers.

double reinforced 190mmblock walls to form planter withoverall with (excluding tiles) of500mm.Install GRINDERMINDER Anti-skate board devices to the topof this wall, right round tosteps.

Terraced slab with 35mm thick x variable length TIMARU BLUESTONE pavers, cut at back to match slope oframp and adhesive fixed.

4 x sets of 45mm o.dia 316 S.Steel handrails with 316 S.Steelbalustrade posts @ 1000crs. Refer to Sheet A94.03.

103.500 fin top of step

Custom bollard light fitting (7 of).Refer to Electrical Consultant documents for fullSpecification.Base Plate fixing requirements to be confirmed byLighting supplier.

102.275 base of steps

ram

ped

ge

level fl

level fl

7 x 175mm risers

103.575 fin(.515 slab)

Grassed area and Garden byothers.

20 series block planter with 400x 400 x 10mm TIMARUBLUESTONE tiles on 10mmcement mortar to both verticalfaces and top of wall.

90 x 32 hardwood slat seat on S.Steel brackets @ 600crs. Refer to detail 05/A94.03.

Fire Alarm Indicator panel.Allow a Provisional Sum of$5,000.Final detail to be advised.

��

SLOPED FOOTPATH UP GRADIENT 1:50.

103.600 fin(.540 slab)

sump

sump

sump

New 20 series kerb block wall clad in10mm TIMARU BLUESTONE tiles on10mm cement mortar.

45mm o.dia 316 S.Steel handrail with S.Steelbalustrade posts @ 1000crs.Refer to 01 & 04 A94.03 for similar details.New insitu reinforced concrete steps with 40mm TIMARU BLUESTONE

paver on 20mm screeded cement mortar bedding.

Existing Stone wall c/w steel balustrading to remain.Allow to neatly saw cut concrete base of fence and make good andalter balustrading to finish where new steps are indicated to start.

��

��

��

40mm thick TIMARU BLUESTONE paver on 20mm cementmortar screed on 100mm reinforced concrete slab (D147mesh 30mm cover) laid to 1:100 fall typically.Slab to be on 25mm sand and compacted AP65 layers.

Double reinforced 190mm block walls to form planter with overall with(excluding tiles) of 500mm.Install GRINDERMINDER Anti-skate board devices to the top of this wall.

Terraced slab with 35mm thick x variable length TIMARU BLUESTONEpavers, cut at back to match slope of ramp and adhesive fixed.


103.100 fin RL

RELN slot drain as sized and detailed by Mechanical &Plumbing Engineer, c/w Stainless Steel pedestrian grating.

40mm TIMARU BLUESTONE paver on 20mmscreeded cement mortar bedding over insituconcrete steps.

40mm thick Aphalt on compacted AP40 metal laid to suitable falls(1:100) to new sump and existing sump in carpark. Allow to makegood junction between old and existing carpark. Extent of newAsphalt shown shaded. (622m2 total)

103.550 fin RL

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

85.0°

��

12

stepsPC15 PC16 PC17 PC18 PC19 above PC20 PC21 PC22 PC23

� ��

�

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

PC24

PC28

PC27

PC26

PC25

PC30

abo

vePC

31 b

elow

PC32

PC33

PC34

PC35

PC36

��

�

��

�

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

PC37

PC38

PC39

PC40

PC41

PC43

PC42

PC44

Refer to Sheet A31.40 for layout of Precast toMain Entry Portal(Panels PC55 to PC60 inclusive).

PC45

PC46

PC47

PC49 PC49

�

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

�� !��"�� #��$�� #��%��#��!��!� ��&

slot drain continuous on boundary.

Fire IndicatorPanel.

Planter & Seat.

Rose Bed

Gla

zed

balu

stra

de

Glazed balustrade Gla

zed

balu

stra

de

75mm high x 550mm wide bluestone wall.


Upstand wall and Handrail

Timaru Bluestone terraced Landscaping.


100mm thick site concrete between blds onDPM. Laid to 1:200 fall so exits to South Eastcorner of Building.(Extent shown shaded floor area approx 12m2)

fall

��

��

Refer to STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS DRAWINGSFOR ALL SLAB AND FOOTING DETAILS.

ALLOW TO EXCAVATE ENTIRE SITE 300mmBELOW EXISTING LEVELS.

EXTE

RN

AL W

ALL

OF

STAG

E 3

BUR

NSI

DE

450mm high x 550mm wide

bluestone wall.

450m

mhi

ghx

550m

m

wide

blue

ston

ewa

ll.

400m2 of TIMARU BLUESTONE PAVERS TO BE

ALLOWED FOR TO THE EXTERIOR (EXCLUDING

WASTAGE, WALLS, STEPS AND TERRACE)

NOTE PATTERN OF PAVERS ON MAIN PLAN IS

DIAGRAMMATIC ONLY. REFER TO ENLARGED PLAN 02

FOR ACTUAL SETOUT.

��

1

A94.03.0a

3

A94.03.0a

3

A94.03.0a

1

A94.02.0a

2

A94.02.0a

��

extg Stage 1Fence & Gate.

extg wooden fence.

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

��

��

��

��

16 17 18

MH 102.80

New 150mm high x 150mm wide Standard DCC concrete kerb alongfence line where extg kerb removed to allow for wider carparking.

Kerb removed (shown dashed) Planter Bed #1 Planter Bed #2 PlanterBed #3

Concrete kerb 150mm wide 100mm high above asphalt 300mm over all depth (200mm belowasphalt) to perimeter of planter bed. Selected Tree (tree and soil / planting by others).

Allow a Provisional Sum of $10,000 for all road marking to carpark.

Make Good newkerb wheremeets existing.

Make Good new kerbwhere meets existing.

Kerb removed (shown dashed)

4

A94.03.0a

Dashed line indicates 100mm perforated drainage behind wall - Refer to Sheet A94.02.Allow to connect to approved outfall.

Dashed line indicates 100mm perforated drainagebehind wall - Refer to Sheet A94.02.Allow to connect to approved outfall.

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

Refer to Strc.Eng dwgs for low level ServicePenetrations in panels PC26 & PC27.

PC29

��

Refer to Strc.Eng dwgs for all High level ServicesPenetrations in panels PC5, PC6, PC7 & PC8.

Refer to Strc.Eng dwgs for all High levelServices Penetrations in panels PC15, PC16,PC19, PC22 & PC23.Note Low Level Service Penetrations toPanels PC16 & PC23.

103.400 RL FIN FLOOR102.350 RL FINISHED LEVEL of 75 mmCONCRETE TOPPING.

step

insla

b

step in slab

550 x 400 x 40mm thick TIMARUBLUESTONE paver edge strip tograss on 20mm cement mortarscreed on 100mm reinforcedconcrete slab. Random paving toremainder of lower area aroundPlanter.Paving and slot drain to finish atheight to match extg footpath.

102.480 extg footpath

8

A94.03.0a

��

�� Row 1

Row 2

Row 3

Row 4

Row 5

40mm thick TIMARU BLUESTONE paver insizes 200mm, 400mm, 600mm long andlaid out in pattern as indicated.





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.

ROBERT TONGUE FNZIA As indicated


Robert Tongue

DPG 2374 A10.41.0b

1 : 100

New Site & Landscape Plan1

PROPOSED LEVEL 0 PRECAST PLAN & LANDSCAPING PLAN.


NORTH

1 : 20

Landscaping - Typical Paver layout2

STORAGE BUILDING

0a Panel Numbers Revised 04-07-11

0a BUILDING CONSENT 18-07-11

FOR TENDER 22.08.110b FOR TENDER 22-08-11

ADDITIONAL NOTES

ALLOW TO INSTALL TO ALL MAIN DOUBLE BLOCK /TILE WALLS TO THE WEST FACADEPROPRIETARY ANTI SKATEBOARD DEVICES @ 1200 CRS POSITIONED GENERALLY 50mm FROMTHE EDGE AND CENTRED LONGWAYS IN THE TIMARU BLUESTONE TILES.(NOTE CONTRACTOR TO ALLOW TO SUPPLY AND INSTALL 45 UNITS IN TOTAL).PRODUCT TO BE "GRINDERMINDER" ex USA 25mm dia head with 32mm x 12mm embedded stud in Solidstainless steel with a black oxide finish that gives a soft, matte black appearance.CONTACTGrind To A Halt, Inc. PO Box 221 Elburn, Illinois 60119 http://www.grind2ahalt.com/ Call (630) 365-2375Fax (630) 365-1075

Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to all Timaru Bluestone, vertical and horz faces.

D D

E E

F F

G G

G11

G10

G8

G7

G9

G1

G12

G4G5

G5

G6

G2

slot drain continuous on boundary.

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

610 UB 101

610 UB 101

610 UB 101

610 UB 101

610 UB 101

610 UB 101

610

UB 1

01 fr

ame

610

UB 1

01 fr

ame

610

UB 1

01 fr

ame

610

UB 1

01 fr

ame

610

UB 1

01 fr

ame

610 UB 101 frame

250RHS150

250RHS150

250RHS150

250RHS150

150SHS150

250RHS150

G13

��

610 UB 101

150SHS150outline of roof above (shown dashed).

610 UB 101 frame

outline of roof above (shown dashed).

��

��

G3

��

��

1A54.11.0a

Allocated Duct Space.

W6: 150mm Flush Glaze low-E double glazing.

W12: 150mm Flush Glaze low-E

double glazing.

W4: 150mm Flush Glaze low-E double glazing.

W3:150mm Flush Glaze low-E double glazing.

Line

ar s

lot d

iffus

ers.

Line

ar s

lot d

iffus

ers.

A30.40.0b

3

��

��

6A54.11.0a

WALL 01A

WAL

L 02

WALL 02B

WAL

L 03

WALL 02B

WAL

L 03

WALL 02B

WAL

L 02

WALL 01A

WAL

L 01

WAL

L 01

WALL 02A

D1.

D2.

D8.

FLOOR 01FLOOR 01FLOOR 02

FLOOR 03 FLOOR 03FLOOR 01

A30.40.0b

4

A64.02.0a

1

A64.02.0a 2

��

��

��'()'*)+� ��

��

��

��

��

A44.02.0b

1

A44.02.0b

2

��

D3 D4 D5

D6

D7

ext light

ext light

ext light

ext light

ext light

ext light

ext light

��



��

��

W2 W1

W5

W8

W9

W10

W11

W7

W13

Fire IndicatorPanel.

Planter & Seat.

Rose Bed

Gla

zed

balu

stra

de

Glazed balustrade

Gla

zed

balu

stra

de


450mm high x 550mm wide

bluestone wall.


Hand

rail

Hand

rail

Hand

rail

Hand

rail

12

stepsUpstand wall and Handrail

sump

sump

sump

3 x 150mm dia dp's+ o.flows.

100mm dia dp+ o.flow.

extg 150mm dia dp

extg 150mm dia dp and holder batts and overflow fromstage 1 building adjacent to be relocated to positionshown. Allow to blank off section of extg spigot andoverflow where downpipe was and form new spigot andoverflow and install salvaged downpipe including salvagedholder batts. Allow for new drainage connection fromdownpipe to surface water drain. Allow to make goodprecast wall where fixings such as brackets and holderbatts were removed.

extg 150mm dia dp (relocated)

WALL 01



REFER TO SHEET A10.41 for PLAN OF LANDSCAPING.

150m

m ri

se to

sla

b

Gra

dien

t 1:2

5 ap

prox

150mmdp.

��

��

��

��

450m

m h

igh

x 55

0mm

wide

blu

esto

ne w

all.

470mm wide Timaru Bluestone perimeter band c/w

Holyoake Model LD-615 style 2 flange slot diffusers

mounted in centre continuous along glass line.

470mm wide Timaru Bluestone perimeter band c/w

Holyoake Model LD-615 style 2 flange slot diffusers

mounted in centre continuous along glass line.470mm wide Timaru Bluestone

perimeter band c/w slot diffusers.

470mm wide Timaru Bluestone

perimeter band c/w slot diffusers.

1A84.00

A30.40.0b

1

A30.40.0b2

A74.01.0a

2

3A64.01.0a

A74.01.0a

3

A74.01.0a 1

W7

2A64.01.0a

1A64.01.0a

4A64.01.0a

5A64.01.0a

6A64.01.0a

5A54.03.0a

3A54.03.0a

1A44.03.0a

1A44.01.0a

3A54.03.0a

GB5

GB4

GB3

GB2

GB1

��

WAL

L 04

WAL

L 04

FLOOR 04

1A54.03.0a

1

A64.00.0a

2

A64.00.0a

3

A64.00.0a

4

A64.00.0a

5

A64.00.0a

6

A64.00.0a

7

A64.01.0a

1

A64.00.0a

2A54.11.0a

3A54.11.0a

4A54.11.0a

7A54.03.0a

��

��

2A64.10.0a

5A64.10.0a

A94.01.0a

1

A94.01.0a

2

A94.01.0a3

��!��"�'�#

��!#��!�$��

�� !�'�#

��,��"��'�#

��

Reception Counter design to befinalised at a later date.Any future Counter design will need tocomply with NZS 4121 Section 11Public Facilities in particular Figure 36.

120 MIN FRR WALL TO STAGE 1

120 MIN FRR WALL TO STAGE 1

WALL 05 WALL 05

FLOOR 052m2

1 : 100

GROUND FLOOR1

JOSEPHINE

ENTRY

STORAGE BUILDING

STORE 01 COAT/BAG

CAR PARK

CUMBERLAND STREET

AUDITORIUM

STAGE 3 / 4 FOYER LINK

RECEPTION

STAGE 3 TOILETS





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



Robert Tongue

DPG 2374 A21.40.0aA GENERAL ISSUE 23-08-10A DEVELOPED DESIGN 07-10-10

TYPE DESCRIPTION

WALL 01 200mm Basalt Aggregate precast concrete panel / 50mm air gap /1050 x 590 x 100mm thick Oamaru stone panel.Fit 50mm K12 insulation into cavity & 0.25mm polythene Vapour Barrier over face of Insulation and tape sealed.

B UPDATE 28-03-11

Plan

t 01

Plan

t 02

MAIN FOYER

SHOP (future)

CAFE(future)

C UPDATE 28-04-11

WALL AND FLOOR LEGEND



PROPOSED FLOOR PLAN.FOR TENDER 22.08.11


WALL 02 200mm Basalt Aggregate precast concrete panel / 140 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 framing with studs @ 600crs /0.25mm polythene Vapour Barrier / 90mm K12 insulation tight fitted and sealed in cavity.

WALL 01a 200mm precast concrete panel (No Aggregate) / 50mm air gap / 1050 x 590 x 100mm thick Oamaru stone panel.

WALL 02A 200mm Basalt Aggregate precast concrete panel / 140 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 framing with studs @ 600crs / 0.25mm polythene Vapour Barrier / 90mmK12 insulation tight fitted and sealed in cavity.Wall linings are as follows: 12mm Fibrous Plaster. Overlay with TEXDECOR VINACOUSTIC OXYGEN 9001 11 14 acoustic wall covering assupplied by Swinsongroup, upto 3025mm from top of skirting.STOSILENT PANEL 15mm thick + STOSILENT SUPERFINE 2mm thick plaster with 36mm cavity upto ceiling. Refer to Detail 07 / A64.01

WALL 02B 200mm precast concrete panel (No Aggregate) / 140 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 framing with studs @ 600crs / 0.25mm polythene VapourBarrier / 90mm K12 insulation tight fitted and sealed in cavity / 12mm FIBROUS PLASTER stopped to LVL 6 / paint finish.

WALL 03 140 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 framing with studs @ 600crs / 12mm FIBROUS PLASTER both sides stopped to LVL 6 / paint finish.

WALL 04 90 x 45 MSG8 TAN H1.2 framing with studs @ 600crs. Note this wall terminates 100mm above 2700mm ceiling.12mm FIBROUS PLASTER one side stopped to LVL 6 / paint finish.

WALL 05 70 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 battens @ 600crs vert blocking @ 600crs over back face of Grid F precast / 12mm Fibrous Plaster wall linings. Stop to LVL 6 finish and Paint in selected colours.

FLOOR 01 21mm Rimu timber floor end matched, kiln dried to Moisture Content to match installation. 4 coat Polyurethane UROXSYS MCUV non yellowing moisture cured polyurethane.17.5mm MBH (Marine Bonded Hardwood plywood). 45mm K10 underfloor insulation board. 70 x 45 TAN H1.2 battens @ 400crs against the floor direction and 600crs blocking between.Double Fix with SELLEYS direct Stick adhesive and RAMSET LDU75 drive pins @ 600crs.

FLOOR 02 75mm bed of gravel over 45mm K10 Insulation board over suspended slab.

FLOOR 03 Selected Tarkett Granite Floor Vinyl coved 150mm up wall and PVC pencil moulding to top.

FLOOR 04 Fit 70 x 45 MSG8 continuous battens screw fixed @ 400crs with 12g x 3-1/2 Steel woodscrews into each side of extg 120 x 45 joists.70 x 45 MSG8 floor battens @ 450crs cut between extg joists and screw fixed into new battens fixed to sides of joists. Install new 21mm Rimu floor from Stage 4Continuiing into Stage 3 Foyer - no breaks between buildings. Note Contractor to also take delivery of skirting and allow to install and paint.

FLOOR 05 Stage 3 Auditorium - Broadloom carpet CAVALIER BREMWORTH Code 14/503 "CRACKLE" color BROWN.

E E

F F

G G

H H

G11

G10

G8

G7

G9

G1

G12

G4

G5

G6

G2

G13

G3

1

A64.04.0a

4

A64.04.0a

2

A64.04.0a

7

A64.04.0a

TYPE CL5 (2700)

TYPE CL8 (3000)

TYPE CL5 (2700)

TYPECL13

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

TYPECL13

TYPECL13

TYPECL13

TYPECL13

TYPECL13

TYPECL13

TYPECL10

TYPECL10

TYPECL10

TYPECL10

TYPECL10

TYPECL10

TYPECL10

TYPECL10

TYPE

CL10 TYPE

CL10 TYPE

CL10 TYPE

CL10 TYPE

CL10TYPE

CL13

TYPE

CL13

TYPE

CL13

MAIN BULKHEADMAIN BULKHEAD

BULK

HEAD

BULK

HEAD

BULK

HEAD

BULK

HEAD

BULK

HEAD

BULK

HEAD

BULK

HEAD

BULKHEAD

BULKHEAD

BULKHEAD

BULKHEAD

BULKHEAD

BULKHEAD

TYPE CL8(3515)

AllocatedDuct Space.

EXTERNAL GLAZING LINE






66.5°

Note the TYPE CL10 panels that are not shaded do nothave insulation above them and have free unobstructedair able to pass through them for ventilation.

Solatubes

Solatubes

Solatubes

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Dashed line indicates triangular cut to fit WEBFORGELockline sunscreen vertical panel B pattern mesh grill aboveAlucobond upto 6m flat ceiling.Allow a Provisional Sum $5000 for WEBFORGE screen.

��

��

��

��

��

66.5

°

66.5°

23.5°

23.5

°

601 Ub

601 Ub

601 Ub

601 Ub

601 Ub

601 Ub

601 Ub

ProfiledColumn

TYPE CL8(3380)

BULKHEAD(3400 stepdown to 3000mm)

Alucobond Barge flashing

Alucobond Barge flashing.

Alucobond Barge flashing

Alucobond end

panels to vertical wall.

Aluc

obon

d en

d pa

nels

to v

ertic

al w

all

Type CL10 ceiling and bulkheads continue above lower Alucobond ceiling edge - refer to detail 03/A2540 below.

BULK

HEAD

BULKHEADpanel joint

panel joint

panel joint

AllocatedDuct Space.

��

��

��

��

��

Alucobond continues over entrance. Allow to installSolatube above entry as well (all shown dashed).

WEB

FOR

GE

GR

ILL

(das

hed

abov

e)

��

��

��

�� !��"

��

��

��

3

A64.04.0a

TYPE CL10 (6000)TYPE CL10 (6000)

5

A64.04.0a

6

A64.04.0a

8

A64.04.0a

8

A64.04.0a

9

A64.04.0a

1

A64.05.0a

1

A64.05.0a

1A44.03.0a

1

A64.04.0a

7

A64.05.0a

sim

7

A64.05.0a

sim

3

A64.05.0a

3

A64.05.0a

6A64.05.0a

AP

Allow a Provisional Sum $1000 for supply andinstallation of 60x600 Alucobond hinged access panel.

7

A64.07.0a

8

A64.05.0a





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



Robert Tongue

DPG 2374 A25.40.0a

1 : 100

CEILING PLAN1

TYPE DESCRIPTION

CL5 1200 x 600 Tile suspended 24mm Peakform exposed tee grid ceiling.Armstrong Fine Fissured angled tegular edge tile.

CL8 New 12mm solid Fibrous ceiling on Gib/Rondo battens @ 400crs suspended from above.Stop to Level 6 and apply Specified Paint finish.

CL10 18mm DECORTECH 3/16 multi-groove MDF 2400 x 1200 prefinished painted panel.Autex AAB 35-50 acoustic blanket - denoted in grey shade.

CL13 4mm ALUCOBOND Aluminium Composite Panels1350mm wide x 8000mm max length.

A GENERAL ISSUE 23-08-10A DEVELOPED DESIGN 07-10-10

B UPDATE 07-03-11

C UPDATE 28-03-11

SOLATUBE SPECIFICATION

Allow to fit into roof and Alucobond Ceiling (19 of) SOLATUBE 750DS-0 530mm Daylighting System.

Include the following components for each unit:

SOLATUBE (DA0 Acrylic Dome).SOLATUBE (FF4) seamless flashing for low pitched roofs.SOLATUBE Spectralight Infinity extension tubing.SOLATUBE (L6) Stainless Tone Trim with Vusion Diffuser.SOLATUBE (NL) Natural Effect Lense.SOLATUBE (FL) Flashing Insulator for reducing flashing condensation.

JOSEPHINE

ENTRY

STORE 01 COAT/BAG

AUDITORIUM

STAGE 3 / 4 FOYER LINK

RECEPTION

STAGE 3 TOILETSPl

ant 0

1

Plan

t 02

MAIN FOYER

D UPDATE 28-04-11

CEILING LEGEND



PROPOSED CEILING PLANFOR TENDER 22.08.11


E E

F F

G G

H H

G11

G10

G8

G7

G9

G1

G12

G4

G5

G6

G2

G13

G3

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

PARAPET

PAR

APET

& C

AP F

LASH

ING

.

ROOF A267 m2

ROOF B142 m2 ROOF C (60 m2)

VALLEY

APRON FLASHING APRON FLASHING

SEIS

MIC

APR

ON

FLA

SHIN

G O

VER

EXI

STIN

G P

ARAP

ET

3 x 150mm dia dp's+ o.flows.

Main Roof drops down ontolower roof and falls to outlets.PA

RAP

ET

PARAPET & CAP FLASHING

4mm

ALUCOBO

ND @

1200crs to Gables

4mm ALUCOBOND soffit wrapped over end of Eaves.


4mm

ALU

COBO

ND @

1200

crs

to G

able

s

FALL

ROOF D (619 m2)

VALLEY

Seismic apron flashing adhesive fixeddown onto 19mm CD plywood fixed ontop of 90 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 Plate onDPC RAMSET drive pins @ 600crsinto top of parapet and along face onnew precast wall.Refer to details.

Existing roof below(Stage 3 Burnside).

Cantilever wall and parapet overextg Stage 3 roof.Wal to float 100mm above extgroof - not flashed at base.

Indicates extent of Insulated Roof 1.

STAGE 1 STORAGE BUILDING.

STAGE 3 BURNSIDE.

Proprietary Ventilator 1 per 20m2 of roof area.

Note roof steps down verticallyalong this point onto roof belowat varying heights until meetsbase of valley.Allow to frame wall verticallyfrom 90 x 45 MSG8 H3.2framing @ 600crs on top ofDHS purlins and line with 17.5CD PLYWOOD. ReturnNURALITE down face andcontinue into roof.

MAIN ENTRY(dashed below)

Internal Gutter.

100mm dia dp+ o.flow.

Ridge

NURALITE 3P 2 layer on 19mm CDgrade H3.2 PLYWOOD.240 x 45 MSG8 TAN H3.2 rafters @400crs75mm KINGSPAN K12 KOOLTHERMinsulation neat fitted between framingand sealed.

Indicates extent of Insulated Roof 2.

NURALITE 3P 2 layer on 19mm CDgrade H3.2 PLYWOOD /140 x 45 MSG8 TAN H3.2 rafters @600crs fixed down to DHS 250/13Purlins @ 600crs with LumberLokCP40 cleats to alternating sides ofrafter with 2/10g-16 zinc plated Hexheads.Directly on top of DHS purlins fixBituthene self adhesive Vapourbarrier over 17.5mm PLYWOOD.Allow to tape seal all joints toprevent any air leakage.75mm KINGSPAN K12KOOLTHERM insulation fittedbetween timber purlins hard downon Vapour Barrier and sealed.

NURALITE 3P 2 layer on 19mm CD grade H3.2 PLYWOOD /90 x 45 MSG8 TAN H3.2 battens @ 600crs fixed down to DHS 250/13 Purlins @ 600crs.Allow for blocking @ 600crs on top of DHS purlins.No insulation or Vapour Barrier.

Solatubes

Solatubes

Solatubes

extg 150mm dia dp

extg 150mm dia dp and holder batts and overflow from stage1 building adjacent to be relocated to position shown. Allowto blank off section of extg spigot and overflow wheredownpipe was and form new spigot and overflow and installsalvaged downpipe including salvaged holder batts. Allow fornew drainage connection from downpipe to surface waterdrain. Allow to make good precast wall where fixings such asbrackets and holder batts were removed.

��

extg 150mm dia dp (relocated)

6 de

g fa

llto

gut

ter.3

deg

fall t

o gu

tter.

3 de

g fa

ll to

gutte

r.

3 de

g fa

ll to

gutte

r.

1

A64.05.0a

1

A64.05.0a

7

A64.05.0a

sim

7

A64.05.0a

sim

2A64.05.0a

6A64.05.0a

Sim1

A64.01.0a

1

A64.06.0a

4

A64.06.0a

3

A64.06.0a

sim

5

A64.06.0a

7A64.06.0a

0.9mm AZ200 G550 Colorsteel ZRXcap flashing in max lengths, fixedusing 50mm wide x 0.55 Galvflashing clips @ 600crs.Allow for all expansion joints @ 8mcrs with 100mm laps, clear siliconesealed down each side andaluminium blind rivetted @ 50mm crson one edge.DETAIL TYPICAL TO ALL PARAPETS.

0.9mm AZ200 G550 Colorsteel ZRXcap flashing in max lengths, fixedusing 50mm wide x 0.55 Galvflashing clips @ 600crs.Allow for all expansion joints @ 8mcrs with 100mm laps, clear siliconesealed down each side andaluminium blind rivetted @ 50mmcrs on one edge.DETAIL TYPICAL TO ALLPARAPETS.

Note roof steps down vertically alongthis point onto roof below at varyingheights until meets base of Gutter.Allow to frame wall vertically from 90 x45 MSG8 H3.2 framing @ 600crs on topof DHS purlins and line with 17.5 CDPLYWOOD. Return NURALITE downface and continue into roof.

�

��

��

��


Expansion Joints.

6

A64.07.0a





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



Robert Tongue

DPG 2374 A26.40.0a

1 : 100

ROOF PLAN1

A GENERAL ISSUE 23-08-10A DEVELOPED DESIGN 07-10-10

B UPDATE 07-03-11


0 BUILDING CONSENT 18-07-11 PROPOSED ROOF PLANFOR TENDER 22.08.11 0a FOR TENDER 22-08-11

Level 00

Level G1200

��#$�-��!� �!��-��.//�0

��!��"��!��1��'�#��&��

�

��

�

��

�

��

�

��

�

��

�

��

�

��

�

��

�

��

�

��

�

��

Bui

ldin

g ed

ge S

tage

1 (s

how

n da

shed

)

Bui

ldin

g O

utlin

e S

tage

3.

Building edge Stage 1 (shown dashed)

Underside of Roof line beyond parapet. (shown dashed)

PC4PC5PC6PC7PC8PC9PC10PC11PC12PC13

��

��

��

��

��

��

PC1PC2 W1 W2 W3

150mm powdercoated aluminium flushglaze system (NALCO or Equivalent) c/w6mm toughened N-70 low e #2 / 12as / 8.38 laminated glazing (26mm).

4mm ALUCOBOND Aluminium Composite Panels 1350mm wide,c/w profiled edge panel as detailed at 4050 crs.

Structural 610 UB Columns. Specified Paint finish.

400 x 400 x 10mm TIMARU BLUESTONE tile above paving on verticalface of precast panel, 10mm cement mortar bedding.

0.9mm AZ200 G550 Colorsteel ZRX Apronflashing in max lengths, fixed using 50mmwide x 0.55 Galv flashing clips @ 600crs.Note flashing to have 150 upstand aboveparapet folded and be lapped by 0.90mmsecondary apron flashing 20 x 20 chasedinto Extg Stage 1 Building to seal off gapbetween buildings.

200mm thick precast exteriorpanels PC4 to PC13 with 16mmsealant joints. (NO BASALT)

Parapet Apron Flashing.

��

��

��

�

100mm reinforced concrete slab as substrate to 40mm pavers laid to 1:100fall typically. Slab to be on 25mm sand and compacted AP40 layers.

Allow to Precast Panel PC1, PC2 & PC3 for 3 chamfered rebates full lengthto align with window sill and transoms. Refer to detail.Panels PC1, PC2 and PC3 are to have Basalt Aggregate finish.Apply RESENE 2xcoats URACRYL 404 urethane clear sealer - low sheenover basalt precast.

Rebate.

Rebate.

Rebate.

REFER TO H & R STRUCTURAL ENGINEER DRAWINGS FOR ALL DETAILS OFPRECAST PANELS THAT FINISH BELOW FLOOR LEVEL. THIS APPLIES TOPANELS PC35 TO PC54NOTE THESE PANELS ARE PLAIN CONCRETE FINISH AS HAVE TILESINSTALLED OVER FACE.

��

��

��

��

��

Level 00

EFGH

Level G1200

��

��

��

��!!�$��

��

PC14PC24PC25PC26PC27PC28

��

��

�/23*�//�

��+��4(��5() 56��37(�//�

��

��

��

�

PC30

��

�

��

PC32PC33

��

��

OPENING OPENING

200mm thick basalt aggregate precastexterior panels PC14, PC24 to PC34with 16mm sealant joints.note exposedpart above roof only to have BasaltAggregate to panels P24 - P31.Apply RESENE 2xcoats URACRYL 404urethane clear sealer - low sheen overbasalt precast.

4mm ALUCOBOND Aluminium Composite Panels1200mm wide to vertical face of roof Gables.

0.9mm AZ200 G550 ColorsteelZRX cap flashing in max lengths,fixed using 50mm wide x 0.55Galv flashing clips @ 600crs.

Parapet cap flashing.

20 x 20 rebate formed in panels forcap flashing over parapet of Stage 3.Final height to be Confirmed on site.

20 x 20 Rebate. �� !��"

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

6A64.06.0a

�

��

�

��

�

��

�

��

�

��

�

PC29

PC31

OPENINGS

Level 00

Level G1200

G11G10G8G7 G9G6

Level 00

Level G1200

PC34(confirm on site)

PC35PC36

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

W4 W5 W6 W7 W7

W7

W12 W13

W8,9 W10,11D1 D8

50mm thick IMPERIAL RED GRANITE slabs mechanically fixed toprecast concrete columns and panel to Main Entrance. Refer to SheetA31.40 for additional details.Allow a Provisional sum of $20,000 for Exterior Entry Signage.

150mm powdercoated aluminium flushglaze system (NALCO or Equivalent) c/w6mm toughened N-70 low e #2 / 12as / 8.38 laminated glazing (26mm).

4mm ALUCOBOND Aluminium Composite Panels 1350mm wide, c/wprofiled edge panel as detailed at 4050 crs.

Structural 610 UB Columns. Specified Paint finish.

400 x 400 x 10mm TIMARU BLUESTONE tile above paving on vertical face of precast panel, 10mm cement mortar bedding.

Terraced slab with 35mm thick x variable length TIMARU BLUESTONE pavers, cut at back to matchslope of ramp and adhesive fixed.

100mm reinforced concrete slab as substrate to 40mm pavers laid to 1:100 fall typically. Slab to be on25mm sand and compacted AP40 layers.

200mm thick basalt aggregate precast exterior panels PC34, PC35 &PC36 with 16mm sealant joints.Note Vertical edge of PC34 if to finish 16mm off main vertical wall of Stage3 Building, with Base details to be saw cut and removed to form channelwhere panel meets building. Make good each side of base once panelfitted, allowing to replaster and paint.Apply RESENE 2xcoats URACRYL 404 urethane clear sealer - low sheenover basalt precast.

double reinforced 190mm block walls to form planter with overall with(excluding TIMARU BLUESTONE tiles) of 500mm.

��

��

Hinged Powder coated aluminium door, doubled glazed to match mainentry door glazing.

40mm TIMARU BLUESTONE paver on 20mm screeded cementmortar bedding over insitu concrete steps.4 x sets of 45mm o.dia 316 S.Steel handrails with 316 S.Steelbalustrade posts @ 1000crs. Refer to Sheet A94.03.

Custom bollard light fitting (7 of).Refer to Electrical Consultant documents for full Specification.Base Plate fixing requirements to be confirmed by Lighting supplier.

90 x 32 hardwood slat seat on S.Steel brackets @ 600crs. Refer todetail 05/A94.03.

Double reinforced 140mm block walls to form planter with overall with (excluding tiles) of 500mm.400 x 4000 x 10mm TIMARU BLUESTONE tiles on 10mm cement mortar to both vertical faces and top of wall.

��

��

��

�

Rebate.

Rebate.

Parapet ApronFlashing.

REFER TO H & R STRUCTURAL ENGINEER DRAWINGS FOR ALLDETAILS OF PRECAST PANELS THAT FINISH BELOW FLOORLEVEL. THIS APPLIES TO PANELS PC35 TO PC54.NOTE THESE PANELS ARE PLAIN CONCRETE FINISH AS HAVETILES INSTALLED OVER FACE.

��

��

6.6°

RHW1

100dp

��

��

��

Glass Balustrade.

��

G5

Level 00

Level G1200

W1

400 x 400 x 10mm TIMARU BLUESTONE tile above paving onvertical face of precast panel, 10mm cement mortar bedding.

100mm reinforced concrete slab as substrate to 40mm pavers laid to 1:100fall typically. Slab to be on 25mm sand and compacted AP40 layers.

150mm powdercoated aluminium flushglaze system (NALCO orEquivalent) c/w 6mm toughened N-70 low e #2 / 12as / 8.38laminated glazing (26mm).

4mm ALUCOBOND Aluminium Composite Panels 1200mm wide tovertical face of roof Gables.

200mm thick basalt agg precast exterior panels PC1, PC2 with 16mmsealant joints (Not True Elevation).

10mm Galv.MS fins scribed to fit and 4fwar to All 610UB columns(3 of per column top).

10mm Galv.MS fins scribed to fit and 4fwar to All 610UB columns(5 of per column base).





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.TONGUE

DPG 2374 A30.40.0b

1 : 100

EAST ELEVATION1

1 : 100

SOUTH ELEVATION2

1 : 100

WEST ELEVATION4

1 : 100

SOUTH ELEVATION 23

A DEVELOPED DESIGN 07-10-10

B GLAZING UPDATED 07-03-11

C GLAZING OPTION 15-03-11

D GENERAL UPDATE 28-03-11

E GENERAL UPDATE 16-05-11


0a Panel Numbers Revised 04-07-11


EXTERIOR ELEVATIONSFOR TENDER 22.08.11

0b FOR TENDER 22-08-11

30x30x4 S.Steel "L" continuous bolted to wall @600ctrs, chase out back of stone for clearance &sawcut for bedding stone.Angles are required only at lintels and soffits etc.

RELN slot drain as sized and detailed byMechanical & Plumbing Engineer, c/w StainlessSteel pedestrian grating.

Leave open to allow for access for Mechanical plant, Electrical and Sprinkler.

Reinforced concrete slab to be designed by STRC.ENGINEER

FINISHED FLOOR

Sprinkler pipework concealed between aluminium joinery boxed out cover.50mm S.Steel downpipe is a similar detail on South side.Note Sprinkler pipework and downpipe will need pipe wrap insulation fitted.

200mm precast upstand panels to u/side of entry windows.

100mm thick OAMARU STONE slabs mechanically fixeddirect to precast concrete column.

12mm fibrous ceiling c/w 10mm negative detail to perimeter onGIB/RONDO suspended ceiling system.50mm KINGSPAN K12 insulation laid on top of solid ceiling.

100mm powdercoated aluminium flushglaze system NALCOFRONTLINE (or equivalent) c/w 6mm toughened N-70 low e #2/ 12as / 8.38 laminated glazing (26mm).

150mm powdercoated aluminium flushglaze system NALCOFRONTLINE (or equivalent) c/w 6mm toughened N-70 low e #2 / 12as/ 8.38 laminated glazing (26mm) continues through above Entry Portal.

20mm TIMARU BLUESTONE non slip tiles on 20mmplaster screed on reinforced concrete suspended slab(designed by STRC.ENGINEER).Note tiles to return up face of upstand and along topedge and run into aluminium joinery sill.

Apply SIKA Boom FRR spray insulation under gutter and cavity150mm each side of gutter once all services and installed.

150 x 150 x 10mm E.Angle to base of Aluminium Joinery fullywelded to back face of both PFC's.

12mm FIBROUS, stopped to a LVL 6 fin and painted direct fixed over 90x 45 MSG8 joists @ 600crs on BOWMAC JH90 x 47 Hangers fixed into90 x 45 MSG8 stringer each end. Allow for welded studs to Angle @800crs. M12 Trubolts @ 800crs into Precast Beam.

50mm powder coated alum doors or similar hung onHorizon AD automatic door gear completewith door hanger, pulley assembly, control box, chaindrive, motor gearbox, motor lock, backupbattery aluminium pelmet etc. Refer Manu specification

50mm thick IMPERIAL RED GRANITE slabsmechanically & chemically fixed to precast concretewalls with Steel angles & Megapoxy grout.Note Granite is to be on top of precast, on all sidesand cut in around opening for doors.Polish and bevelled 5mm edges to stone.

NURALITE 3P over 19mm C-D PLYWOOD direct S.Steelscrew fixed into 90 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 rafters @ 400crswith 90 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 timber blocking @ 600crs between.

2mm S.Steel folded gutter with Butynol folded downand turned up ends.Allow for proprietary S.Steel pressure seal along topedge to seal against 300PFC frame.

300 PFC to North and South Face above glazing, and spanning betweenMain Portal precast beams.

300 90 PFC

��

150 10 E.A300 90 PFC

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

150x90 PFC

150x90 PFC

dash

ed li

ne in

dica

tes

exte

nt o

f aut

o do

or h

ead

gear

.

dash

ed li

ne in

dica

tes

exte

nt o

f aut

o do

or h

ead

gear

.

50mm dia S.Steel downpipe.

Sprinkler Pipe.Electrical cabling

��

��1��/+ �� 1��/+

��

��

��

50mm powder coated alum doors or similar hung onHorizon AD automatic door gear completewith door hanger, pulley assembly, control box, chaindrive, motor gearbox, motor lock, backupbattery aluminium pelmet etc. Refer Manu specification

20mm TIMARU BLUESTONE non slip tiles on 20mmplaster screed on reinforced concrete suspended slab(designed by STRC.ENGINEER).Note tiles to return up face of upstand and along topedge and run into aluminium joinery sill.

INSIDEOUTSIDE

4 x sets of 45mm o.dia 316 S.Steel handrails with 316S.Steel balustrade posts @ 1000crs. Refer to detail.

40mm TIMARU BLUESTONE paver on 20mmscreeded plaster bedding over insitu concrete steps.

��

�

��

�

��

Oamaru Stone Portal (shown dashed beyond glass line).

Oam

aru

Ston

e Po

rtal (

show

n da

shed

bey

ond

glas

s lin

e).

��

�

300 90 PFC

��8��/+

1A54.02.0a

2A54.02.0a

3A54.02.0a

6A54.02.0a

7A54.11.0a

5A54.02.0a

4A54.02.0a

7A54.02.0a

8A54.10.0a

9A54.11.0a

100x50 RHS

50 oflow4

A54.10.0a

5A54.10.0a

4A44.02.0b

6A54.10.0a

��

��

��

��

��

3A44.02.0b

G10

G9

G4

G13

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

precast upstand panels to u/side ofmain windows.

��

��

100mm reinforced concrete slab as substrate to40mm pavers laid to 1:100 fall typically.

reinforced 140mm block walls to form planterwith overall with (excluding tiles) of 500mm.

Terraced slab with 60mm thick x variable length x100mm width TIMARU BLUESTONE pavers.

45mm o.dia 316 S.Steel handrails.

103.500 fin top of step

3.20m high exterior light above finished paver.Note light will need Foundation pad.

��

102.275 base of steps

ram

p ed

ge

200mm precast upstand panels tou/side of entry windows.

level fl

level fl

7 x 175mm risers

��

��

��

��#��,��

INTERIOR

EXTERIOR

103.575 fin(.515 slab)

103.700mfin floor

103.550 fin

103.575 fin(.515 slab)

150m

m ri

se to

sla

b

Gra

dien

t 1:2

5.





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A44.01.0a1 : 25

Main Entry - Plan & Sections1

1 : 100

Entry Portal Setout Plan2



MAIN ENTRANCE PLAN AND SECTIONSFOR TENDER 22.08.11


G10G9

Level 00

Level G1200

��

��

��

��

��

��

��2(+�'6�.��9��#��1�� 0

40mm TIMARU BLUESTONE paveron 20mm screeded plaster bedding.

100mm reinforced concrete slab as substrateto pavers laid to 1:100 fall typically.

Dashed line indicates perimeter of precast columns

Dashed line indicates perimeter of precast panelover doorway.

Foundation details to be confirmed by STRC.ENGINEER.

��

��-��"#�$��

��

��

��

��

��

ELEVATION TO EXTERNAL ENTRY PORTAL.

LOWER PLAN - precast.

UPPER PLAN - precast.��

��

Precast column as designed by STRC.ENGINEER.

Precast beam as designed by STRC.ENGINEER.

Precast column dashed below.

��

50mm powder coated alum doors or equivalent hungon Horizon AD automatic door gear complete withdoor hanger, pulley assembly, control box, chaindrive, motor gearbox, motor lock, backup batteryaluminium pelmet etc.Refer Manu specification

50mm thick IMPERIAL RED GRANITE slabsmechanically fixed to precast concrete walls withSTONECLIP proprietary system.Note Granite is to be on top of precast, on all sidesand cut in around opening for doors.

WHITE MARBLE carved signage finishing flush withexterior marble panel.Allow a Provisional Sum of $20,000 to supply andinstall Marble sign.

END ELEVATION.

��

��

��

��

��:��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

G10 G9

Level 00

Level G1200

��

��

ELEVATION TO INTERNAL ENTRY PORTAL.

LOWER PLAN - precast.

UPPER PLAN - precast.��

Precast column as designed by STRC.ENGINEER.

Precast beam as designed by STRC.ENGINEER.

Precast column dashed below.

��

��

��

��

��

Dashed line indicates perimeter of precast columns

Dashed line indicates perimeter of precast panelover doorway.

Foundation details to be confirmed by STRC.ENGINEER.

50mm powder coated alum doors or equivalent hungon Horizon AD automatic door gear complete withdoor hanger, pulley assembly, control box, chaindrive, motor gearbox, motor lock, backup batteryaluminium pelmet etc. Refer Manu specification

END ELEVATION.

��

��

��

��:��

��

�

��

��37(2�3�*�2;�'634(

100mm thick OAMARU STONE slabs mechanicallyfixed direct to precast concrete column.

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Oamaru Stone panel joints.

��

��

��

��

500mm dia overall circular Oamaru stone facing20mm proud of main wall and 40mm recess toinner circle (400mm dia).

Apply SIKA Boom FRR spray insulation under gutter and cavity150mm each side of gutter once all services and installed.

150 x 150 x 10mm E.Angle to base of Aluminium Joinery fullywelded to back face of both PFC's.

2mm S.Steel folded gutter withNURALITE 3Pfolded down and turned up ends.Screw fix Gutter into timber edge and 150E.Angle,with sealant behind. Fixings @ 400crs.

100x50 RHS

50 oflow

��

�

��

high point

NURALITE 3P over 19mm C-DPLYWOOD direct S.Steel screwfixed into 90 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 rafters@ 400crswith 90 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 timberblocking @ 600crs between.Chamfer all edges.

Sprinkler pipework concealed between aluminium joinery boxed out cover.50mm S.Steel downpipe is a similar detail on South side.Note Sprinkler pipework and downpipe will need pipe wrap insulation fitted.

12mm FIBROUS, stopped to a LVL 6 fin and painted directfixed over 90 x 45 MSG8 joists @ 600crs on BOWMAC JH90 x47 Hangers fixed into 90 x 45 MSG8 stringer each end.

Allow for welded studs to Angle @ 800crs. M12 Trubolts @800crs into Precast Beam.

8

A54.10.0a

12mm fibrous ceiling c/w 10mm negative detail to perimeteron GIB/RONDO suspended ceiling system.

50mm KINGSPAN K12 insulation laid on top of solid ceiling.

150mm powdercoated aluminium flushglaze system NALCOFRONTLINE (or equivalent) c/w 6mm toughened N-70 low e #2 / 12as /8.38 laminated glazing (26mm) continues through above Entry Portal.

2mm folded S.Steelgutter csk screw fixed @400crs into timber edge.

Backing rod and sealant, front & back under sill tray on packing.

Condensation tray as per detail 03/A5410

ULLRICH UA5854 32x3mm Equal angle embedded on sealant andriveted to u/side of angle to provide drip cover.

Continuous sealant bead to back of S.Steel gutter.

Allow for proprietaryS.Steel pressure sealalong top edge to sealagainst 300PFC frame.Refer to detail 04/A5410

10mm Granite tile adhesive fixed to u/side of soffit ofprecast entrance.

30x30x4 S.Steel "L" continuous bolted to wall @ 600ctrs, chaseout back of stone for clearance & sawcut for bedding stone.Angles are required only at lintels and soffits etc.

50mm thick IMPERIAL RED GRANITE slabs mechanically &chemically fixed to precast concrete walls with Steel angles &Megapoxy grout or equivalent.Note Granite is to be on top of precast, on all sides and cut inaround opening for doors.Polish and bevelled 5mm edges to stone.

90x45 MSG8 H1.2 timber plate over DPC and into precast withRAMSET LDU75 drive pins @ 600crs.

12mm Fibrous Plaster ceiling.Stop to a LVL 6 and paint in selected colour.

BEADEX shadowline trim to end of Fibrous plaster.

RONDO KEY-LOCK perimeter trim No 140.

RONDO KEY-LOCK top cross rail No 128 @ 600crs withsuspension supports @ 1200crs.

RONDO KEY-LOCK furring channel No 129 @ 400crsc/w locking key No 139.


3520 AFFL

��

�

��#%��<��,#��"�

top of PFCNURALITE 3P over 19mm C-D PLYWOOD direct S.Steel screwfixed into 90 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 rafters @ 400crswith 90 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 timber blocking @ 600crs between.Chamfer all edges.

Allow for proprietary 3mm S.Steelpressure seal along top edge to sealagainst precast.Fix with 6mm S.steel screws intoNylon masonry wall plugs @ 400crs.





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



Robert Tongue

DPG 2374 A44.02.0b

1 : 50

Entry Portal - Exterior1 1 : 50

Entry Portal - Interior2

ENTRY PORTAL ELEVATIONS & LOCATION PLAN.


1 : 5

Roof - Gutter over Main Entry4 1 : 5

Roof - Main Entry Stone Junction3

0a FOR SCHEDULING - Updated 21-06-11


FOR TENDER 22.08.110b FOR TENDER 22-08-11

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�� %� � � ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��%� � �

��

��

�

��

�� %� � � ��

��200

250

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Skirting from Stage 3 shown belowterminating into side of false column.

Extg Stage 3 concrete frame and opening.

Strapping and 12mm fibrous lining as partof Stage 3, finishing at start of column.

��

��

Extg ceiling at 4.00m above FFL



21mm drop tongue Rimu T&G flooring tocontinue through from Main Stage 4 Foyer.

12mm TIMARU BLUESTONE TILE on adhesiveon 9mm VILLABOARD to base of column andreturn into extg Stage 3 wall.

140 x 45 MSG8 TAN H1.2 framing withstuds @ 600crs / 12mm FIBROUSPLASTER stopped to LVL 6 paint finish.

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��%��#

��%� � �

��%� � �

��%� � �

9mm JAMES HARDIES TITAN Board wallcladding direct fixed to framing over SpecifiedBuilding wrap. Allow to stop smooth fill allscrew holes and paint in selected colour.

Secondary wall formed from 90 x 45 MSG8TAN H1.2 framing with studs @ 600crs /0.25mm polythene Vapour Barrier / 12mmFIBROUS PLASTER stopped to LVL 6paint finish.

90mm K12 insulation tight fitted and sealed incavity of 140x45 framing.

Precast opening shown dashed.

TITAN BOARD extended down as drip edge.

9mm TITAN BOARD soffit. Paint finish.

90mm K12 insulation tight fitted and sealedbetween 70 x 45 soffit bearers @ 600crs.

HERMAC PACIFIC drop tongue 21mm Rimutimber floor profile4 coat Polyurethane UROXSYS MCUV nonyellowing moisture cured polyurethane.

70 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 battens @ 400crs against thefloor direction and 600crs blocking between.

17.5mm MBH (Marine Bonded Hardwood plywood).


Extg Stage 3 concrete frame andopening (shown dashed).

Fibrous recess formed around Jamband Head as indicated.

190 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 fl joists @ 400crs hung on JH 47x 120 Joist Hanger 3 nails per flange. (4 flanges total).

Roofing upturned and sealed into slot.

0.55mm BMT AZ200 G550 Colorcote ZRXdown turn flashing rebated into plywood.

�

NURALITE 3P on 19mm CD grade H3.2PLYWOOD.

190 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 rafters @ 600crs fixed to190 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 Stringer (M12 trubolts @600crs) with JH47x120 hangers.

90mm K12 insulation tight fitted and sealedbetween soffit bearers. Allow for 70 x 19strips fixed to u/s of rafters to hold insulation inplace.

��%�%�#��

1. 5°

roof pitch

1A64.03.0a

2A64.03.0a

5A64.03.0a

6A64.03.0a

��

75 shs 75 shs

100mm thick site concrete between blds on DPM. Laid to1:200 fall so exits to South East corner of Building.Allow for all variances in between existing base detailsand columns to extg building.

LINK ELEVATION 1(Stage 3 Foyer)

LINK ELEVATION 2(Stage 4 Foyer)

LINK SECTION 1

Fibrous Moulding recessed into face ofOamaru Stone and adhesive fixed.Recess to have 50mm band toperimeter that is to finish flush withstone, inner face to be set back 12mm.

1050 x 590 x 100mm thick OAMARUstone. Clear Sealer finish.

12mm TIMARU BLUESTONE TILE onadhesive to base of column and return intoextg Stage 3 wall.

3

A64.03.0a

4

A64.03.0a

��

��





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A44.03.0a

1 : 25

Link Plan, Elevations & Section.1



LINK PLAN, ELEVATIONS & SECTION.FOR TENDER 22.08.11


Skirting from Stage 3 shown below terminatingat opening, allow to mitre and return intodoorway when Stage 4 opening constructed.

Extg Stage 3 concrete frame and opening.

Strapping and 12mm fibrous lining as part ofStage 3, finishing at start of column.

��%� � �

9mm JAMES HARDIES TITAN Board wall cladding directfixed to framing over Specified Building wrap. Allow to stopsmooth fill all screw holes and paint in selected colour.

90 x 45 MSG8 TAN H1.2 framing with studs @ 600crs /0.25mm polythene Vapour Barrier / 12mm FIBROUSPLASTER stopped to LVL 6 paint finish.

90mm K12 insulation tight fitted and sealed in cavity.

TITAN BOARD extended down as drip edge.


90mm K12 insulation tight fitted and sealed between70 x 45 soffit bearers @ 600crs.

20mm partical bd flooring with carpet / underlay overto match Auditorium.

70 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 battens @ 400crs against thefloor direction and 600crs blocking between.

190 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 fl joists @ 400crs hung on JH 47 x 120Joist Hanger 3 nails per flange. (4 flanges total).


0.55mm BMT AZ200 G550 Colorcote ZRX down turnflashing rebated into plywood.

�NURALITE 3P on 19mm CD grade H3.2 PLYWOOD.

190 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 rafters @ 600crs fixed to 190 x45 MSG8 H3.2 Stringer (M12 trubolts @ 600crs)with JH47x120 hangers.

90mm K12 insulation tight fitted and sealed betweensoffit bearers. Allow for 70 x 19 strips fixed to u/s ofrafters to hold insulation in place.

��

100mm thick site concrete between blds on DPM. Laidto 1:200 fall so exits to South East corner of Building.Allow for all variances in between existing base detailsand columns to extg building.

AUDITORIUM LINK SECTION 1

��

��

��

��

��

New Stage 4 precast wall.

��

��

��

��

PNT

S.SK

VP

12mm Fibrous plaster. Stop to LVL 6 and paint finish.

AUDITORIUM PLAN

��

2A44.04.0a

3A44.04.0a

Flashing details similar to 02/64.03.

Oamaru Stone wall.

Extg Opening above.

4

A44.04.0a

5

A44.04.0a

� �

��

9mm TITAN BOARD extended downas drip edge.


190 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 fl joists@ 400crs hung on JH 47 x120 Joist Hanger 3 nails perflange. (4 flanges total).

��

90mm K12 insulation tight fitted andsealed between 70 x 45 soffit bearers@ 600crs.

20mm partical bd flooring with carpet/ underlay over to match Auditorium.

��

��

�

�� !��"�#��"#��1��&

��

Profiled MDF skirting to matchexisting. Paint finish.

12mm Fibrous Plaster stopped to LVL 6.Paint finish.

9mm JAMES HARDIES TITANBoard wall cladding directfixed to framing over SpecifiedBuilding wrap. Allow to stopsmooth fill all screw holes andpaint in selected colour.

90 x 45 MSG8 TAN H1.2framing with studs @ 600crs

90mm K12 insulation tightfitted and sealed in cavity.

0.25mm polythene vapour barrier tape sealed.

Flashing chased into wall.

Carefully conc saw cut base offoundation and replaster level to allowfor timber battens to continue through.

190 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 fl joists @400crs hung on JH 47 x 120Joist Hanger 3 nails per flange.(4 flanges total).

200mm Precast wall panel c/wopening as required.

Refer to Detail 07/A64.00 for Rimu Droptongue flooring.

extg f.joists @ 460crs.

��

��

��

Allow for continuous timber packingover footing as indicated, withinsulation tight fitted between.

� �

��

ULLRICH UA 1109 50 x 25 x 3.0mm powdercoated aluminium angle to perimeter of floorwhere meets new Auditorium floor underdoorway. CSK screw fix into timber @ 400crs.

Profiled MDF skirting to match existing.Mitre at corners. Paint finish.

Solid core paint grade door in steel frame.


90mm K12 insulation tight fittedand sealed between 70 x 45 soffitbearers @ 600crs.

Roofing upturned andsealed into slot.

0.55mm BMT AZ200 G550Colorcote ZRX down turnflashing rebated intoplywood.

NURALITE 3P on 19mm CDgrade H3.2 PLYWOOD.

190 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 rafters @600crs fixed to 190 x 45 MSG8H3.2 Stringer (M12 trubolts @600crs) with JH47x120 hangers.

Wall construction as perDetail below.

�

90mm K12 insulation tight fittedand sealed between rafters. Allowfor 70 x 19 strips fixed to u/s ofrafters to hold insulation in place.

RONDO KEY-LOCK perimeter trimNo 140.

12mm Fibrous plaster. Stop toLVL 6 and paint finish.

RONDO KEY-LOCK topcross rail No 128 @ 1200crswith suspension supports @1200crs.

RONDO KEY-LOCK furringchannel No 129 @ 400crs c/wlocking key No 139.

RONDO KEY-LOCK TCRsuspension clip No2534 &Suspension rod No 121.

RONDO KEY-LOCK suspensionrod brack No534 screw fixed intoside of timber joist withappropriate wood screws.

2420 AFFL.

2700 AFFL.

��

2420 AFFL

High Point (shown beyond).

Roof Structure as per detail05/A64.03

Roofing upturned and sealed into slotwith SIKA AT FACADE.

��

��

Ceiling Structure as per detail 02/A44.04adjacent.

190 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 Stringer overDPC fixed with M12 trubolts @600crs.

1050 x 590 x 100mm thick OAMARU stone.Clear Sealer finish.

12mm Fibrous. Stop to a LVL 6 and Paint.

2/190x50 MSG8 Lintel Max span 2400mm crs.

��

2100 AFFL sim4

A54.03.0a





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A44.04.0a0 FOR SCHEDULING 01-06-11

1 : 25

Auditorium Link Plan, Elevations & Section.1

1 : 5

Auditorium Link - Floor.3 1 : 5

Auditorium Link - Floor to Floor5

1 : 5

Auditorium Link - Eaves2

1 : 5

Auditorium Link - Roof between Blds4


AUDITORIUM LINK PLAN, SECTIONS & DETAILS.FOR TENDER 22.08.11


Level 00

Level G1200

Level Ceiling7200

Bui

ldin

g ed

ge S

tage

1 (s

how

n da

shed

)

PC1PC2

Rebate.

Rebate.

Rebate.

��

��

��

��

Opening Opening

��

��

Opening Opening Opening Opening Opening Opening Opening

��

PC15PC16PC17PC18Opening

Opening

��

PC19

PC20

��

PC21PC22

PC23

250

UB

31 B

race

wal

l

250

UB

31 B

race

wal

l

250

UB

31 B

race

wal

l

250

UB

31 B

race

wal

l

Opening

��

��

21mm Rimu timber floor end matched, kiln dried to Moisture Content to match installation.4 coat Polyurethane UROXSYS MCUV non yellowing moisture cured polyurethane.17.5mm MBH (Marine Bonded Hardwood plywood).45mm K10 underfloor insulation board.70 x 45 TAN H1.2 battens @ 400crs against the floor direction and 600crs blocking between.Double Fix with SELLEYS direct Stick adhesive and RAMSET LDU75 drive pins @ 600crs.

Refer to STRC.ENG drawings for slab details.

140 x 45 MSG8 Tan H1.2 framing @ 600crs with 0.25mm polythene overface. Install 90mm K10 insulation into entire cavity tight fitted and sealed.

140 x 45 MSG8 Joists @ 1200crs - typically over Store 1 /Shop and Coat-Bag to support suspended ceiling rods.

150mm high coved Vinyl Flooring to Store 01 andCoat/Bag c/w pencil edge pvc moulding to top.

70 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 battens @ 600crs vert blocking @600crs / 12mm Fibrous Plaster wall linings to STORE 01 &COAT BAG. Stop to LVL 6 finish and Paint in selectedcolours.

Seismic apron flashing adhesive fixed down onto 19mm CD plywoodfixed on top of 90 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 Plate on DPC RAMSET drive pins @600crs into top of parapet and along face on new precast wall. Flashingto return down face of existing parapet 150mm.

Roof to Grid 4 Beyond

Outline of Stage 1 (shown dashed)

NURALITE 3P - 2 layer c/w Nurastone primer and 2 coats ofNuracolour on 19mm CD grade H3.2 PLYWOOD.

240 x 45 MSG8 TAN H3.2 rafters @ 400crs, spanning between precastand laid to fall down gutter. Blocking @ 600crs.

FLAMESTOP 524 Fire retardant Foil Vapour Barrier stapled @ 300crs tounderside of frame and all joints tape sealed along contnuous length of framing.

75mm KINGSPAN K12 KOOLTHERM insulation neat fitted between framing and sealed.

��

�� 70 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 battens @ 600crs vert blocking

@ 600crs / 12mm Fibrous Plaster wall linings toSTORE 01 & COAT BAG. Stop to LVL 6 finish andPaint in selected colours.

ARMSTRONG 1200x600 fine fissured angledtegular edge tile in PEAKFORM PRELUDE24mm XL suspension system.

5

A64.04.0a

6A64.00.0aCOAT / BAG.PLANT 02 SHOP STORE 01 PLANT 01

3A64.04.0a

6A64.04.0a

150mm high coved Vinyl Flooring to Store 01 andCoat/Bag c/w pencil edge pvc moulding to top.

5

A64.01.0a

Sim3

A54.03.0a

0.9mm AZ200 G550 Colorsteel ZRX cap flashing in max lengths, fixed using50mm wide x 0.55 Galv flashing clips @ 600crs.Allow for all expansion joints @ 8m crs with 100mm laps, clear silicone sealeddown each side and aluminium blind rivetted @ 50mm crs on one edge.DETAIL TYPICAL TO ALL PARAPETS.

190 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 ripped top plate (5 deg slope) on DPC fixed totop of parapet with RAMSET LDU75 drive pins @ 600crs.DETAIL TYPICAL TO ALL PARAPETS.

PC3 (on return)

Strap and line precast panel with 70x45 MSG8 H3.2 battens Horz @400crs - blocking 400crs on PDC and install over face 19mm CD H3.2Plywood. Continue NURALITE 3P - 2 layer up face of wall and over top ofconcrete parapet, allowing for all fillets to corners etc.45mm KINGSPAN K12 to cavity.

140 x 45 MSG8 Tan H1.2 framing @ 600crs with 0.25mm polythene overface. Install 90mm K10 insulation into entire cavity tight fitted and sealed.

Precast panels PC4 to PC13 (shown dashed)

Line of upstand from Main roof

0.9mm AZ200 G550 Colorsteel ZRX cap flashing

5

A64.06.0a





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A44.07.0a

1 : 50

Section Grid E1



SECTION - GRID E.FOR TENDER 22.08.11


��

��

��

�

E F G��

G4 G13

��

��

��

��

��

��63��(�+34/)2*(�

upper ceiling ��

��

�

��

4A64.04.0a

7A64.04.0a

1A64.04.0a

150mm powdercoated aluminium flushglaze system (NALCO or Equivalent)c/w 6mm toughened N-70 low e #2 / 12as / 8.38 laminated glazing (26mm).

200 x 150 RHS secondary post to glazing system. Allow for 70mm Neopreneinsulation packer between post and column for thermal break.

Purlins DHS 250/13 @ 600crs.90 x 45 MSG8 TAN H3.2 battens @ 600crs fixeddown to DHS 250/13 Purlins @ 600crs.Allow for blocking @ 600crs on top of DHS purlins.No insulation or Vapour Barrier.

4mm ALUCOBOND Aluminium Composite Panels 1350mm wideAllow for 100 x 100 EA at 1350crs run continuous slope of soffit to providefixing @ 600crs for panels.

610 UB 101 columns exposed to exterior, glazing runs behind main frame.

12mm Fibrous Plaster perimeter bulkhead and False beams on Grid Lines.

DECORTECH DECORSOUND 3/16 horizontal slotted 18mmTimber Veneer Panels.

200mm thick precast exterior panels typical.Wall on Grid F is to have 1050 x 590 x 100mmthick Oamaru stone to interior.Allow 50mm gap to take insulation.

Floor to be Corus ComFlor 210 floor system, 300 overallthickness (90 topping over pans).

21mm Rimu timber floor end matched, kiln dried to MoistureContent to match installation.4 coat Polyurethane UROXSYS MCUV non yellowingmoisture cured polyurethane.17.5mm MBH (Marine Bonded Hardwood plywood).45mm K10 underfloor insulation board.70 x 45 TAN H1.2 battens @ 400crs against the floordirection and 600crs blocking between.Double Fix with SELLEYS direct Stick adhesive andRAMSET LDU75 drive pins @ 600crs.

Beams at 4.050m crs 200 UB 25 within composite deck.Supported on unreinforced concrete blocks 800x800x1000mm high.

�

��

200mm precast panel with TIMARU BLUESTONE tile above paving onvertical face.

610

UB

101

610 UB 101230 PFC

380 PFC

200

prec

ast

200

prec

ast

200

prec

ast


Refer to Sheets A94.01 to A94.03 forLandscape details.

1A64.00.0a

��

1A64.05.0a

��

140 x 45 MSG8 Tan H1.2 framing lined with12mm FIBROUS over 0.25mm polythene,stopped LVL 6 and painted upto ceiling.Install 90mm K10 insulation into entire cavitytight fitted and sealed.(Note No linings above ceiling).

1A64.06.0a

5A64.06.0a

Insulated core around UB where penetratesInsulated wall. Typically K12 board built upfrom 100 & 50mm to give 150mm overall.

4A64.06.0a

��

�

��

��

�

75mm ground slab on 0.25mm polythene DPM on75mm ND40 hardfill.

��

102.95 extg RL

102.48 extg RL

approx extg ground line (dashed)





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R Tongue

DPG 2374 A44.11.0a

1 : 50

SECTION - GRID 11 - TYPICAL BUILDING SECTION.1


B UPDATE 28-03-11


0 BUILDING CONSENT 18-07-11 SECTION - GRID 11 - TYPICAL BUILDING SECTION.FOR TENDER 22.08.11 0a FOR TENDER 22-08-11

��

E F��

��

��

4A64.04.0a

7A64.04.0a

1A64.04.0a

200

prec

ast

200

prec

ast

1A64.06.0a

5A64.06.0a

4A64.06.0a

��

G4

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

G

��

��

�

��

��

�

��

G13

��

��

��

��

6.0°

roof pitch3.0°

roof pitch

1A94.02.0a

sim3

A64.06.0a

7A64.01.0a

6A64.02.0a

8A64.04.0a

9A64.04.0a

6A64.00.0a

200mm thick precast exterior panels typical.Wall on Grid F is to have 1050 x 590 x 100mmthick Oamaru stone to interior.Allow 50mm gap to take insulation.

Floor to be Corus ComFlor 210 floor system, 300 overallthickness (90 topping over pans).

21mm Rimu timber floor end matched, kiln dried to Moisture Content to match installation.4 coat Polyurethane UROXSYS MCUV non yellowing moisture cured polyurethane.17.5mm MBH (Marine Bonded Hardwood plywood).45mm K10 underfloor insulation board.70 x 45 TAN H1.2 battens @ 400crs against the floor direction and 600crs blocking between.Double Fix with SELLEYS direct Stick adhesive and RAMSET LDU75 drive pins @ 600crs.

Beams at 4.050m crs 200 UB 25 within composite deck.Supported on unreinforced concrete blocks 800x800x1000mm high.


140 x 45 MSG8 Tan H1.2 framing lined with 12mmFIBROUS over 0.25mm polythene, stopped LVL 6 andpainted upto ceiling.Install 90mm K10 insulation into entire cavity tight fittedand sealed. (Note No linings above ceiling).

140 x 45 MSG8 Joists @ 1200crs - typically over Store 1 /Shop and Coat-Bag to support suspended ceiling rods.

Vinyl Flooring to Store 01 and Coat/Bag.

5A94.03.0a

2mm No 4 finish S.Steel Rain Water Head.

101.6mm OD x 2mm wall 316 S.S dp fitted over spigot to base of RWH andwelded. Support off wall with purpose made 316 S.Steel holder batts @1500mm crs fixed into precast wall, profile similar to DB6 Holder batt.

0.9mm AZ200 G550 Colorsteel ZRX cap flashing in max lengths, fixedusing 50mm wide x 0.55 Galv flashing clips @ 600crs.Allow for all expansion joints @ 8m crs with 100mm laps, clearsilicone sealed down each side and aluminium blind rivetted @50mm crs on one edge. DETAIL TYPICAL TO ALL PARAPETS.

200mm Basalt Agg precast wall.

Acoustic Wall linings refer to detail 07 / A64.01

4mm ALUCOBOND panel with soffit joints at 1350mm crs, screw fixed @600crs as per Manu recommendations.Apply Sealant joint to all internal panels as well.

NURALITE 3P - 2 layer c/w Nurastone primer and 2 coatsof Nuracolour on 19mm CD grade H3.2 PLYWOOD.

250 DHS purlins @ 600crs.Note all purlins in contract with end precast wall will require SIKA FR BoomInsulation sealant to 150mm deep off face of walll to insulate and preventcold Bridging.

140 x 45 MSG8 TAN H3.2 purlins @ 600crs fixed down to DHS purlinswith LumberLok CP40 cleats to alternating sidesof rafter with 2/10g-16 zinc plated Hex heads.75mm KINGSPAN K12 KOOLTHERM insulation fitted hard down on

Vapour Barrier and sealed.

Bituthene self adhesive Vapour barrier over 17.5mmPLYWOOD fixed direct to DHS purlins. Allow to tape seal alljoints to prevent any air leakage.

Typical 0.90mm parapet cap flashing shown beyond.Detail similar throughout to Grid 11 - G12 parapet.

SIM

12mm Fibrous Plaster wall linings to STORE 01 & COAT BAGover Grid F precast wall. Stop to LVL 6 finish and Paint inselected colours.

12mm Fibrous Plaster wall linings to STORE 01 & COATBAG. Stop to LVL 6 finish and Paint in selected colours.

230 PFC230 PFC

��

��

75mm ground slab on 0.25mm polythene DPMon 75mm ND40 hardfill.

102.95 extg RL

102.48 extg RL

approx extg ground line (dashed)

��

��

150 PFC





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A44.12.0a

1 : 50

SECTION - GRID 11 + 2100.1




SECTION - GRID 11 + 2100.

slot drain

COAT / BAG. MAIN FOYER

FOR TENDER 22.08.110a FOR TENDER 22-08-11

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

15.0°

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

WINDOW TYPE 01NALCO 150mm FRONTLINE double glazed unit or equivalent.Glazing Specification is to be 6mm toughened N-70 low e #2 / 12as / 8.38 laminated glazing (26mm).

W01


W02, W05, W06 & W12


W03 & W04.


W07

WINDOW TYPE 05NALCO 150mm FRONTLINE double glazed unit or equivalent.Glazing Specification is to be 6mm toughened N-70 low e #2 /12as / 8.38 laminated glazing (26mm).

W13

WINDOW TYPE 06NALCO 100mm FRONTLINE double glazed unit or equivalent.Glazing Specification is to be 6mm toughened N-70 low e #2 /12as / 8.38 laminated glazing (26mm).

W08, W09, W10 & W11.

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

DOOR TYPE 3Solid Core Paint Grade Door Leaf c/w 2 vertical edges solid timberclashed hung in powder coated steel frame on 2 pair hinges.D3, D4 & D5.

��

��

PNT��

��

��

S.SK

VP

DOOR TYPE 4Solid Core Paint Grade Door Leaf c/w 2 vertical edges solid timberclashed hung in powder coated steel frame on 2 pair hinges.D6 & D7.Note Door D6 to be undercut 20mm.

��

��

PNT��

��

��

S.SK

VP

DOOR TYPE 5Powder coated Nalco Narrow Stile double French Doors set in 100mmFlushglaze frame. D8.

DOOR TYPE 2DOOR TYPE 1Powder coated Nalco Narrow Stile double Auto Doors set in 100mmFlushglaze frame. D2

Powder coated Nalco Narrow Stile double Auto Doors set in 100mmFlushglaze frame. D1

2

A54.03.0a

2

A54.03.0a





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A54.01.0a

Confirm wall thicknesses on site before commencing fabrication.

All exterior windows are viewed from the outside of the building.Interior window view is arbitrary, confirm required orientation on theplans.

All windows shown here are fabricated from 100mm and 150mmFRONTLINE FLUSHGLAZE and based on the NALCO profile.Alternatives are acceptable to Architect Approval.

All Glazing to be 6mm toughened N-70 low e #2 / 12as / 8.38laminated glazing (26mm) unless stated otherwise.

All fixing details are to Manufacturers Design and Specification.

Powder Coat Colour to be confirmed but pricing to be based onINTERPON ULTRIVA Anodic Slate Grey Matt YY218A

GENERAL NOTES - WINDOWS.

NZS 4223: TABLE 3.1 (ABRIDGED)Max. Areas of Safety Glazing Material for Fully Framed Glazing

ToughenedSafety Glass

Laminated SafetyGlass

Type of Glass Thickness Grade A Maximum Area (m2)

4mm5mm6mm8mm10mm12mm

6mm8mm10mm12mm

2.03.04.06.08.010.0

3.05.07.09.0

1 : 25

WINDOW SCHEDULE1

1 : 25

DOOR SCHEDULE2

Confirm wall thicknesses on site before commencing fabrication.All exterior doors are viewed from the outside of the building.Interior door view is arbitrary, confirm required orientation on the plans.

REFER TO A00.01 FOR ABBREVIATIONS.

All doors requiring electronic locking are to be provided with doorclosers by the door supplier.

DOOR HARDWAREAll hardware shall be mounted AS INDICATED to the center of thehandle AFFL.

GLAZED PANELS FOR FIRE & NON FIRE RATED DOORS- glazed panels to dimensions shown- 6mm laminated glass typical UNLESS noted otherwise under doorelevation.- beaded into door opening with beads as detailed b/s- glazing beads to be mitred at corners.

ALL ALUMINIUM DOORS ARE TO HAVE HARDWARE SUPPLIED BYTHE DOOR MANUFACTURER - CONFIRM TYPE WITH ARCHITECTBEFORE FABRICATING.

HARDWARE:All other Hardware excluding Aluminium doors are to beLockwood Locks and LW 3570-3574 Furniture.Schlage HingesDrake & Wrigley Pull Handles, Stops and Bolts.Dorma TS93 Closers Typical.

Refer to Door Hardware Schedule attached to ArchitecturalSpecification Appendix.

VENTILATION: UNDERCUT DOORSRefer to Mechanical drawings for all doors requiring to be undercut.

VENTILATION: DOOR GRILLESRefer to Mechanical drawings for all doors requiring to have door grillfitted.

AUTO DOOR GEAR - DOOR TYPE 1 & 2.Horizon AD automatic door gear complete with door hanger, pulleyassembly, control box, chain drive, motor gearbox, motor lock, backupbattery aluminium pelmet etc. Refer Manu specification.

Note both doors are to be connected to the Fire Alarm system and befitted with Fail safe open device.

GENERAL NOTES - DOORS.


WINDOW AND DOOR SCHEDULE.


FOR TENDER 22.08.11


40x20x1.6 Aluminium trim angle set insealant

10mm Granite tile adhesive fixed to u/side of soffit ofprecast entrance.

30x30x4 S.Steel "L" continuous bolted to wall @ 600ctrs, chase outback of stone for clearance & sawcut for bedding stone.Angles are required only at lintels and soffits etc.

50mm thick IMPERIAL RED GRANITE slabs mechanically &chemically fixed to precast concrete walls with Steel angles &Megapoxy grout or equivalent.Note Granite is to be on top of precast, on all sides and cut inaround opening for doors.Polish and bevelled 5mm edges to stone.

�

��

�

��

10 x 5 rebate to Jamb and across headof opening.

E12454shorts

E12439

�

��

Fixing to suit site conditions

40x25x3 Aluminium fixing anglefixed to frame & set in sealant.

10mm Granite tile adhesive fixed to u/sideof soffit of precast entrance.

10 x 5 rebate to Jamb and across head of opening.

� ��

NALCO 100mm FRONTLINE double glazedunit or equivalent.Glazing Specification is to be 6mm toughenedN-70 low e #2 / 12as / 8.38 laminated glazing(26mm).

� �

90x45 MSG8 H1.2 timber plate over DPC and intoprecast with RAMSET LDU75 drive pins @ 600crs.

12mm Fibrous Plaster ceiling.Stop to a LVL 6 and paint in selected colour.

SIKAFLEX AT FACADE 6mm sealantjoint c/w PEF backing rod to head.

� �

�

BEADEX shadowline trim to end of Fibrousplaster.


RONDO KEY-LOCK top cross rail No 128 @600crs with suspension supports @ 1200crs.

RONDO KEY-LOCK furring channel No 129@ 400crs c/w locking key No 139.

RONDO KEY-LOCK TCR suspension clipNo2534 & Suspension rod No 121.

��

�


3520 AFFL

E12441

��

��

��

E12440

E12441 E12440

NALCO 100mm FRONTLINE double glazedunit or equivalent.Glazing Specification is to be 6mmtoughened N-70 low e #2 / 12as / 8.38laminated glazing (26mm).

Horizon AD automatic door gearcomplete with door hanger, pulleyassembly, control box, chain drive, motorgearbox, motor lock, backup batteryaluminium pelmet etc. Refer Manuspecification.

Note both doors are to be connected tothe Fire Alarm system and be fitted withFail safe open device.

��

09135

09137

DGU as for others except external panel tobe opaque coloured glassto conceal doorgear behind.

Powder coated Aluminium Nalco Narrow Stiledouble Auto Doors

E12443 E12442

12139

NALCO 100mm FRONTLINE double glazed unit orequivalent.Glazing Specification is to be 6mm toughened N-70low e #2 / 12as / 8.38 laminated glazing (26mm).

Sealed end stops to sill tray.NURAPLY Al Vapor Barrier Waterproof membraneunder sill tray.

Packing as required.

Backing rod and sealant.

09135

09137

Bottom guide.

Powder coated Aluminium Nalco Narrow Stiledouble Auto Doors

20mm TIMARU BLUESTONE tile on 20mm plasterbedding, laid to fall to exterior.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to tiles.

40mm TIMARU BLUESTONE paver on 20mm plasterbedding, on 100mm reinforced insitu conc slab, laid tofall to exterior.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to all TimaruBluestone, vertical and horz faces.

fallfall

SIKA AT FACADE sealant joint with sill trayembedded.

�

level

�


� ��

50mm thick IMPERIAL RED GRANITE slabs mechanically& chemically fixed to precast concrete walls with Steelangles & Megapoxy grout or equivalent.Note Granite is to be on top of precast, on all sides andcut in around opening for doors.Polish and bevelled 5mm edges to stone.

��

��


40x25x3 Aluminium fixing angle fixed to frame & set in sealant.

10 x 5 rebate to Jamb and across head of opening.

SIKAFLEX AT FACADE 6mm sealant jointc/w PEF backing rod to jamb.

�

�

��

E12439Framemullion

E12416 Shorts40x20x1.6 Aluminum trim angle set in sealant

NALCO 100mm FRONTLINE doubleglazed unit or equivalent.Glazing Specification is to be 6mmtoughened N-70 low e #2 / 12as / 8.38laminated glazing (26mm).

NALCO 10826 INTERLOCKER

08558

10826

10826

Powder coated Aluminium Nalco Narrow Stile double AutoDoors, c/w all manufacturer seals and double door closer. 09137

DG BEAD

E12439Framemullion

E12416 Flat infill

Powder coated Aluminium Nalco Narrow Stile double AutoDoors, c/w all manufacturer seals and double door closer.

09132

12143 12143

09132

09137DG BEAD

09137DG BEAD

Glazing Specification is to be 6mm toughened N-70 low e#2 / 12as / 8.38 laminated glazing (26mm).

��

��

��

�

��


40x25x3 Aluminium fixing angle fixed toframe & set in sealant.

40x20x1.6 Aluminum trim angle set in sealant.

100 x 75 x 8mm MS Angle fixed to precast wallwith M10 Trubolts @ 600crs to Jamb.

E12439Framemullion

E12416 Shorts


SIKAFLEX AT FACADE 6mm sealant joint c/wPEF backing rod to jamb.

100mm thick OAMARU STONE slabsmechanically fixed direct to precastconcrete column.Allow to apply clear sealer over face ofStone.





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A54.02.0a

1 : 2

Door Type 1 Auto Door Head.1

1 : 2

Door Type 1 & 2 Pelmet.2

1 : 2

Door Type 1 Sill (Type 2 Sim - no sill tray)3

1 : 2

Door Type 1 Jamb6

1 : 2

Door Type 1 & 2 - Jamb & Door Stile5

1 : 2

Door Type 1 & 2 Meeting Stiles4

1 : 2

Door Type 2 Jamb7


DOOR DETAILS - TYPE 1 & 2.


FOR TENDER 22.08.11


12mm Fibrous Plaster. Stop to aLVL 6 and paint in selected colour.

90 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 timberframing with studs @ 600crs.

40mm solid core Paint grade door c/w10mm solid timber clashed vertical edges.

Standard metal jamb POWDER COATEDpaint finish fixed to stud with clips clout nailfixed onto frame.

��

��

��

��

Note Standard Satin Silver Anodised 22mm wide Aluminium Trim wouldbe an acceptable substitute as long as there is no additional cost.

solid timber beading to glass vision panel.

Glass thickness to comply with NZS 4223:1999,and Fire Door Manufacturer where applicable.

nail pin fixing

� �

��

��

��

Solid core door, paint finished, c/wsolid clashed edges 2 sides.

�� ""�2(=;)2(��+�(�2�>)�65 ��

12mm Fibrous Plaster. Stop to a LVL6 and paint in selected colour.

90 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 timber framing with studs @ 600crs.M10 Dynabolt (75mm min embedment) fix plate to jamband head for fixing of door frame @ 600crs.

40mm solid core Paint grade door c/w 10mm solidtimber clashed vertical edges.

Standard metal jamb POWDER COATEDpaint finish fixed to timber plate with clipsclout nail fixed onto frame.

��

��

��

��

1050 x 590 x 100mm deep OAMARU stonewith 50mm air gap held back to wall withSTONE CLIP ties @ recommended spacings.Return Stone into opening.

SIKAFLEX AT FACADE 5mm sealant joint c/wPEF backing rod to jamb.

SIKAFLEX AT FACADE 5mm sealantjoint c/w PEF backing rod to jamb.

70 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 battens @ 600crs vertblocking @ 600crs with DPC placedbetween conc and timber.Allow to fix to wall with RAMSET LDU75drive pins @ 600crs.

200mm precast concrete wall as designed by STRC.ENGINEER.

��

��

90x45 MSG8 H1.2 timber plate to openingthrough into Auditorium Link. Fix plateover DPC and into precast with RAMSETLDU75 drive pins @ 600crs.

45x19 MSG8 H1.2 continuous timber packer.Fix packer over DPC and into precast withRAMSET LDU50 drive pins @ 400crs.

12mm Fibrous Plaster ceiling.Stop to a LVL 6 and paint in selectedcolour.

90 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 timber framing withstuds @ 600crs.M10 Dynabolt (75mm min embedment)fix plate to jamb and head for fixing ofdoor frame @ 600crs.

SIKAFLEX AT FACADE 5mm sealantjoint c/w PEF backing rod to head.

Standard metal jamb POWDERCOATED paint finish fixed to timberplate with clips clout nail fixed ontoframe.40mm solid core Paint grade door c/w10mm solid timber clashed verticaledges.

200mm precast concrete wall as designedby STRC.ENGINEER.

M12 Trubolts (100mm minembedment)1-100mm in from each end and 1central fixing for Lintels upto 1200mmin length.Otherwise fixings to be at 600crs forlengths exceeding 1200mm.

150 x 150 x 10mm MS angle Lintel todoor head. Paint finish.


��

�

��

12mm Fibrous Plaster. Stop to aLVL 6 and paint in selected colour.

140 x 45 MSG8 H1.2timber framingwith studs @ 600crs.

40mm solid core Paint grade door c/w10mm solid timber clashed vertical edges.

Standard metal jamb POWDER COATEDpaint finish fixed to stud with clips clout nailfixed onto frame.

��

��

��

��

� �

�

6mm backed sealant joint, with12x12x2 powder coated angle tohead and jamb adhesive fixed toframe.

STOSILENT PANEL 15mm thick+ STOSILENT SUPERFINE2mm thick plaster with 36mmcavity.

9mm VILLABOARD liningsaround opening of doorway,overlined with StoSilent panelat head.200mm Basalt Aggregate precast concrete panel.

Clear sealer finish over.Refer to STRC.ENGINEER specification foraggregate facing details.

10g SS SCREWS @ 450 CTRS (Typical)

25x25x1.6 angle bedded onsealant.

Packing to Suit.

Continuous Air Seal.

Glazing Specification is to be 6mmtoughened N-70 low e #2 / 12as /8.38 laminated glazing (26mm).

Powder coated Aluminium NalcoNarrow Stile double french doors.

3003 AFFL

�2968 AFFL

��

�

� ��

��

DPC fitted between Framing andconcrete

3/140 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 lintel overopening with studs @ 600crs above/ 0.25mm polythene Vapour Barrier/ 90mm K12 insulation tight fittedand sealed in cavity.

Linings to be fixed horz @ 400crswith STO Primary Channel andSTO Direct Fix wall bracket.

STOSILENT PANEL 15mm thick +STOSILENT SUPERFINE 2mmthick plaster with 36mm cavity.

12mm Fibrous Plaster. Overlaywith TEXDECOR VINACOUSTICOXYGEN 9001 11 14 acoustic wallcovering as supplied bySwinsongroup, upto 3025mm fromtop of skirting.

9mm VILLABOARD liningsaround opening of doorway,overlined with StoSilent panel athead.

� ��

200mm BasaltAggregate precastconcrete panel.Clear sealer finish over.Refer toSTRC.ENGINEERspecification foraggregate facing details.

10g SS SCREWS @ 450CTRS (Typical)

25x25x1.6 angle beddedon sealant.

08797

08471

08797

8478

Packing to Suit.


6mm backed sealant joint, with12x12x2 powder coated angle tohead and jamb adhesive fixed toframe.

Powder coated AluminiumNalco Narrow Stile doublefrench doors.

Precast panel beyond

Angle to Jamb beyond.

Glazing Specification is tobe 6mm toughened N-70low e #2 / 12as / 8.38laminated glazing (26mm).

��

� ��

��

��

��

��%��#��

12mm TIMARU BLUESTONETILE on adhesive on 9mmVILLABOARD to base of wall.

12mm Fibrous Plaster. Overlaywith TEXDECOR VINACOUSTICOXYGEN 9001 11 14 acousticwall covering.

��

�

Basalt returns into opening.

20mm Timaru Bluestone tile tocontinue into opening and setonto 10mm min solid plasterbedding on 9mm VILLABOARDsubstrate. Allow for 5mm sealantgap each side of tiles.103.700 RL

(FINISHED FLOOR LEVEL)

��

Door treadplate.

Powder coated AluminiumNalco Narrow Stile doublefrench doors.

Precast panel beyond

Angle to Jamb beyond.

Glazing Specification is tobe 6mm toughened N-70low e #2 / 12as / 8.38laminated glazing (26mm).


Expoxy Mortar above.

NURAPLY Al Vapor BarrierWaterproof membraneunder sill tray.





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A54.03.0a

1 : 2

Door Jamb 90mm frame (Head Similar)1

1 : 2

Door Glazing Panel2

1 : 2

Door Jamb - Oamaru Stone.3

1 : 2

Door Head - Oamaru Stone.4

1 : 2

Door Jamb 140mm frame (Head Similar)5


1 : 2

Shopfront 100mm - French Door Jamb (D8)7

1 : 2

Shopfront 100mm - French Door Head (D8)6

1 : 2

Shopfront 100mm - French Door Sill8

DOOR DETAILS.


FOR TENDER 22.08.11


��#��$� �

G4.G5

��#%

��

610

UB

101

colu

mns

@ 8

.100

m c

rs.

6870mm AFFL

380 PFC MS Lintel to top ofWindow Head, welded toback of 610 UB Frame.

100 x 100 x 10 MS E.Angle @ 1350 crs.

��

�

��

4mm ALUCOBOND panel with soffit jointsat 1350mm crs and screw fixed at 600crs.

��

��

��

100 x 50 DURAGAL Channel - fixing asper STRC.ENG.

KINGSPAN K12 90mm insulatedpanel tight fitted and sealed betweenstuds / dwangs.

6mm RAB to external side of 90 x 45MSG8 H1.2 framing @ 600crs.Note Framed / Insulated wall occursfrom Head of Glazing to u/side of roofon Grids G1, G4, G5 & G11.

DANBAND Tape @ 400crs horz to help retain insulation in cavity.

KINGSPAN K12 70mm insulation formed around PFC.Allow to Adhesive fix top panel.

KINGSPAN K12 50mmpanel Adhesive andMechanically fix to PFC @600crsand incl for proprietarythin washers to each fixing.

SIKA FR BOOM foam sealant tofill air gap.

KINGSPAN K12 90mminsulation installed continuouslywithin PFC.Adhesive fixed. Fill any gapswith sealant, and where gapsare more than 5mmm use SIKAFR BOOM foam sealant.

�

KINGSPAN K12 70mm panel Adhesiveand Mechanically fix to u/s PFC @600crs and incl for proprietary thinwashers to each fixing.

INSULATION DETAILS AROUND PFC OCCUR ABOVE ENTIREWINDOW GLAZING ON GRIDS G1, G4, G5 @ G11.

4mm ALUCOBOND panel with soffit joints at 1350mm crs,screw fixed @ 600crs as per Manu recommendations.Apply Sealant joint to all internal panels as well.

40x50x1.6 Aluminium trim angle setin sealant and screw fixed into PFCat window installer recommendedspacings.

NALCO 150mm FRONTLINEseismic frame double glazed unit orequivalent.Glazing Specification is to be 6mmtoughened N-70 low e #2 / 12as /8.38 laminated glazing (26mm).

6870 AFFL.

PEF Backing rod and SIKA AT FACADEsealant, front and rear.

�

E12418

E12595

E12584 Fixings to suite site conditions.

7�2)('

�

�

12mm Fibrous Plaster ceiling.Stop to a LVL 6 and paint in selected colour.Note insulation not shown for clarity.

RONDO KEY-LOCK perimeter trim No 140screw fixed into back of timber plate.

RONDO KEY-LOCK top cross rail No 128 @ 600crs.


��

NURALITE 3P - 2 layer c/w Nurastone primerand 2 coats of Nuracolour on 19mm CD gradeH3.2 PLYWOOD.

�

Ripped packer to top of plate to allow for edgefixing of roofing substrate.Note packer will be sloped to allow for fall, and 75x 3 FH nails @ 400crs into top of timber plate.

300 PFC 90 fixed betweenprecast panels. Paint finish.

6mm plate welded between flanges each side inline with glazing to close off horz cavity of PFC.

Welded studs @ 600crs to fix ribbon board.

6mm End plate running parallel to PFC to bewelded between 6mm plates.

Allow for proprietary 3mm S.Steel pressure sealalong top edge to seal against 300PFC frame.Fix with 8g x 12mm long self drilling hex head316 S.Steel screws @ 400crs.

SIKA AT FACADE continuous sealant beadalong top section of proprietary pressure seal.

90 x 45 MSG8 H3.2rafters @ 400crswith 90 x 45 MSG8H3.2 timber blocking@ 600crs between.

7

A54.10.0a

40x25x3 Aluminium fixing angle fixed to frame &set in sealant

E12454SHORTS

E12439

40x30x1.6 Aluminium trim angle set insealant.


�


8

A54.10.0a

E12441 E12440

��

2995mm AFFL

3485mm AFFL

E12441 E12440


�

�

��

��

�

��

200mm precast panel with 400 x 400 x 10mmTimaru Bluestone tile above paving on vertical face.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to all TimaruBluestone, vertical and horz faces.

610 UB 101 columns exposed to exterior.

40mm Timaru Blue stone pavers on 20mmplaster bedding and 100mm reinforcedconcrete slab.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to allTimaru Bluestone, vertical and horz faces.

HOLYOAKE Model LD-615 style 2flange removable core.Note linear slots are continuousaround perimeter of Glazing, but notall are ducted (refer to HVACdocuments for penetrations throughslab and duct layouts).

20mm Timaru Bluestone tile each side of floor grill set onto 10mm min solidplaster bedding on 9mm VILLABOARD substrate. Allow for 5mm sealant gapeach side of tiles. Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to all TimaruBluestone, horz surfaces.

5 x 10mm thick decorative platereturns into web of frame.

20mm thick false base plate with 6-M20UNBRAKO SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREWS.

Condensation channel adhesive fixed between seismic frame and angle.Allow to form 6mm drainage holes through channel into main seismic frame @ 1000mm crs.Note condensation unit formed from ULLRICH UA1105 30x3mm powder coated angle andULLRICH UA1043 47x17x1.5 powder coated channel. Tappit fix UA1105 E.Angle @ 600crsinto precast concrete.

NALCO 150mm FRONTLINE doubleglazed unit or equivalent.

Refer to A64.00 for floor details.

E12443E12590

E12414

Sealed end stops to sill tray.

NURAPLY Al Vapor Barrier Waterproof membraneunder sill tray.


Backing rod and sealant, front & back.

400 x 400 x 20mm Timaru Bluestone tiles on slaband precast upstand carried into window frame.

40mm Timaru Blue stone paverson 20mm plaster bedding and100mm reinforced concrete slab.


200mm precast panel with 400 x 400 x10mm Timaru Bluestone tile above pavingon vertical face.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" toall Timaru Bluestone, vertical and horzfaces.

Sealed end stops to sill tray.

NURAPLY Al Vapor BarrierWaterproof membrane under sill tray.


Backing rod and sealant, front & back.

�

Allow for Plaster to bethickened to upstand to suitetile aligning with Oamaru Stoneand Granite Stone columnbeyond.

��

ston

e co

lum

n be

yond

.

6mm plate welded between flanges.

Aluminium cover plate below ceiling.

Sprinkler or downpipe into roof space.

150x90 PFC terminating to u/side of300x90PFC (shown dashed).

Once closer fitted allow to drill 8mmhole and fill cavity with SIKA BOOMFR sealant.

��

E12584

E12421

E12420

E12419

150x90 PFC

��

��

3mm powder coated Aluminiumcover plate to profile shown.

Sprinkler or downpipe intoroof space.

150x90 PFC, c/w 10mm baseplate & 2 M12 Trubolts.10mm mortar packing underbase plate.

Precast panel dashed below.

��

��

120 x 80mm Vertical recess inprecast panel below forservices.

��

40 x 40 x 5mm angle in cornerwith DPC seperation between.

150 long x 40 x 5mm thick cleatswelded to inside PFC @ 600crsto support vertical 40 x 5 E.Angle.Angle to go full height floor toceiling to provide cornerprotection.

40 x 5 EA.

40 x 5 EA.

40x25x3 Aluminium fixing anglefixed to frame & set in sealant.

��

��

��

��

�

��

��

Precast panel below (dashed)


Fixings to suite site conditions.

40x20x1.6 Aluminium trim angle set insealant and screw fixed into frame atwindow installer recommended spacings.


NALCO 150mm FRONTLINEseismic frame double glazed unit orequivalent.Glazing Specification is to be 6mmtoughened N-70 low e #2 / 12as /8.38 laminated glazing (26mm).

G4

�

��

�

E12584

E12421

E12420

E12419

E12416SHORTS

E12439

E12416SHORTS

E12439

E12588 E12441

��

��

3995mm AFFL

2995mm





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A54.10.0a

1 : 2

FlushGlaze 150mm Window Head.1


1 : 2

FlushGlaze 100mm Window Head.4

1 : 2

FlushGlaze 100mm Transom5

1 : 2

FlushGlaze 150mm Window Sill3 1 : 2

FlushGlaze 100mm Sill6

1 : 2

PFC Flange Closer.7

1 : 2

Flushglaze Internal Corner8

1 : 2

FlushGlaze 150mm Transom2

WINDOW DETAILS.


FOR TENDER 22.08.11


��

� ��

��

��

�

��

��

��

��



5 x 10mm thick decorative plate returnsinto web of frame above main 20mmfalse base plate all to same profile.

G

G4

G5

G6

G3

23.5°

23.5

°

SIKA FR BOOM foam sealant behindcloser and steel work.

150mm powdercoated aluminiumflushglaze system (NALCO or Equivalent)c/w 6mm toughened N-70 low e #2 / 12as /8.38 laminated glazing (26mm).

Structural Column design to beconfirmed by STRC.ENG

3mm Aluminium closer betweenalum seismic sections.

��



F

G1

�

��

�

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

HOLYOAKE Model LD-615 style 2 flangeremovable core.Note linear slots are continuous aroundperimeter of Glazing, but not all are ducted(refer to HVAC documents for penetrationsthrough slab and duct layouts).

20mm Timaru Bluestone tile each side of floor grillset onto 10mm min solid plaster bedding on 9mmVILLABOARD substrate. Allow for 5mm sealant gapeach side of tiles. Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to all Timaru Bluestone, horz surfaces.

Oamaru Stone wall. Seal vertical edgewith SIKA AT FACADE c/w PEFbacking rod.

Note where external wall fit 50mm K12insulation into cavity and 0.25mm polytheneVapour Barrier over face of Insulation andtape sealed.Allow to Adhesive and Mechanically fix to wall@ 600crs each way and incl for proprietarythin washers to each fixing.

200mm Basalt Aggregate precast concrete panel.Clear sealer finish over.Refer to STRC.ENGINEER specification foraggregate facing details.

��

��

Basalt terminates.

40x20x1.6 Aluminium trimangle set in sealant andscrew fixed into frame atwindow installerrecommended spacings.

NALCO 150mmFRONTLINE seismicframe double glazed unitor equivalent.Glazing Specification is tobe 6mm toughened N-70low e #2 / 12as / 8.38laminated glazing (26mm).

��

��

��

��

Precast Column - Refer to STRC.ENG drawings.

NALCO 100mm FRONTLINE double glazed unit orequivalent.Glazing Specification is to be 6mm toughened N-70 low e#2 / 12as / 8.38 laminated glazing (26mm).

Aluminium Joinery details similar to 06/A54.02

Notch out in precast full height for services.

50mm thick IMPERIAL RED GRANITE slabs mechanically& chemically fixed to precast concrete walls with Steelangles & Megapoxy grout or equivalent.Note Granite is to be on top of precast, on all sides andcut in around opening for doors.Polish and bevelled 5mm edges to stone.

��

��

��

��

40x25x3 Aluminium fixingangle fixed to frame & setin sealant.

40x20x1.6 Aluminum trim angle set insealant.

NALCO 100mm FRONTLINE doubleglazed unit or equivalent.Glazing Specification is to be 6mmtoughened N-70 low e #2 / 12as / 8.38laminated glazing (26mm).

SIKAFLEX AT FACADE6mm sealant joint c/w PEFbacking rod to each side ofjamb.

100mm thick OAMARU STONE slabsmechanically fixed direct to precastconcrete column.Allow to apply clear sealer over face ofStone.

Notch out in precast full height forservices.

Precast Column - Refer to STRC.ENGdrawings.

��

90 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 Plate fixed into columnwith RAMSET drive pins @ 600crs onDPC.

��

��

��

2.0mm folded alum cover adhesive fixedto frame and notched around transoms.Screw/adhesive fix to Alum windowsection.

150x100x9mm RHS stiffner to eachmullion. Base and head fixing referto STRC.ENG drawings.


Angle Fixing brackets @ crsdetermined by AluminiumInstaller. Fix into side ofmullion and back of RHS.

70mm neoprene packerbetween post andcolumn for thermalbreak.

140 x 45 MSG8 timber packer

250 x 150 x 8 RHSsecondary post to glazingsystem on Main grid linesonly.

3.0mm aluminium folded angles (2pieces 1 lapped behind other)cover adhesive fixed to frame andriveted at 600crs with 3.2� rivets@ 800crs.Bedded in sealant.

��

��

� ��

��

��

3mm folded Aluminium panel angle set insealant and screw fixed into frame atwindow installer recommended spacings.Allow for H3.2 packing as indicated withseperation layer (DPC) betweenSteel/timber and timber /Aluminium

30x3mm folded Aluminium angle set insealant and screw fixed into frame atwindow installer recommended spacings.

30x3mm folded Aluminium angle set insealant and screw fixed into frame atwindow installer recommended spacings.





Timber wall structure in front ofPrecast - refer to detail07/A64.01



Return detail similar to 07/A54.03

��

��

��





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A54.11.0a 1 : 5

FlushGlaze 150mm - Typical column2

1 : 5

FlushGlaze 150mm Jamb Detail - Grid G/G3.1

1 : 5

Flushglaze 150mm Jamb Detail - Grid G1/F6

1 : 5

Main Entry Portal - Flushglaze 100mm to Column7

1 : 5

Main Entry Portal Flushglaze100mm to Oamaru Stone Column9


1 : 5

Flushglaze 150mm - Typical Mullion3

1 : 5

Flushglaze 150mm - Grid 114

WINDOW DETAILS.


FOR TENDER 22.08.11


200mm precast panel with 400 x 400 x 10mmTimaru Bluestone tile above paving on vertical face.

�

��


�

40mm Timaru Blue stone pavers on 20mm plasterbedding and 100mm reinforced concrete slab.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to all TimaruBluestone, vertical and horz faces.

HOLYOAKE Model LD-615 style 2 flange removable core.Note linear slots are continuous around perimeter of Glazing,but not all are ducted (refer to HVAC documents forpenetrations thorugh slab and duct layouts).Contractor to allow to mitre at corners and modify asrequired to keep all joints in a uniform layout. Allow also toliase with Electrical Contractor in fitting of electrical pop upfloor boxes as indicated on the electrical drawings.

Floor to be Corus ComFlor 210 floor system,300 overall thickness (90 topping over pans)

��

20mm Timaru Bluestone tile eachside of floor grill set onto 10mm minsolid plaster bedding on 9mmVILLABOARD substrate. Allow for5mm sealant gap each side of tiles.

��

��

��

ULLRICH UA 1112 75 x 25 x 3.0mmpowder coated aluminium angle toperimeter of tiling to allow for 20mmexpansion gap.CSK screw fix into timber @ 400crs.

��

��

��

5 x 10mm thick decorative plate returns into web of frame.


��

��

�

�

�

�

C L

��

��

Dashed lines indicate 130wide x 1000mm long slotsin slab to take ducting from below.Refer to Mechanical Services drawings for location.

�

Condensation channel adhesive fixed betweenseismic frame and angle.Allow to form 6mm drainage holes through channelinto main seismic frame @ 1000mm crs.Note condensation unit formed from ULLRICH UA110530x3mm powder coated angle and ULLRICH UA104347x17x1.5 powder coated channel. Tappit fix UA1105E.Angle @ 600crs into precast concrete.

FINISHED FLOOR 103.700m RL.

NALCO 150mm FRONTLINE double glazed unit orequivalent, c/w 150 x 100 x 9mm RHS Stiffners.Glazing Specification is to be 6mm toughened N-70 low e#2 / 12as / 8.38 laminated glazing (26mm).

21mm drop tongue Rimu timberfloor as per details.

3A54.10.0a

HERMAC PACIFIC drop tongue 21mm Rimu timber floor profile end matched, kiln dried toMoisture Content to match installation.4 coat Polyurethane UROXSYS MCUV non yellowing moisture cured polyurethane.

��

��

45mm K10 underfloor insulation board.

�

70 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 battens @ 400crs against the floor directionand 600crs blocking between. Double Fix with SELLEYS directStick adhesive and RAMSET LDU75 drive pins @ 600crs.

17.5mm MBH (Marine Bonded Hardwood plywood).

SELLEYS "VBS" 2 pot epoxy Vapour Barrier system over concrete slab.

Fix T & G with SELLEYS direct stick Adhesive and secret nailing with 60mm staplesusing a pneumatic flooring stapler/hit up gun. Apply the adhesive direct onto the battensand follow manufacturers specifications.

Refer to detail 07 adjacent forfloor construction.

��

��

50mm air gap. Note where external wall fit50mm K12 insulation into cavity and0.25mm polythene Vapour Barrier overface of Insulation and tape sealed.All wall tie penetrations are to be sealed.

�

��

��

� �

��

�

200mm precast concrete panel

1050 x 590 x 100 Oamaru stone panels,with base notched out and grooved asindicated where skirting occurs.Stone fixed with "STONECLIP" or similarapproved fastening system to precastwall. Fastening centers and methodologyto be determined by Stoneclip Engineer.

�

25mm TIMARU BLUESTONE wall tileadhesive fixed to face of stone.Tile to finish flush with stone.

12mm TIMARU BLUESTONE TILE on adhesiveon 9mm VILLABOARD to base of wall.

Refer to detail 07 adjacent for floor construction

200mm Basalt Aggregate precast concrete panel

��

�

�

��""�*)4

�

�

140 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 framing with studs @ 600crs /12mm FIBROUS PLASTER stopped to LVL 6 paintfinish / 0.25mm polythene Vapour Barrier / 90mm K12insulation tight fitted and sealed in cavity.

DPC fitted between Framing and concrete

�4��436+5�3;6��3663*�3/�'6;�

2�%��, ��"�%�#��

Bottom plate on DPC fixed dwn with 12mmTrubolts @ 800crs.

200mm precast panel with basalt tileabove paving on vertical face.

610 UB 101 columns exposed toexterior.

�

Blue stone pavers and steps withwhite marble 50mm wide vision stripexpoxy to concrete steps.

��

7�2)('

��

�

22kg Carbon rail on Hardwood sleeper.Note Rails are attached to Josephine so newrails are not required. Allow to fix in place intonew 200 x 100 sleeper seated on DPC(contractor to supply and fix).

75mm bed of white gravel.

45mm K10 underfloor insulation board.Insulation cut around nib wall and sleepers.

45mm K10 underfloor insulation boardto vertical face of nib wall.

90 x 45 (MSG8/H1.2) framing @400crs.

5 x 10mm thick decorative platereturns into web of frame.

20mm thick false base plate with 6-M20bolts.

��

��2(+�'6

��

7�2)('

FLOOR LEVEL 103.700 RL.

APPROX EXTG G.LEVEL 103.000 RL(GRID G - G3/G6).

Refer to STRC.ENG drawings for design of slab under Josephine.

��

�+3*/�32

��

��.�*)4�+�(�2�4+(0

��

��

��

��

��

�

Floor to be Corus ComFlor 210 floor system, 300 overall thickness.

200 UB 21 floor bearers @ 4.050 crs.

Dashed line indicates 610 UBleg continuing down to padunder ground.

��

HOLYOAKE Model LD-615 style 2 flange removable core.Refer to detail 01 opposite for additional information.

Condensation channel adhesive fixedbetween seismic frame and angle.Refer to detail 01 opposite for additionalinformation.

C L

�

�

��

��-��#��,��!��"��8+�,#��

NALCO 150mm FRONTLINE doubleglazed unit or equivalent, c/w 150 x100 x 9mm RHS Stiffners.Glazing Specification is to be 6mmtoughened N-70 low e #2 / 12as / 8.38laminated glazing (26mm).

20mm Timaru Bluestone tile each side offloor grill set onto 10mm min solid plasterbedding on 9mm VILLABOARD substrate.Allow for 5mm sealant gap at tile edge.Allow to 5mm bevel all exposed edges.

Dashed lines indicate 130wide x 1000mm long slotsin slab to take ducting from below.Refer to Mechanical Services drawings for location.

��>)�(�6)�('

200mm precast panel with 400 x 400 x10mm Timaru Bluestone tile above pavingon vertical face.

21x170mm wide edge tile to perimeter offloor setdown. 5mm bevel edge.

� 75mm ground slab on 0.25mm polytheneDPM on 75mm ND40 hardfill.

3A54.10.0a

200mm precast panel with 400 x 400 x10mm Timaru Bluestone tile above pavingon vertical face.

�

��

40mm Timaru Blue stone pavers on20mm plaster bedding and 100mmreinforced concrete slab.

��

��

FINISHED FLOOR 103.700m RL.

NALCO 100mm FRONTLINE double glazedunit or equivalent.Glazing Specification is to be 6mmtoughened N-70 low e #2 / 12as / 8.38laminated glazing (26mm).HOLYOAKE Model LD-615 style 2 flange

removable core.

Suspended concrete floor bySTRC.ENGINEER

20mm Timaru Bluestone tile each sideof floor grill set onto 10mm min solidplaster bedding on concrete substrate.

Dashed lines indicate 100wide x 4000mmlong slot in slab to take ducting from below.Confirm final setout of slot beforeconstruction as outside edge of flange is toalign with Oamaru Stone column.

7�2)('

C L

��

Oamaru Stone Column shown beyond.

��

��

��

�

��""�*)4

�4��436+5�3;6��3663*�3/�'6;�

2�%��, ��"�%�#��

Minimum radius coving to vinyl

PVC pencil edge capping totop of vinyl

Selected floor vinyl.

SHOP (FUTURE) COAT / BAG

��

�

�





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A64.00.0a

1 : 5

Typical Upstand detail1

1 : 2

Typical Timber Floor Detail7 1 : 2

Oamaru Stone Skirting Detail4 1 : 2

Fibrous Plaster Timber Framed Skirting Detail5

1 : 5

Typical Lower Slab detail (Josephine)3

1 : 5

Typical Upstand detail - Main Entrance2

1 : 2

Vinyl Flooring Detail (Store 01 & Coat/Bag).6


FLOOR DETAILS.


FOR TENDER 22.08.11


��

� �

�

��

��

50mm K12 insulation into cavity and 0.25mm polythene Vapour Barrier overface of Insulation and tape sealed.Allow to Adhesive and Mechanically fix to wall @ 600crs each way and inclfor proprietary thin washers to each fixing.Insulation required to the entire length and height of the South Precast wall.

Acoustic Wall linings refer to detail opposite.

Oamaru Stone wall. Seal vertical edge withSIKA AT FACADE c/w PEF backing rod.

LUMBERLOK CF1 G300 Z275 Concrete fixing cleats@ 2400mm crs fixed to precast wall with 1-M12dynabolt 75mm min embedment.All holes fully nailed with 30mm x 3.15dia product nailsinto side of each stud. 3 cleats required per studincluding 1 at top of stud.

Note Vertical edge of Precast Aggregate panel PC32 isto finish 16mm off main vertical wall of Stage 3 Building,with Base concrete/plaster details to be neat saw cutand removed to form channel where panel meets brickwall of building. Make good each side of base oncepanel fitted, allowing to replaster and paint.

Extg Stage 3 Brick wall.

16mm SIKA AT FACADE sealant joint c/w PEF backingrod full length of panel joint, front and back of panel.Mortar packing between.

16mm SIKA AT FACADE sealant joint c/w PEF backing rod upvertical face of foundation base detail and along top of foundation.

16mm SIKA AT FACADE sealant joint c/w PEF backing rod upvertical face of foundation base detail and along top of foundation.

End stud to have LUMBERLOK CF1 G300 Z275Concrete fixing cleats @ 1200mm crs (1 each side)fixed to precast wall with 1-M12 dynabolt 75mm minembedment.All holes fully nailed with 30mm x 3.15dia product nailsinto side of each stud.

200mm Basalt Aggregate precast concrete panel.Clear sealer finish over.Refer to STRC.ENGINEER specification for aggregate facing details.

200mm precast concrete panel. Note above apron flashing panels are tohave basalt aggregate as will be visible to exterior (shown dashed).Clear sealer finish over both concrete and aggregate finish.Refer to STRC.ENGINEER specification for aggregate facing details.Note the South panels are to have backed sealant joints full height of panelas should be sufficent gap between buildings for access.

G12

16mm SIKA AT FACADE sealant joint c/w PEF backingrod full length of panel joint, front and back of panel.Mortar packing between.

S.Steel Rain Water Head indicated above (dashed).

250mm wide x 200mm high slot in precast for RWH(dashed).

��

101.6mm OD x 2mm wall 316 S.S dp fitted overspigot to base of RWH and welded. Support off wallwith purpose made 316 S.Steel holder batts @1500mm crs fixed into precast wall, profile similar toDB6 Holder batt.

F

��

��

��

��%��#�� #�# �

��#

"!��

Note where external wall fit 50mm K12insulation into cavity and 0.25mm polytheneVapour Barrier over face of Insulation andtape sealed.Allow to Adhesive and Mechanically fix to wall@ 600crs each way and incl for proprietarythin washers to each fixing.

1090 x 590 x 100 Oamaru stone panels, with basenotched out and grooved as indicated where skirtingoccurs. Clear sealer finish over.Stone fixed with "STONECLIP" or similar approvedfastening system to precast wall. Fastening centers andmethodology to be determined by Stoneclip Engineer.

25mm TIMARU BLUESTONE wall tileshown dashed below.

��%#��!�#"��,#��

200mm Basalt Aggregate precast concrete panel.Clear sealer finish over.Refer to STRC.ENGINEER specification foraggregate facing details.

200mm Basalt Aggregate precast concrete panel.Clear sealer finish over.Refer to STRC.ENGINEER specification for aggregate facing details.

140 x 45 MSG8 TAN H1.2 framing with studs @600crs / 0.25mm polythene Vapour Barrier / 90mmK12 insulation tight fitted and sealed in cavity.NO LININGS TO PLANT 01 or PLANT 02.


200mm precast concrete panel,(No Basalt).

No painting of walls to PLANT 01 and PLANT 02.

16mm SIKA AT FACADE sealant joint c/w PEF backing rodfull length of panel joint, front and back of panel.Mortar packing between.

16mm SIKA AT FACADE sealant joint c/w PEF backing rodfull length of panel joint, front and back of panel.

� ��

Tape sealpolythene toprecast.

Fix end studs over DPC and into precast withRAMSET LDU75 drive pins @ 600crs.��

E

��

��

��

��'�#

��'%�� #$�-�&

LUMBERLOK CF1 G300 Z275 Concrete fixing cleats@ 2400mm crs fixed to precast wall with 1-M12dynabolt 75mm min embedment.All holes fully nailed with 30mm x 3.15dia productnails into side of each stud. 3 cleats required per studincluding 1 at top of stud.

200mm precast concrete panel, (No Basalt).


Existing precast wall.

200mm Basalt Aggregate precast concrete panel.Clear sealer finish over.


16mm SIKA AT FACADE sealant joint c/w PEF backing rod fulllength of panel joint to inside face only where wall protected byapron cap flashing at top and backs onto Stage 1 precast.

extg 150mm dia dp and holder batts and overflowfrom stage 1 building adjacent to be relocated toposition shown. Allow to blank off section of extgspigot and overflow where downpipe was andform new spigot and overflow and installsalvaged downpipe including salvaged holderbatts. Allow for new drainage connection fromdownpipe to surface water drain. Allow to makegood precast wall where fixings such as bracketsand holder batts were removed.Note approx 8 Holder batts to be relocated.

STAG

E 1

STAGE 10.95mm AZ200 COLORSTEEL MAXX weltededged flashing let into new chase to Stage 1 andrebate in new Stage 2 panel end.SIKA AT FACADE sealant to both vertical joints

140 x 45 MSG8 TAN H1.2 framing with studs @600crs / 0.25mm polythene Vapour Barrier / 90mmK12 insulation tight fitted and sealed in cavity.NO LININGS TO PLANT 01 or PLANT 02.

Fix end studs over DPC and into precast withRAMSET LDU75 drive pins @ 600crs.

��

PLANT 01

��

E

SHOP(FUTURE)

COAT / BAG

140 x 45 MSG8 TAN H1.2 framing withstuds @ 600crs. Note this wall terminates100mm above 3000mm ceiling.

0.25mm polythene Vapor Barrier to continuethrough where opposing wall meets.

12mm Fibrous Plaster wall linings to bothsides. Stop to a LVL 6 finish and Paint inselected colours.

140 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 framing with studs @600crs / 0.25mm polythene Vapour Barrier /90mm K12 insulation tight fitted and sealed incavity.

12mm Fibrous Plaster wall linings toCOAT BAG and SHOP. Stop to LVL 6finish and Paint in selected colours.

F

G10

�

�

��

��

��


12mm Fibrous Plaster wall linings to bothsides. Stop to a LVL 6 finish and Paint inselected colours.

1050 x 590 x 100mm deep OAMARU stonewith 50mm air gap held back to wall withSTONE CLIP ties @ recommended spacings.Return Stone into opening.

200mm precast concrete wall asdesigned by STRC.ENGINEER.

BEADEX shadowline trim to endof Fibrous plaster.

E

COAT / BAG PLANT 02

LUMBERLOK CF1 G300 Z275Concrete fixing cleats @ 2400mm crsfixed to precast wall with 1-M12dynabolt 75mm min embedment.All holes fully nailed with 30mm x3.15dia product nails into side of eachstud. 3 cleats required per studincluding 1 at top of stud.

200mm precast concrete panel,(No Basalt).

Existing precast wall.

90 x 45 MSG8 TAN H1.2 framing withstuds @ 600crs. Note this wallterminates 100mm above 2700mmceiling.

12mm TIMARU BLUESTONE TILE on adhesive on9mm VILLABOARD to base of wall.

20mm Timaru Bluestone tile each side of floor grill set onto10mm min solid plaster bedding on 9mm VILLABOARDsubstrate. Allow for 5mm sealant gap each side of tiles.

200mm Basalt Aggregate precast concrete panel

140 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 framing with studs @ 600crs / 0.25mmpolythene Vapour Barrier / 90mm K12 insulation tight fitted andsealed in cavity.


Bottom plate on DPC fixed dwn with 12mm Trubolts @ 800crs.

�

�

��


140 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 framing with studs @ 600crs /0.25mm polythene Vapour Barrier / 90mm K12insulation tight fitted and sealed in cavity.

�

Ripped 70mm wide batten to suit cavity formed forSTOSILENT panel.



Ripped 45mm batten top and bottom to suit cavity forStone skirting.

STOSILENT PANEL 15mm thick + STOSILENTSUPERFINE 2mm thick plaster with 36mm cavity.


Paint negative detail.

Paint negative detail.

Linings to be fixed horz @ 400crs with STO PrimaryChannel and STO Direct Fix wall bracket.



12mm Fibrous Plaster. Overlay with TEXDECOR VINACOUSTICOXYGEN 9001 11 14 acoustic wall covering as supplied bySwinsongroup, upto 3025mm from top of skirting.

��

��

�

�

12mm Fibrous Plaster. Overlay with TEXDECOR VINACOUSTICOXYGEN 9001 11 14 acoustic wall covering.

� �

� �

HOLYOAKE Model LD-615 style 2 flange removablecore run along front of Acoustic wall with tiles either side.





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A64.01.0a

1 : 5

Corner detail3

1 : 5

Wall Detail - Grid G8/F2

1 : 5

Wall Detail - Grid G8/E1

1 : 5


1 : 5

Wall Detail - Grid G10/F5

1 : 5


1 : 2

Fibrous Plaster/Acoustic Wall Timber Framed Skirting Detail7


WALL DETAILS.


FOR TENDER 22.08.11


STONE 1: 1350 x 100 x 100mm deep OAMARU STONE tight fit andadhesive between 75 x 40 x 4mm DURAGAL channel.Setout starts at Grid G11 with full 1350mm long stone stone and goestowards Grid G1 @ 1350 crs.

STONE 3: 1350 x 100 x 100mm deep OAMARU stone with 1350 x 100 x 75mmVariable depth stone veneer as indicated (shaded), every second stone.

STONE 2: 1350 x 100 x 100mm deep OAMARU stone with 1350 x 100 x 85mmVariable depth stone veneer as indicated (shaded), every second stone.

1050 x 590 x 100mm deep OAMARU stone with 50mm air gapheld back to wall with STONE CLIP ties @ recommendedspacings.Note continuous horizontal Shelf angle will be required at midheight (3.0m AFFL).

Autex Quietspace Acoustic Panel 75mm high x 50mm thickcut to fit (shown hatched)

6

A64.02.0a TOP OF CEILING 6.00m AFFL

��

85mm deep

125 x 125 x 5 DURAGAL angle fixed to top of sloped wallas per STRC.ENG details.

Autex Quietspace Acoustic Panel 75mm high x 50mm thick cut to fit (shown hatched)

85mm deep

75mm deep

85mm deep

��

��

75mm deep

75mm deep

STONE 1:

STONE 2:

STONE 3:

��

��

STONECLIP

STONECLIP

STONECLIP

STONECLIP

Proprietary fixing clip "STONECLIP" or similar approved.Four clips required per stone. Allow to form chase in back ofstone to suit fixing system.

��

��

Mt Somers Linestone brush honed "Tips" where Points get tosharp for Oamaru Stone (less than 25mm)

1050 x 590 x 100mm deep OAMARU stone with 50mmair gap held back to wall with STONE CLIP ties @recommended spacings.Note continuous horizontal Shelf angle will be requiredat mid height (3.0m AFFL).

125 x 125 x 5 DURAGAL angle fixed to wall as perSTRC.ENG details.

��

�

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Autex Quietspace Acoustic Panel (AP) 75mm high x 50mmthick cut to fit. Fabric colour to be confirmed.Allow to adhesive fix to 70 x 25mm battens which in turn aretight fit and adhesive to DURAGAL channel.

HEIGHT VARIES WITH SLOPE.

4

A64.02.0a

200mm thick precast panel.

50mm K12 Insulating board where wall forms part ofexterior cladding.

��

��

Oamaru Stone Close fit into channel c/w adhesive.

75 x 40 x 4 DURAGAL channel - M10 set screw toUNISTRUT channel.

Adhesive to back of all stone against wall.

Nails into Oamaru Stone - 3 per stone.

32 x 32 UNISTRUT channels cast into precast wall @ 1500crs.

5

A64.02.0a

��

��1��1��""��%

200mm precast panel.

Proprietary fixing clip "STONECLIP" orsimilar approved.Four clips required per stone. Allow to formchase in back of stone to suit fixing system.

1050 x 590 x 100mm deep OAMARU stonewith 50mm air gap held back to wall withSTONE CLIP ties @ recommendedspacings.Note continuous horizontal Shelf angle willbe required at mid height (3.0m AFFL).

��

��

F G H

Level G1200

Level Ceiling7200

��

��

��

��

�

��

1A44.03.0a

OAMARU STONE ENTRY LINK

85m2 O.Sexcl entry

20m2 O.S22m2 O.S��

125 Duragal angle

Level G1200

Level Ceiling7200

��

3A64.02.0a

��

��

6.1°

��

�

6.1°

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

OAMARU STONE ACOUSTICWALL AS DETAILED BELOW.

OAMARU STONE STANDARD 1050 x590 x 100 WALL AS DETAILED BELOW.

25mm TIMARU BLUESTONE wall tileadhesive fixed to face of stone.Tile to finish flush with stone.Refer to Detail 04/A64.00

115m2O.S

7 x HOLYOAKE Jet Diffusers in East wall.Allow extra value for cutting in neatly around250mm dia units.

Allow extra value for cutting in aroundbulkheads where meet wall.��

125 x 125 x 5 DURAGAL angle fixed atmid-span. Fixing details to match top ofsloped wall.

125 Duragal angle125 Duragal angle

��

��""��9%��#��9��46'�

200mm precast panel.

32 x 32 UNISTRUT channels cast intoprecast wall @ 1500crs.

STONE 1: 1350 x 100 x 100mm deep OAMARU STONEtight fit and adhesive between 75 x 40 x 4mm DURAGALchannel.Setout starts at Grid G11 with full 1350mm long stonestone and goes towards Grid G1 @ 1350 crs.

��

75 x 40 x 4mm DURAGAL channel shown dashed.

M10 set screw to UNISTRUT channel c/w spring nut to fix75 x 40 x 4 DURAGAL channel to wall.

1 : 10

Oamaru Stone Acoustic elevation3

1 : 5

Oamaru Stone Acoustic Detail6 1 : 5

Oamaru Stone Horz detail4

1 : 100

Oamaru Stone Wall - South Interior Elevation.2 1 : 100

Oamaru Stone Wall - East Interior Elevation.1





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A64.02.0a

1 : 5

Oamaru Stone Acoustic Horz detail5


OAMARU STONE WALL DETAILS.


FOR TENDER 22.08.11


Apply RESENE 2 x coats URACRYL 404 urethane clear sealer - lowsheen over entire Oamaru Stone Wall faces.

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��


140 x 45 MSG8 TAN H1.2 framing with studs@ 600crs / 9mm Villaboard solid backing.Allow to fix proprietary Stone Clip system intoframing through villaboard.

Note where external wall fit 50mm K12insulation into cavity and 0.25mm polytheneVapour Barrier over face of Insulation andtape sealed.All wall tie penetrations are to be sealed.

200mm thick precast.

��

0.55mm BMT AZ200 G550 Colorsteel ZRX corner flashinglet into chase formed in precast and sealed with SIKA ATfacade.

Allow to lap flashing behind TITAN board cladding and overbuilding wrap and tape seal 200mm wide vertically up entirejunction.Apply SIKA AT facade to entire 10mm vertical joint at end of panel.

�

�

Dashed line indicates100 EA to perimeter ofceiling above. Mitre atcorners Paint finish.

��

Oamaru Stone terminates asindicated.

BEADEX shadowlinetrim to end of Fibrousplaster.

�

Secondary wall formed from90 x 45 MSG8 TAN H1.2framing with studs @ 600crs /0.25mm polythene VapourBarrier / 12mm FIBROUSPLASTER stopped to LVL 6paint finish.

75 MS SHS post and platesfixed down to new floor slabas per STRC.ENG details.

��

��

Flashing details noted above.Allow to form chase in extg brick /concrete frame to vertical face andalong top of roof of link.

Extg Conc frame.

Strapping and 12mm fibrous lining aspart of Stage 3, finishing at start ofcolumn.


K12 50mm insulation to entirecavity.

��

��

��

9mm JAMES HARDIES TITAN Board wall cladding direct fixed toframing over Specified Building wrap. Allow to stop smooth fillall screw holes and paint in selected colour.

90mm K12 insulation tightfitted and sealed in cavityof 140x45 framing.

Secondary wall formed from90 x 45 MSG8 TAN H1.2framing with studs @ 600crs/ 0.25mm polythene VapourBarrier / 12mm FIBROUSPLASTER stopped to LVL 6paint finish.

Dashed line indicates 100EA to perimeter of ceilingabove. Mitre at cornersPaint finish.

Allow to form columns inStage 3 generally from 90 x45 MSG8 framing with12mm Fibrous Plaster over.1 each side of extg opening.

Allow to form columns in Stage 3 generallyfrom 90 x 45 MSG8 framing with 12mmFibrous Plaster over.1 each side of extg opening.

Fix end studs over DPC andinto precast with RAMSETLDU75 drive pins @ 600crs.

��


0.55mm BMT AZ200 G550 ColorcoteZRX down turn flashing rebated intoplywood.

NURALITE 3P on 19mm CD grade H3.2PLYWOOD.

190 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 rafters @ 600crsfixed to 190 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 Stringer (M12trubolts @ 600crs) with JH47x120 hangers.

Wall construction as per Detail 02 / A64.03

�

90mm K12 insulation tight fitted and sealed betweensoffit bearers. Allow for 70 x 19 strips fixed to u/s ofrafters to hold insulation in place.

RONDO KEY-LOCK perimeter trim No 140.Allow for packing as indicated.


RONDO KEY-LOCK top cross rail No 128 @1200crs with suspension supports @ 1200crs.RONDO KEY-LOCK furring channel No 129 @400crs c/w locking key No 139.

RONDO KEY-LOCK TCR suspension clip No2534 &Suspension rod No 121.

RONDO KEY-LOCK suspension rod brack No534screw fixed into side of timber joist with appropriatewood screws.

100 MS E.Angle, M12 coach bolted to framing @600crs. Allow to mitre all corners and cut top flangewhere meets PFC and also extg Stage 3 Lintel.

BEADEX shadowline trim to end of Fibrous plaster.

��

� �

��

��

12mm TIMARU BLUESTONE TILEon adhesive on 9mm VILLABOARDto base of wall.

Refer to Detail 07/A64.01 for flooring.rip down bottom plate and notch outstuds to allow for 20mm gap betweenflooring and wall.

9mm TITAN BOARD extended down as drip edge.


190 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 fl joists @ 400crs hungon JH 47 x 120 Joist Hanger 3 nails perflange. (4 flanges total).

��


Precast opening shown dashed.

90mm K12 insulation tight fitted andsealed between 70 x 45 soffit bearers@ 600crs.

��

��

3400 AFFL

4800 AFFL

3400 AFFL

4000 AFFL

��

��

High Point (shown beyond).

Roof Structure as per detail05/A64.03

Roofing upturned and sealed into slotwith SIKA AT FACADE.

��

��

��

��

New 200mm thick Precast Panel.

Extg Brick wall.

Ceiling Structure as per detail 05/A64.03

190 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 Stringer overDPC fixed with M12 trubolts @600crs.

��

300 PFC 90 MS Lintel over Stage 3 PortalEntry Bulkhead with 75 MS SHS post andplates fixed down to new floor slab as perSTRC.ENG details.

100 x 10 MS E.Angle 5 FW top andbottom to 300 PFC to support baseof stone.

��

��

Fix bottom plate with M12 bolts @ 600crsand 50x3mm washers where bolt headmeets timber.


140 x 45 MSG8 TAN H1.2 framing with studs@ 600crs / 9mm Villaboard solid backing.Allow to fix proprietary Stone Clip system intoframing through villaboard.

90 x 45 MSG8 TAN H1.2 waling @600crs with 3/100x4mm nails into framingeach side.

Tylok Plate 2T10 each side of 90x45waling where meets stringer on wall. 90 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 Stringer over DPC

fixed with M12 trubolts @ 600crs.

100 MS E.Angle, M12 coach bolted to framing @ 600crs.Allow to mitre all corners and cut top flange where meetsPFC and also extg Stage 3 Lintel.

Base of extg Stage 3 Lintel.

Angle coach screwed @ 600crs intoLintel.

12mm Fibrous.Stop to a LVL 6 and Paint.

Walling as per detail opposite.

Stage 3 Ceiling. Allow to makegood once installed new opening.

��

��

2/240x50 MSG8 Lintel Max span3000mm crs.

� �

BEADEX shadowline trim to end ofFibrous plaster to entire ceiling perimeter.

��

��

��

��

(=;�� (=;��

6

A64.03.0a New 21mm Rimu floor to continueinto Stage 3 Foyer.

Timaru Bluestone tile c/w 10mmnegative to top.

Fit 70 x 45 MSG8 continuous battensscrew fixed @ 400crs with 12g x 3-1/2Steel woodscrews into each side ofextg 120 x 45 joists.Carefully conc saw cut base offoundation and replaster level to allowfor timber battens to continue through.

70 x 45 MSG8 floor battens @450crs cut between extg joists andscrew fixed into new battens fixed tosides of joists.

190 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 fl joists @ 400crs hungon JH 47 x 120 Joist Hanger 3 nails perflange. (4 flanges total).


200mm Precast wall panel c/w opening as required.

Refer to Detail 07/A64.01 for flooring.

extg f.joists @ 460crs.





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A64.03.0a

1 : 5

Link - Oamaru Stone column1

1 : 5

Link - Extg Column2 1 : 5

Link - Eaves5 1 : 5

Link - Floor.6

1 : 5

Link - Stage 3 Portal Entry Bulkhead3

1 : 5

Link - Floor to Floor4


LINK DETAILS.


FOR TENDER 22.08.11


��

15.0°

12mm fibrous plaster. LVL 6 stopped and paint.

100 x 50 x 4 Duragal channel @ 1350 crs, bolt fixedat each end. Refer to STRC.ENG dwg S412.

light fitting. Refer to Elec documents.

�

4mm ALUCOBOND panel with soffit joints at1350mm crs, screw fixed @ 600crs as per Manurecommendations.Apply Sealant joint to all internal panels as well.

140x45 MSG8 H1.2 continuous runner 50mm longM12 coach bolt fixed from back through angle flange@ 1350crs.Line face with 12mm fibrous plaster, LVL 6 stoppedand paint.

��

2400 x 1200 x 18mm DECORTECH 3/16 multi-groove MDF painted panel.Fixing to be FORMAN FASTMOUNT concealedfixing to setout as per manufacturersrecommendations (300mm crs typically toperimeter of each sheet and 600crs throughmiddle of sheet.

RONDO KEY-LOCK furring channel No129 @ 600crs c/w locking key No 139.

RONDO KEY-LOCK top cross rail No 128 @600crs with suspension supports @ 600crs.Note TCR is to run parallel with Decortech sheet.

Autex AAB 35-50 acoustic blanket.

90.0°5800mm AFFL

Ripped 45 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 timber nailed with100x4 FH into top of runner to provide sqr edge tofix ceiling perimeter trim.

6000mm AFFL

230 PFC fixed to bottom flange typically of 610 UBframe. Refer to STRC.ENG drawings.

50 x 6 E.Angle @ 1350crs. Refer to STRC.ENG dwg S412.

F

2400 x 1200 x 18mm DECORTECH 3/16 multi-groove MDF painted panel.Fixing to be FORMAN FASTMOUNT concealedfixing to setout as per manufacturersrecommendations (300mm crs typically toperimeter of each sheet and 600crs throughmiddle of sheet.

12mm fibrous plaster Bulkhead beyond onRONDO KEYLOCK system.

Oamaru Stone - Refer to Sheet A64.02

��

6000mm AFFL.

610 UB Portal Frame into 200mmprecast concrete wall.

��

��

RONDO KEY-LOCK furring channel No 129 @600crs c/w locking key No 139.Allow to provide furring channel to entire perimeterof each sheet.

RONDO KEY-LOCK top cross rail No 128 @600crs with suspension supports @ 600crs. NoteTCR is to run parallel with Decortech sheet.

Autex AAB 35-50 acoustic blanket.Refer to Ceiling plan for extent.


��

��

��

��

��

105.0°

RONDO No251 92mm x 0.55BMT STUD @600crs suspended from DHS purlins aboveroof and dropped down to bulkhead.Fix with M12 bolt c/w 50x50x3mm washereach side at head.

RONDO No251 92mm x 0.55BMT STUD @1200crs fixed between DHS purlins to providesupport angle braces each side.

G

RONDO No251 92mm x 0.55BMT STUD @600crs fixed between DHS purlins to providesupport for studs @ 600crs.

M12M12

M12

M12

M12

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

Braces @ 1200crs

610 UB Frame.

2400 x 1200 x 18mm DECORTECH 3/16 multi-groove MDF painted panel.Fixing to be FORMAN FASTMOUNTconcealed fixing to setout as permanufacturers recommendations (300mm crstypically to perimeter of each sheet and 600crsthrough middle of sheet.

PART CEILING PLAN

SECTION

2400 x 1200 x 18mm DECORTECH 3/16multi-groove MDF painted panel.(INSULATION OMITTED FOR CLARITY)

12mm fibrous plaster bulkhead.LVL 6 stopped and paint.

RONDO KEY-LOCK suspension rodNo122 c/w No534 self tapping screwscrew into side of steel purlin.

RONDO KEY-LOCK suspension rodNo122 c/w No124N suspension clip

RONDO No128Top Cross Rail(TCR)

RONDO No129Furring Channel.

��

��

RONDO No251 92mm x 0.55BMT STUD @600crs suspended from DHS purlins above roofand dropped down to bulkhead.Fix with M12 bolt c/w 50x50x3mm washer eachside at head.Allow for bottom track to base of studs.

RONDO No129 Furring Channel.

RONDO No128 Top CrossRail (TCR) @ 600crs

10A64.04.0a

��

��

� ��""�$��,�� $��?��#��

��

2400 x 1200 x 18mm DECORTECH 3/16multi-groove MDF painted panel.(INSULATION OMITTED FOR CLARITY)

12mm fibrous plaster bulkhead.LVL 6 stopped and paint.

RONDO KEY-LOCK suspension rodNo122 c/w No124N suspension clip

RONDO No128 Top Cross Rail (TCR)@ 600crs.



RONDO No128 Top Cross Rail(TCR) @ 600crs continues through


PEAKFORM PRELUDE 24mm XL suspensionsystem Main runner with Superlock clip.

ARMSTRONG 1200x600 finefissured angled tegular edge tile.

Prepainted Armstrong Long Leg wall angleBPT1932H.

PEAKFORM PRELUDE24mm Cross-Tee.

��

PLANT 01 STORE 01

CEILING 2700mm

140 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 framing with studs @ 600crs /0.25mm polythene Vapour Barrier / 90mm K12insulation tight fitted and sealed in cavity.





12mm Fibrous Plaster wall linings to COAT BAG andSHOP. Stop to LVL 6 finish and Paint in selected colours.

Vapour barrier continues upto roof.Staple to frame and tape seal to dwangs and studs.

DANBAND Tape @ 400crs horz to help retaininsulation in cavity.

70 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 battens @ 600crs vert blocking @ 600crswith DPC placed between conc and timber.Allow to fix to wall with RAMSET LDU75 drive pins @ 600crs.





12mm Fibrous Plaster wall linings to STORE 01 & COATBAG. Stop to LVL 6 finish and Paint in selected colours.

��

DPC between all timber wrk and Precast.

140 x 45 MSG8 TAN H1.2 framing with studs @600crs. Note this wall terminates at 3000mm ceiling.





SHOP STORE 01COAT-BAG.



��



CEILING 2700mm

CEILING 3000mm

JOIST 3210mm

140 x 45 MSG8 Joists @ 1200crs - typicallyover Store 1 / Shop and Coat-Bag to supportsuspended ceiling rods.

��

RONDO KEY-LOCK TCR suspension clip No2534 &Suspension rod No 121.

RONDO KEY-LOCK suspension rod brack No534screw fixed into side of timber joist with appropriatewood screws.

��

��

�

��

�

CEILING 3000mm

OPENING 3400mm

JOIST 3210mm

OAMARU STONE wall seated on lintel fixedback to precast wall.

M12 Trubolts (100mm min embedment)1-100mm in from each end and 1 every 600crs.

150 x 150 x 10mm MS angle Lintel to doorhead. Paint finish.

OAMARU STONE returns into opening.

5

A64.01.0a

Sim

12mm FIBROUS PLASTER.Stop to LVL 6 and Paint.

140 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 framing @ 600crs.

140 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 Joists @ 1200crs.Fix end of joists to sides of studs with 4-100x4mm FH nails - 2 each side skew into topplate (4 total) and 2 each side of Joist (4 total)

90 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 braces @ 1200crs fixedeach end with 3-100x4 FH skew nails

LUMBERLOK Multi-Grip each stud (600crs) tofix to top plate.

M12 Trubolts (100mm min embedment)@ 600crs to fix 140x45 MSG8 H1.2 (on DPC)top plate into u/side of precast panel.





RONDO top plate channel each side, parallel toDHS purlin and bolt fixed into purlin with M12bolts + 30x4mm dia washers @ 1200crs

RONDO No251 92mm x 0.55BMT STUDcut between purlins fixed at right anglesinto channel as per manufacturerspecification.

DHS Purlin

RONDO top plate channel.





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A64.04.0a

1 : 5

Bulkhead at Alucobond Ceiling4

1 : 5

Bulkhead at Oamaru Stone Wall.1

1 : 10

Bulkhead to Grid G7

1 : 5

Bulkheads - Intermediates.2

1 : 5

Ceiling - Plant / Store 16 1 : 5

Ceiling - Store 1 / Coat-Bag / Conc wall8 1 : 5

Ceiling - Store 1 / Coat-Bag / Int Conc wall9 1 : 5

Ceiling - Shop / Store 1 & Coat-Bag3


1 : 5

Bulkhead to Shop.5

CEILING DETAILS.


1 : 5

Angle Brace to Purlin10

FOR TENDER 22.08.11


G13

��

�

��

15.0°

10.0

°

��#��$� �

G4��

100 x 50 x 4 Duragal channels @ 1350 crs.

610 UB 101 portal frame @ 8.100m crs.

610

UB

101

colu

mns

@ 8

.100

m c

rs.

Purlins DHS 250/13 @ 600crs.

65 x 10 MS E.Angle to ends of trusscontinuous to edge of roof.Fascia to be fixed through top edge.

��

�

G4a��

4A64.05.0a

5

A64.05.0a

3

A64.05.0a

aluc

obon

d pa

nel

join

ts s

how

nda

shed

bey

ond.

pane

l joi

nts

beyo

nd.

6870mm AFFL to u/s PFC 380 PFC


��

��

610 UB 101 portal frame @ 8.100m crs.

Purlins DHS 250/13 @ 600crs.

90 x

45

MSG

8 H

1.2

fram

ing

@ 6

00cr

s.

1A64.06.0a

90 x 45 MSG8 TAN H3.2 battens @ 600crs fixed downto DHS 250/13 Purlins @ 600crs.Allow for blocking @ 600crs on top of DHS purlins.No insulation or Vapour Barrier.

4mm ALUCOBOND panel with soffit joints at 1350mm crs,screw fixed @ 600crs as per Manu recommendations.

Insulated core around UB where penetratesInsulated wall. Typically K12 board built up from100 & 50mm to give 150mm overall.Allow to Adhesive and Mechanically fix to wall &UB @ 300crs each way and incl for proprietarythin washers to each fixing.

1A54.10.0a

8556mm AFFL

�

��

7

A64.05.0a

sim

ALUCOBOND Folded soffit toEaves.

3.0°

Roof Pitch

�

��

��

��

��

��

�

��

200x100x6 RHS

50 x 6 EA outrigger frames @1350 crs.Refer to Strc.Engineer details onsheet S412.

200 PFC

Refer to Structural drawing S412 fordetails of fixing cleats to each end ofDuragal channel soffit supports.


140 x 45 MSG8 TAN H3.2 purlins @ 600crs fixeddown to DHS purlins with LumberLok CP40 cleats toalternating sidesof rafter with 2/10g-16 zinc plated Hex heads.

75mm KINGSPAN K12 KOOLTHERM insulationfitted hard down on Vapour Barrier and sealed.

G

G13

��"#� ��!!��:�� $��,&

edge

of A

lucob

ond f

ascia

edge of Alucobond fascia

��

��

�� %��#

�

�

��

G6

��%# ��

��!��/�'+)�

edge of fascia

u/s of soffit

typical soffit panel joint

top of fascia

fascia panel joint.

Line of roof valley on Grid G beyond, shown dashed.

��

250 x 150 x 8 MS RHS (shown dashed).

��

��

��

��Joint of Alucobond Fascia.

��

�

�

�

�


fall

fall

fall

fall

valley

8

A64.05.0a

��

100 x 50 x 4 Duragal channels @ 1350crs.

S.Steel screw fixing as determinedby Manufacturer/Installer @ 600crs.

High impact plastic shims as required.

4mm ALUCOBOND panel with soffit jointsat 1350mm crs.

25/1

1 LE

G

30/2

0 LE

G

Sealant on P.E.F. backing rod byAlucobond installer

�

25/11 LEG

30/20 LEG

�

�

��;

+3�34�

��4 �(

��

RONDO No251 92mm x 0.55BMTSTUD @ 600crs with stud directlybehind each vertical panel joint.S.Steel screw fixing as determinedby Manufacturer/Installer @ 600crs.


4mm ALUCOBOND panel with soffit jointsat 1200mm crs.

25/1

1 LE

G

30/2

0 LE

G


�

Building wrap as specified to Gable endsand all vertical surfaces.

��

�

Basalt Agg terminates 10mm fromedge of Alucobond Gable end.

RONDO No251 92mm x 0.55BMTSTUD @ 600crs with stud directlybehind each vertical panel joint.



4mm ALUCOBOND panel with verticaljoints at 1200mm crs.


Building wrap as specified to Gable endsand all vertical surfaces.

Flexible flashing tape, 100mm lap over wrapand tape sealed up entire vertical edge.

�

6x20mm Drainage slots, 100mm eitherside of panel joints and then as required

Continuous Sealant jointon P.E.F. backing rod byAlucobond.

��

High impact plastic shims as required

No 8 S.S. Screws @ 600crs

Building Wrap down face of Steel studframe.

90 x 45 MSG8 TAN H3.2 battens @ 600crsfixed down to DHS 250/13 Purlins @ 600crs.

Cantilvered purlins - refer toSTRC.Details.

��

NURALITE 3P on 19mm CD gradeH3.2 PLYWOOD, taken up over top ofParapet under Alucobond and downface 75mm.

ALUCOBOND fixing bracket screw fixto top of parapet

Parapet turndown & screwfixed to ALUCOBOND fixingbracket.

��

��

30mm LEG

��')@(�63�';)6(�'62+��

slop

e5.

0° M

IN

High impact plastic shims as required

��

S.Steel screw fixingas determined byManufacturer/Installer@ 600crs.

35 x 3 SHS - Refer toStrc.Engineer dwgs.

4mm ALUCOBONDpanel with soffit joints at1350mm crs.

25/1

1 LE

G

30/2

0 LE

GSealant on P.E.F. backingrod by Alucobond installer





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A64.05.0a

1 : 10

Typical Eaves detail1

1 : 25

Plan & Elevation of Nose Structure.2

1 : 2

Alucobond panel detail3 1 : 2

Alucobond panel detail24 1 : 2

Alucobond panel detail3 - vertical junction5

1 : 2

Alucobond-precast junction6

1 : 2

Alucobond Gable End7


ALUCOBOND DETAILS.

BUILDING CONSENT 18-07-110

FOR TENDER 22.08.11


1 : 5

Alucobond - Grid G - G to G6 Spline8

��

��

�

��


610 UB steel frame.

250 DHS purlins @ 600crs.

140 x 45 MSG8 TAN H3.2 purlins @ 600crs fixed down to DHSpurlins with LumberLok CP40 cleats to alternating sidesof rafter with 2/10g-16 zinc plated Hex heads.

3.0° ROOF PITCH

75mm KINGSPAN K12 KOOLTHERMinsulation fitted hard down on Vapour Barrierand sealed.


140 x 45 MSG8 TAN H3.2 blocking @ 600crs perpendicular tomain purlins.

100 x 25mm gap @ 600crs each way to allow for continuousventilation above insulation.

Proprietary Nuravent required every 20m2.7

A64.06.0a

��

��

�

�

��

0.9mm AZ200 G550 Colorsteel ZRX Apron flashing in max lengths, fixed using50mm wide x 0.55 Galv flashing clips @ 600crs.Note flashing to have 150 upstand above parapet folded and be lapped by0.90mm secondary apron flashing 20 x 20 chased into Extg Stage 1 Buildingto seal off gap between buildings.Allow for all expansion joints @ 8m crs with 100mm laps, clear silicone sealeddown each side and aluminium blind rivetted @ 50mm crs on one edge.

8100mm AFFL.

��

��


240 x 45 MSG8 TAN H3.2 rafters @ 400crs, spanning betweenprecast and laid to fall down gutter. Blocking @ 600crs.

Strap and line precast panel with 70x45 MSG8 H3.2 battens Horz @400crs - blocking 400crs on PDC and install over face 19mm CD H3.2Plywood. Continue NURALITE 3P - 2 layer up face of wall and overtop of concrete parapet, allowing for all fillets to corners etc.

FLAMESTOP 524 Fire retardant Foil Vapour Barrierstapled @ 300crs to underside of frame and all jointstape sealed along contnuous length of framing.

75mm KINGSPAN K12 KOOLTHERM insulation neatfitted between framing and sealed.

70 x 19 battens @ 400crs running perpendicular to rafters(directly under main roof blocking) to hold insulation inplace.

7�2)('

45mm KINGSPAN K12 to cavity.

�

Fix capping to flashing with 4.8mm dia aluminium rivets @ 600 crs max.

F

��

NURALITE 3P - 2 layer c/w Nurastone primer and 2coats of Nuracolour on 19mm CD grade H3.2PLYWOOD.

240 x 45 MSG8 TAN H3.2 rafters @ 400crs,spanning between precast and laid to fall downgutter. Blocking @ 600crs.

100 x 25mm gap @ 600crs each way toallow for continuous ventilation aboveinsulation.

Main roof Structure as per detail 01 adjacent.

��

��

200mm thick precast wall.

FLAMESTOP 524 Fire retardant Foil Vapour Barrier stapled@ 300crs to underside of frame and all joints tape sealedalong contnuous length of framing.

75mm KINGSPAN K12 KOOLTHERM insulationneat fitted between framing and sealed.

70 x 19 battens @ 400crs running perpendicular torafters (directly under main roof blocking) to holdinsulation in place.

610 UB portal frame.

240 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 Stringer over DPC fixedwith M12 trubolts @ 600crs. Detail similar toGrid E wall.

Allow to provide 20mm chamfer edge of PLYWOOD.

6870

7333 PARAPET

6000 CEILING

5800 U/S BULKHEAD

8100 PARAPET

G4a��

��

��

��

230PFC


250 DHS purlins @ 600crs.Note all purlins in contract with endprecast wall will require SIKA FR BoomInsulation sealant to 150mm deep off faceof walll to insulate and prevent coldBridging.

140 x 45 MSG8 TAN H3.2 purlins @ 600crs fixeddown to DHS purlins with LumberLok CP40 cleats toalternating sidesof rafter with 2/10g-16 zinc plated Hex heads.



140 x 45 MSG8 TAN H3.2 blocking @600crs perpendicular to main purlins.

Typical 0.90mm parapet cap flashing shown beyond.Detail similar throughout to Grid 11 - G12 parapet.

��

""�� ,

��""�� %��

��

��

��

2mm No 4 finish S.Steel RainWater Head.

250mm wide x 200mm high slot inprecast for RWH (dashed).

101.6mm OD x 2mm wall 316 S.S dpfitted over spigot to base of RWH andwelded. Support off wall with purposemade 316 S.Steel holder batts @1500mm crs fixed into precast wall,profile similar to DB6 Holder batt.

0.9mm AZ200 G550 Colorsteel ZRX cap flashing inmax lengths, fixed using 50mm wide x 0.55 Galvflashing clips @ 600crs.Allow for all expansion joints @ 8m crs with 100mmlaps, clear silicone sealed down each side andaluminium blind rivetted @ 50mm crs on one edge.DETAIL TYPICAL TO ALL PARAPETS.

190 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 ripped top plate (5 degslope) on DPC fixed to top of parapet withRAMSET LDU75 drive pins @ 600crs.DETAIL TYPICAL TO ALL PARAPETS.

��1��

��

50

25

�

200mm Basalt Agg precast wall.

LUMBERLOK CF1 G300 Z275Concrete fixing cleats @ 2400mm crs

Acoustic Wall liningsrefer to detail 07 / A64.01

RHW1 ELEVATIONBolt angle to PFC as indicated.refer to STRC.ENG drawings for fixing of PFC at ends between Grids 11 & 12.

90 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 gutter bearers @ 600crs blocked betweenStringer and 230 PFC which in turn has 2-190x45 MSG8 H3.2Stringers fitted within and bolted through @ 600crs with M12Engineers bolts.

75mm KINGSPAN K12 KOOLTHERM insulation neat fitted between framing and sealed.Note Wall vapour barrier continues up and under gutter and sealed to first DHS purlin stringer.

Fit raked K12 90mm insulation to slopeas gutter falls towards outlet and seal.

4mm ALUCOBOND panel with soffit joints at 1350mm crs, screwfixed @ 600crs as per Manu recommendations.Apply Sealant joint to all internal panels as well.

�140x45 MSG8 H1.2 continuous runner 50mm long M12 coach boltfixed from back through angle flange @ 1350crs.Line face with 12mm fibrous plaster, LVL 6 stopped and paint.

��#

��

70 x 19 battens @ 400crs running perpendicular to rafters (directly undermain roof blocking) to hold insulation in place.

Stone wall continues up into slope ofAlucobond.

2400 x 1200 x 18mm DECORTECH 3/16 multi-groove MDF painted panel.Fixing to be FORMAN FASTMOUNT concealed fixing to setout as permanufacturers recommendations (300mm crs typically to perimeter ofeach sheet and 600crs through middle of sheet.


RONDO KEY-LOCK top cross rail No 128 @600crs with suspension supports @ 600crs.Note TCR is to run parallel with Decortech sheet.

Autex AAB 35-50 acoustic blanket.

LIGHT

�

��1��

��

50

25

�

RHW2 ELEVATION

��

4 x OF.

3 x OF.

RWH1

Allow to provide 20mm chamfer edge of PLYWOOD.

��

230PFC

100 x 50 x 4 Duragal channel @ 1350 crs, bolt fixedat each end. Refer to STRC.ENG dwg S412.

50 x 6 E.Angle @ 1350crs. Refer to STRC.ENG dwg S412.


EF

��

Ceiling 6000 AFFL.

��

��

��

��

RWH2 RWH2 RWH2

��1��%

��152.4mm OD x 2mm wall 316

S.S dp fitted over spigot to baseof RWH and welded. Supportoff wall with purpose made 316S.Steel holder batts @1500mm crs fixed into precastwall, profile similar to DB6Holder batt.

2mm No4 finish S.Steel Rainwater head to dimensions shown.

Stainless steel screw fixing

75mm ventilation hole.

NURAVENT c/w s.steel cap fixedwith 3 x S.S rivets or screws.

H3 "C" face plywood to 1:40 falls min.glued & screwed to timber, all edgessupported on timber.

Nuraply 3P double layer system inselected color, refer to specification

H3 plywood plinth glued andscrewed to substrate

Plywood plinth

1:40 min fall 1:40 min fall

SECTION - TYPICAL

PLAN- TYPICAL ��

��

Nuraply 3P overflashingwelded to Nuravent.

NURAVENT c/w s.steel cap fixedwith 3 x S.S rivets or screws.

REFER TO MANUFACTURERSPECIFICATION AND DETAILS FORINSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.

�

��

Backing Rod.

Bevelled plywood edge.

NURAPLY 3P membrane

H3 "C" face plywood to 1:40 falls min.glued & screwed to timber rafters, alledges supported on timber

140 x 45 MSG8 TAN H3.2 purlins @ 600crs.

��*)4)*;*

��*)4)*;*

��Refer to Manufacturer Specifications and make allallowances necessary for expansion joints.





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A64.06.0a

1 : 10

Roof - Typical Nuralite 3P Detail1

1 : 10

Roof - Parapet to Extg Stage 1.4 1 : 10

Roof - Gutter Transition from Main to Low Roof.5


1 : 10

Roof - Internal Gutter & Parapet - Grid G11 to G12.3

1 : 25

Roof - RWH Elevation Grid E-F.6

1 : 10

Roof - Nuravent7

1 : 2

Roof - Expansion Joint2

ROOF DETAILS.


FOR TENDER 22.08.11


G4aG4G13

7333 PARAPET

��

8556

��

6000mm AFFL.

��

��

��

��

2

A64.07.0a

(A6(46�3/�4;2��<�2(6;24)4 ��3>4��2��(6�>��/�+(

edge of Nuraply roofing taken down face behind of Alucobond cladding (dashed).

3A64.07.0a

230 PFC

230 PFC

150 PFC610 UB

150 PFC

100x50x4 CC Duragalchannels @ 1350 50x

6EA

hang

ers

@13

50cr

s.

140 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 rafters / full depth blocking @ 600crs.

17.5mm PLY fixed to U/S of rafters between Grid 11 to end offramed up wall. Precoat Bituthene self adhesive Vapour barrier onply, fix to u/side and seal all joints from above.


ALUCOBOND parapet beyond.

Alucobond cladding over PLYWOOD terminating asindicated on Gable end Section above.

Gable end formed from 90x32 steel channels asindicated on STRC.ENG drawings - sheet S412

NURALITE taken up behind cladding on 17.5mm PLY.

��

2400 x 1200 x 18mm DECORTECH 3/16 multi-groove MDFpainted panel.

12mm fibrous plaster bulkhead. LVL 6 stopped and paint.

RONDO KEY-LOCK suspension rod No122 c/w No534 self tappingscrew screw into side of steel purlin.

RONDO KEY-LOCK suspension rod No122 c/w No124Nsuspension clip @ 600crs

RONDO No129 Furring Channel @ 600crs.

RONDO No128 Top Cross Rail (TCR) @ 600crs

610 UB (shown dashed)

sim3

A64.06.0a

7

A64.05.0a

sim

4

A54.11.0a

6

A64.01.0a

Sim

5

A64.05.0a4mm ALUCOBOND panel withvertical joints at 1200mm crs on90x32 steel channels as indicated onSTRC.ENG drawings - sheet S412.

0.9mm AZ200 G550 Colorsteel ZRX saddle flashing (showndashed) 150mm high x 150mm wide each side of parapetbehind Alucobond cladding and NURAPLY and lapped underparapet flashing 150mm riveted and sealed.

��

��

��

610

UB

colu

mn

7333 PARAPET

��

8556

��

6000 CEILING

G11

��'��4�3/�2�/6(2'��(2�� 2)��

140 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 rafters / fulldepth blocking @ 600crs.

250 DHS purlin and cleat

610 UB. Refer to STRC.ENG drawings.

PFC to gutter shown beyond.connection to 150 PFC in turnconnected to precast and 610UB.Refer to STRC.ENG drawings S413.

17.5mm PLY fixed to U/S of raftersbetween Grid 11 to end of framed upwall. Precoat Bituthene self adhesiveVapour barrier on ply, fix to u/side andseal all joints from above.

Parapet beyond.


140 x 45 MSG8 TAN H3.2 purlins @ 600crs fixed down toDHS purlins with LumberLok CP40 cleats to alternating sidesof rafter with 2/10g-16 zinc plated Hex heads.

Bituthene self adhesive Vapour barrier over 17.5mmPLYWOOD fixed direct to DHS purlins. Allow to tapeseal all joints to prevent any air leakage.

��-#

��

��

NURALITE 3P - 2 layer c/w Nurastoneprimer and 2 coats of Nuracolour on19mm CD grade H3.2 PLYWOOD.

4A64.07.0a

5A64.07.0a


Standard roof constructionfrom Grid 11 to Grid G6.

��

610 UB

230 PFC

150 PFC


sim7

A64.05.0a

90x45 MSG8 H3.2 framing to top of parapetripped to suite width of main parpet beyond GridG4 and accomodation PLY to external face

90x45 MSG8 H3.2 blocking as necessarybetween steel studs for fixing sheet edges.

Gable end formed from 90x32 steel channels asindicated on STRC.ENG drawings - sheet S412

140 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 rafters / fulldepth blocking @ 600crs.

17.5mm PLY fixed to U/S of rafters betweenGrid 11 to end of framed up wall. PrecoatBituthene self adhesive Vapour barrier on ply,fix to u/side and seal all joints from above.

NURALITE 3P - 2 layer c/wNurastone primer and 2 coats ofNuracolour on 19mm CD gradeH3.2 PLYWOOD.

ALUCOBOND parapet.

9mm CD PLY H3.2 precoated withBituthene self adhesive Vapour barrier,fixed to framing and seal all joints fromexterior before applying exterior Plywoodfor roofing.

NURALITE taken up behind cladding on17.5mm PLY.

Alucobond cladding over PLYWOOD takenaround corner of built up parapet upstand cladin ply and Nuralite.


140 x 45 MSG8 TAN H3.2 purlins @ 600crs fixed down toDHS purlins with LumberLok CP40 cleats to alternatingsidesof rafter with 2/10g-16 zinc plated Hex heads.

Bituthene self adhesive Vapour barrier over17.5mm PLYWOOD fixed direct to DHSpurlins. Allow to tape seal all joints toprevent any air leakage.

NURALITE 3P - 2 layer c/w Nurastoneprimer and 2 coats of Nuracolour on 19mmCD grade H3.2 PLYWOOD.

NURALITE taken up behind cladding on 17.5mm PLY.

250 DHS purlin and cleat

610 UB shown dashed beyond.Refer to STRC.ENG drawings.

��

90 x 45 block cut between purlins @ 600crs tosupport apex.Allow for continuous ply packing strip (min6mm) to top of blocking to support undersideof sheet joint.

Allow for continuous ply packing strip (min 6mm) totop of blocking to support underside of sheet joint.


90x45 MSG8 H3.2 blocking asnecessary between steel studs forfixing sheet edges.

Gable end formed from 90x32 steelchannels as indicated on STRC.ENGdrawings - sheet S412

9mm CD PLY H3.2 precoated withBituthene self adhesive Vapour barrier,fixed to framing and seal all joints fromexterior before applying exterior Plywoodfor roofing.

��


140 x 45 MSG8 TAN H3.2 purlins @ 600crsfixed down to DHS purlins with LumberLokCP40 cleats to alternating sidesof rafter with 2/10g-16 zinc plated Hex heads.

Bituthene self adhesive Vapour barrier over 17.5mmPLYWOOD fixed direct to DHS purlins. Allow to tapeseal all joints to prevent any air leakage.

NURALITE 3P - 2 layer c/w Nurastoneprimer and 2 coats of Nuracolour on 19mmCD grade H3.2 PLYWOOD.

90mm KINGSPAN K12KOOLTHERM insulation betweenstuds. Allow to fit into channelsection and seal any gaps.NURALITE taken up behind cladding on

17.5mm PLY.

��

��

��

��

��

��#%%��1��+� !��"��

5.0°

�

20 x 20 rebate in new precast panels to Stage 4.

0.90mm secondary apron flashing 20 x 20 chased into New Stage 4Building to seal off gap between buildings.Allow for all expansion joints @ 8m crs with 100mm laps, clear siliconesealed down each side and aluminium blind rivetted @ 50mm crs on oneedge.Fix capping to flashing with 4.8mm dia aluminium rivets @ 600 crs max.

0.55mm AZ200 G550 Colorsteel ZRX Apron flashing in maxlengths adhesive fixed to 19mm CD plywood. Allow for allexpansion joints as required.

90 x 45 ribbon board on DPC fixed intoprecast panel with 12mm Trubolts @ 800crs.

90 x 45 top plate on DPC fixed into extg parapet with12mm Trubolts @ 800crs (100mm min embedment).

70 x 45 framing @ 600crs laid to fall and fixed with 2-100x4FH skew nails each end into timber plate and ribbon bd.

Fix flashing to concrete with 6.5mm dia x 20mmmetal pin anchors @ 1000crs.

Extg Stage 3 Parapet.

Separation barrier between concrete/flashing (selfadhesive tape or similar.

Separation barrier.

100 x 50 x 4 Duragal channels @ 1350crs.



4mm ALUCOBOND panel with soffit jointsat 1350mm crs.25

/11

LEG

30/2

0 LE

G


610 UB - height varies -refer to Strc.Engineer dwgs.

Threaded rod and fixing cleats -refer to Strc.Engineer dwgs.





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A64.07.0a

1 : 25

Roof - Grid 11 Gable end1

1 : 25

Roof - Grid 11 to 12 Long Section2

1 : 5

Roof - Grid 11 Parapet4

1 : 5

Roof - Grid 11 Apex3 1 : 5

Roof - Grid 11 Base of Cladding - Roof.5


ROOF DETAILS.


1 : 5

Roof - Parapet Between Stage 3/46

FOR TENDER 22.08.11


1 : 5

Alucobond - Grid G - G6 to G8 Spline junction7

G4G4a��

��

��$��,�� $��"$��%��

�

3

A64.08.0a

5A64.08.0a

4A64.08.0a

��

100x50x4 CC Duragal channels @ 1350

50 x 6 EA hangers @ 1350 crs.

75 x 6 E.Angle.

610UB230 PFC

Insulated core around UB wherepenetrates Insulated wall.Typically K12 board built up from100 & 50mm to give 150mmoverall.Allow to Adhesive andMechanically fix to wall & UB @300crs each way and incl forproprietary thin washers to eachfixing.

380 PFC

2

A64.08.0a

4A64.04.0a

1A54.10.0a

Insulated core around SOLATUBE formed from AUTEX200mm thick R3.4 Building Insulation blanket adhesivefixed to Autex Vapour Barrier to outside face.Note this is a non-standard product and will require tobe manufactured.

��%� ��

#��

SOLATUBE extension tube.

SOLATUBE 0-30deg angle adapter tube.

SOLATUBE 750 DS-C Outer Dome curb cap

SOLATUBE Polycarbonate inner dome.

SOLATUBE Dome ring, dome seal,dome spacer and dome screws atmanufacturer fixing centres.

NURALITE 3P - 2 layer c/wNurastone primer and 2 coats ofNuracolour on 19mm CD gradeH3.2 PLYWOOD to upstand.

All SOLATUBE JOINTS & SEAMS TAPED WITH50mm FOIL TAPE (NOT SHOWN)

SOLATUBE bottom 0-30 degrees angle adapter tube.

90 KINGSPAN K12 toperimeter of each Solatube.

250 DHS purlin.

��

Apply SIKA Boom FRR sprayinsulation to perimeter ofSolatube extension tube toKingspan perimeter panel.

Solatube extension tube.

17.5mm plywood screw fixedto u/side of purlins with holecutout to allow extension tubeto pass through.



SOLATUBE DOME Seal

SOLATUBE DOME Spacer

SOLATUBE flashingembedded on continuousbead of sealant to perimeter.

��

��

7A64.08.0a

SOLATUBE diffuser anddiffuser frame.

90 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 framing blockedbetween DURAGAL channel, and screwfixed at each end. Allow for blocking to eachside between framing to provide timberframed support to all 4 sides of SOLATUBE.

100x50x4 CC Duragal channels@ 1350 crs.

SOLATUBE bottom 0-30 degrees angleadapter tube.

SOLATUBE square / round transition.

SOLATUBE natural effect lense.

��$��,�� $��"$��%��

�



6A64.08.0a

SOLATUBE Dome ring, dome seal,dome spacer and dome screws atmanufacturer fixing centres.

SOLATUBE flashing andflashing screws atmanufacturer fixing centres.

90 KINGSPAN K12 toperimeter of each Solatube.

250 DHS purlin.

Apply SIKA Boom FRR sprayinsulation to perimeter ofSolatube extension tube toKingspan perimeter panel.

SOLATUBE extension tube.

17.5mm plywood screw fixedto u/side of purlins with holecutout to allow extension tubeto pass through.

Double 140 x 45 MSG8 H3.2rafter screw fixed into DHSpurlin to line of Solatubes only.

NURALITE 3P - 2 layer c/wNurastone primer and 2 coatsof Nuracolour on 19mm CDgrade H3.2 PLYWOOD toupstand.

45 x 45 MSG8 H3.2 framing toperimeter of each Solatube.

45mm KINGSPAN K12 toperimeter.

Typical roof structure -Refer to detail 01/A64.06

SOLATUBE 0-30deg angle adapter tube.

��(6>((4��;2�)4'�)4��)4(�>)65�'3��6;�('



SOLATUBE DOME ring.SOLATUBE DOME Seal

SOLATUBE DOME SpacerSOLATUBE DOME screw.

SOLATUBE flashingembedded on continuousbead of sealant to perimeter.SOLATUBE flashing.

SOLATUBE flashing screw.

NURALITE 3P - 2 layer c/wNurastone primer and 2 coats ofNuracolour on 19mm CD gradeH3.2 PLYWOOD to upstand.

45mm KINGSPAN K12 toperimeter.

Apply SIKA Boom FRRspray insulation to perimeterof Solatube to framing.

Insulated core around SOLATUBEformed from AUTEX 200mm thickR3.4 Building Insulation blanketadhesive fixed to Autex VapourBarrier to outside face.Note this is a non-standardproduct and will require to bemanufactured.

100x50x4 CC Duragalchannels @ 1350 crs.

90 x 45 MSG8 H1.2 framing blockedbetween DURAGAL channel, and screwfixed at each end. Allow for blocking to eachside between framing to provide timberframed support to all 4 sides of SOLATUBE.

Allow to form cutout inALUCOBOND. Final size to beadvised by Solatube manufacturer,allow for 587mm.

Tape and staple paired back endof foil to framing.

SOLATUBE diffuser and diffuser frame.

SOLATUBE square / round transition.

SOLATUBE screw fixing into packingshims by builder.

SOLATUBE natural effect lense.

SOLATUBE lense seal.

SOLATUBE lense rung retainer.

SOLATUBE transition box lense tab.





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



Designer

Author 2374 A64.08.0a0 FOR SCHEDULING 01-06-11

1 : 10

Solatube- Typical section1

1 : 10

Solatube - Plan view through tube.3 1 : 10

Solatube - Plan view.2

1 : 5

Solatube- Lense detail5

1 : 5

Solatube- Dome detail4

1 : 2

Solatube- Dome Upstand detail6

1 : 2

Solatube- Lense7

SOLATUBE DETAILS.


FOR TENDER 22.08.11


10mm toughened Frameless Glass Balustrade c/w Powder coatedaluminium MetroGlasstech MGF BA 84 base channel (78 W x 84 High)c/w cover caps to conceal grout fixing. Allow for all fixings asdetermined by Manufacturer Installation Specifications including settingblocks & grout filling of channel.Note 5mm butt gap required between panels - refer to elevationsabove.

Floor to be Corus ComFlor 210floor system, 300 overallthickness (90 topping over pans)

20mm Timaru Bluestone tileset onto 10mm min solidplaster bedding on 9mmVILLABOARD substrate.Allow for 5mm sealant gapbetween tile and glazingchannel.

��

ULLRICH UA 1112 75 x 25 x3.0mm powder coated aluminiumangle to perimeter of tiling toallow for 20mm expansion gap.CSK screw fix into timber @400crs.

��

��

��

�

21mm drop tongue Rimutimber floor as per detail07/A64.00.

��

��

��

� � � �

120mm EPS to pack up slabbetween Grid G8 and step down.

��

Bevel top edge of glass both sides.

��

75mm bed of white gravel.

45mm K10 underfloorinsulation board.Insulation cut around nib walland sleepers.

GB1 GB2 GB3

GB4 GB5

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

10mm toughened Frameless Glass Balustrade.

5mm butt gap required between panels.

Powder coated aluminium MetroGlasstechMGF BA 84 base channel (78 W x 84 High)c/w cover caps to conceal grout fixing.Allow for all fixings as determined byManufacturer Installation Specificationsincluding setting blocks & grout filling ofchannel.

G

G7

G4

G2

GB5

GB4

GB3

GB2

GB1

fall fall

��

��

10mm toughened Frameless Glass Balustrade c/w Powder coatedaluminium MetroGlasstech MGF BA 84 base channel (78 W x 84 High)c/w cover caps to conceal grout fixing. Allow for all fixings as determinedby Manufacturer Installation Specifications including setting blocks & groutfilling of channel.Note 5mm butt gap required between panels - refer to elevations adjacent.

40mm Timaru Bluestone tile set onto20mm min solid plaster bedding on 20series blockwork. Allow for 5mmsealant gap between tile and glazingchannel.

Bevel top edge of glass both sides.

10mm Timaru Bluestonetile set onto 10mm minsolid plaster bedding on20 series blockwork wall.

Allow to 5mm bevel all edges.

��

130mm EPS between blockwork tosupport 75mm concrete infillbetween.

��

G11

G12

G4

G13

GB8

GB7GB6

GB6

GB7

��

��

��

��

��

��

GB8

��

��

��





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A64.10.0a

1 : 5

Glass Balustrade - Interior3


1 : 25

Glass Balustrade Elevations - Interior1

1 : 100

Glass Balustrade Plan - Interior2

Direction Elevations Viewed From

1 : 5

Glass Balustrade - Exterior4 1 : 100

Glass Balustrade Plan - Exterior5

Direction Elevations Viewed From

1 : 25

Glass Balustrade Elevations - Exterior6

GLASS BALUSTRADE DETAILS.


FOR TENDER 22.08.11


6870mm AFFL

6000mm AFFL

0.000mm AFFL (103.700 RL)

��

TYPICAL ELEVATION OF COLUMN(FRAMES G9, G10 & G11 INDICATED)

-120.0mm AFFL (103.580 RL)

��

��

��

��%��!��#$

��

��

�

��

�

��

�

��

7�2)('

20mm thick Architectural false Base Plate isto finish 5mm above pavers.Set down below slab is as per table above.

Refer to STRC.ENG drawings for base plateto foundation details.

5 x 10mm thick Architectural False Plates tosetout shown.

� ��

�

4

A64.11.0a

BASE OF COLUMN FINISHED ABOVE PAVER LEVEL.

G1: 102.780 RL - confirmG2: 102.750 RL - confirm

G7: 103.290 RL - confirmG8: 103. 465 RL - confirmG9: 103.580 RLG10: 103.580 RLG11: 103.580 RL

250

x 15

0 x

6 R

HS

to G

rid L

ines

beh

ind

Mai

n St

ruct

ural

col

umns

onl

y.

610

UB

101

610 UB 101

380 PFC

200x75 PFC 200x100x6 RHS

dashed line indicates finished

face of Alucobond

3 x 10mm thick Architectural False Platesto setout shown.

�

��

��

�

� ��

��

�

20mm thick Architectural false Top Plate to 15 degree slopeto finish flush with Alucobond.Allow for 6-M20 UNBRAKO SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREWSsetout to match base plate.

��

��

��

��

2

A64.11.0a

3

A64.11.0a

Specified Paint finish to all Steel work.Refer to Architectural Specification.

��

� ��

��

��

20mm thick false base plate with 6-M20 UNBRAKO SOCKET HEAD CAPSCREWS.

610 UB 101 columns exposed toexterior.


5 x 10mm thick decorative plates donot have holes for bolts (plate only).

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

6870mm AFFL

6000mm AFFL

0.000mm AFFL(103.700 RL)

(103.000 RL)

��

� ��

��

6

A64.11.0a

��

�

�

5A64.11.0a

Specified Paint finishto all Steel work.Refer to ArchitecturalSpecification.

20mm thick false base plate with7-M20 UNBRAKO SOCKETHEAD CAP SCREWS.

5 x 10mm thick decorative platereturns into web of frame abovemain 20mm false base plate allto same profile.

5 x 10mm thick decorative plates donot have holes for bolts (plate only).

Profiled column. Refer toSTRC.ENG drawings S411.

��

��

��

��

� �

��

��

��

soffit

�

�

slope

slope

PLAN

SIDEELEVATION

FRONTELEVATION

��

��

�


3 x 10mm thick decorativeplate returns into web offrame below main 20mmfalse base plate all tosame profile.Plates do not have holesfor bolts.








CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A64.11.0a

1 : 25

Structural Columns G1, G2, G7 to G111 1 : 10

Column top and base plate setout4

1 : 10

Column top elevation2

1 : 10

Column base elevation3


1 : 25

Structural Column Grid G7 1 : 10

Column on Grid G - Base Plan6

1 : 10

Column on Grid G - Top5

STRUCTURAL COLUMN DETAILS.


FOR TENDER 22.08.11


Level G1200

Level Ceiling7200

��

��

��

��

��

�

6.1°

��

��

��

��

��

��

Supply Grille Supply Grille Supply Grille Supply Grille Supply Grille Supply Grille Supply Grille

4

A64.04.0a

5

A64.04.0a

6

A64.02.0a

4

A64.00.0a

5

A64.01.0a

Sim

4

A64.00.0a

4

A54.03.0a

sim

3

A54.03.0a

3

A64.10.0a

6

A54.11.0a

Sim

Triangular cut to fit WEBFORGE Lockline sunscreenvertical panel B pattern mesh grill above Alucobondupto 6m flat ceiling.Note Base of Sunscreen is to follow slope of ceiling.Allow a Provisional Sum of $5000 for supply and install

7 x HOLYOAKE Jet Diffusers in East wall.Allow extra value for cutting in neatly around 250mm diaunits.

25mm TIMARU BLUESTONE wall tile adhesivefixed to face of stone. Tile to finish flush with stone.

OAMARU STONE returns into opening.

12mm FIBROUS PLASTER.Stop to LVL 6 and Paint.

150mm powdercoated aluminium flushglaze system(NALCO or Equivalent) c/w 6mm toughened N-70 low e #2 /12as / 8.38 laminated glazing (26mm).

250 x 150 x 8 RHS secondary post to glazingsystem on Main grid lines only.

4mm ALUCOBOND Aluminium Composite Panels 1350mm wide.

12mm Fibrous Plaster perimeter bulkhead and False beamson Grid Lines.

DECORTECH DECORSOUND 3/16 horizontal slotted 18mmTimber Veneer Panels.

10mm toughened Frameless Glass Balustrade c/wPowder coated aluminium MetroGlasstech MGF BA84 base channel (78 W x 84 High)

D06

G11 G10G8

G9

Level Ceiling7200

Level G1200

��

��

��

�

TEXDECOR VINACOUSTIC OXYGEN9001 11 14 acoustic wall covering assupplied by Swinsongroup, upto2968mm from top of skirting.

STOSILENT PANEL 15mm thick+ STOSILENT SUPERFINE 2mmthick plaster with 35mm cavity.Linings to be fixed horz @ 400crswith STO Primary Channel andSTO Direct Fix wall bracket.

10mm Negative detail

10mm Negative detail

12mm TIMARU BLUESTONE TILE onadhesive on 9mm VILLABOARD to baseof wall.

D8

4mm ALUCOBOND AluminiumComposite Panels 1350mm wide x8000mm max length.

12mm Fibrous plaster to recess aboveAlucobond ceiling.

6(A�(+32�7)4�+3;'6)+

'63')�(46��4(�

��

��

�

150mm powdercoated aluminiumflushglaze system (NALCO orEquivalent) c/w 6mm toughenedN-70 low e #2 / 12as / 8.38laminated glazing (26mm).

250 x 150 x 8 RHS secondarypost to glazing system on Maingrid lines only.

4mm ALUCOBOND AluminiumComposite Panels 1350mm wide.

12mm Fibrous Plaster perimeterbulkhead and False beams onGrid Lines.

DECORTECH DECORSOUND3/16 horizontal slotted 18mmTimber Veneer Panels.

1A44.01.0a

6

A54.03.0a

7

A54.03.0a

8

A54.03.0a

4

A54.11.0a

2

A54.11.0a

3

A54.11.0a

1

A64.00.0a

1

A64.00.0a

3

A54.11.0a

1

A54.10.0a7

A64.01.0a

2A64.04.0a

F G H

Level G1200

Level Ceiling7200

��

��

��

��

�

��

3

A54.03.0a

4

A54.03.0a

sim

D07

Reception Desk - Allow a Provisional Sum for Supplyand Installation. Refer to Specification & Schedule.

��

4A64.00.0a

6A64.02.0a

1A64.04.0a

1050 x 590 x 100mm deep OAMARU stone with 50mmair gap held back to wall with STONE CLIP ties @recommended spacings.Note continuous horizontal Shelf angle will be requiredat mid height (3.0m AFFL).

Autex Quietspace Acoustic Panel (AP) 75mm high x 50mmthick cut to fit. Fabric colour to be confirmed.Allow to adhesive fix to 70 x 25mm battens which in turn aretight fit and adhesive to DURAGAL channel.

Oamaru Stone Close fit into channel c/w adhesive.

1A44.03.0a





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A74.01.0a

1 : 50

Interior Elevation - East.2

1 : 50

Interior Elevation - West.3

1 : 50

Interior Elevation - South.1


INTERNAL ELEVATIONS.


FOR TENDER 22.08.11


Level G1200

G11G10G8 G9 G12

1

A94.02.0a

3

A94.03.0a

3

A94.03.0a

1

A94.03.0a

103.700 RL

End

OF

STAG

E 3

BUIL

DIN

G

custom bollardlight fitting.

custom bollard light fitting.Refer to Electrical Consultant documents for full Specification.Base Plate fixing requirements to be confirmed by Lighting supplier.






Double reinforced 190mm block walls to form planter withoverall with (excluding tiles) of 500mm. Allow extra value torake cut block to follow pitch line of path.

Terraced slab with 35mm thick x variable length TIMARUBLUESTONE pavers, cut at back to match slope of ramp andadhesive fixed.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to all Timaru Bluestone, verticaland horz faces.

10mm Timaru Bluestone tile set onto 10mm min cementmortar bed on 20 series blockwork wall.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to all TimaruBluestone, vertical and horz faces.

S.St

eel

Han

drai

l

S.St

eel

Han

drai

l

S.St

eel

Han

drai

l

S.St

eel

Han

drai

l

5

A94.03.0a

44.5 x 1.6mm wall 316 S.Steel handrails welded and polished.

40mm TIMARU BLUESTONE paver on 20mm cement mortarscreeding over insitu concrete steps.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to all Timaru Bluestone,vertical and horz faces.

Apply EQUUS Chevaline admix sealer over face of Concrete Steps and Terrace.Bed tiles to Steps and Terrace on EQUUS Thermexx Adhesive Mortar.

Level G1200

G8G7G6

3

A94.03.0a

103.700 RL

40mm thick TIMARU BLUESTONE paver on 20mmcement mortar screeding on 100mm reinforced concreteslab (D147 mesh 30mm cover) laid to 1:100 fall typically.Slab to be on 25mm sand and compacted AP65 layers.

Double reinforced 190mm block walls to form planter withoverall with (excluding tiles) of 500mm. Allow extra value torake cut block to follow pitch line of path.

Terraced slab with 35mm thick x variable length TIMARU BLUESTONE pavers, cut atback to match slope of ramp and adhesive fixed.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to all Timaru Bluestone, vertical and horz faces.

Allow to make good footpath along entire lengthof boundary.

pitch line (dashed)

top of upstand wall

316 S.Steel 50 x 25 x 4mm thick angle run length to top of terrace on slope.Fix into terrace with 316 S.Steel M8 dynabolts 50mm embedment @ 600crs.Pavers to finish into angle. Tiles to finish on top of angle.

Level G1200

G4G13

40mm thick TIMARU BLUESTONE paver on 20mmcement mortar screed on 100mm reinforced concreteslab (D147 mesh 30mm cover) laid to 1:100 falltypically. Slab to be on 25mm blinding andcompacted AP65 layers.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to all TimaruBluestone, vertical and horz faces.

double reinforced 190mm block walls to formplanter with overall with (excluding tiles) of500mm.

20 series block planter with 400 x 400 x 10mmTIMARU BLUESTONE tiles on 10mm cementmortar to both vertical faces and top of wall.

90 x 32 hardwood slat seat on S.Steelbrackets @ 600crs. Refer to details.

2

A94.02.0a

��

��

4

A94.03.0a

��

��

New 20 series kerb block wall clad in 10mm TIMARU BLUESTONEtiles on 10mm cement mortar - to top and sides.Bevel exposed edge 5mm.Allow extra value for rake cutting block wall to follow slope of path.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to all Timaru Bluestone,vertical and horz faces.

45mm o.dia 316 S.Steel handrail with S.Steel balustrade posts @ 1000crs.Refer to 01 & 04 A94.03 for similar details.

New insitu reinforced concrete steps with 40mm TIMARU BLUESTONE paver on20mm screeded cement mortar bedding.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to all Timaru Bluestone, vertical and horz faces.

Existing Stone wall c/w steel balustrading to remain.Allow to neatly saw cut concrete base of fence and make good andalter balustrading to finish where new steps are indicated to start.

40mm thick Aphalt on compacted AP40 metal laid to suitable falls(1:100) to new sump and existing sump in carpark. Allow to makegood junction between old and existing carpark. Extent of newAsphalt shown shaded. (622m2 total)

8

A94.03.0a





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A94.01.0a

1 : 50

LANDSCAPE - WEST ELEVATION1

1 : 50

LANDSCAPE - WEST ELEVATION (cont)2


1 : 50

LANDSCAPE - SOUTH ELEVATION3 1 : 50

LANDSCAPE - EAST SLOPED PATH & STEPS4

ADDITIONAL NOTES

ALLOW TO INSTALL TO ALL MAIN DOUBLE BLOCK /TILE WALLS TO THE WEST FACADE PROPRIETARY ANTI SKATEBOARD DEVICES @ 1200CRS POSITIONED GENERALLY 50mm FROM THE EDGE AND CENTRED LONGWAYS IN THE TIMARU BLUESTONE TILES.(NOTE CONTRACTOR TO ALLOW TO SUPPLY AND INSTALL 45 UNITS IN TOTAL).PRODUCT TO BE "GRINDERMINDER" ex USA 25mm dia head with 32mm x 12mm embedded stud in Solid stainless steel with a black oxide finish thatgives a soft, matte black appearance.CONTACTGrind To A Halt, Inc. PO Box 221 Elburn, Illinois 60119 http://www.grind2ahalt.com/ Call (630) 365-2375 Fax (630) 365-1075

Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to all Timaru Bluestone, vertical and horz faces.

Apply EQUUS Chevaline admix sealer over face of Concrete Steps and Terrace. Bed tiles to Steps and Terrace on EQUUS Thermexx Adhesive Mortar.

LANDSCAPING - ELEVATIONS & SECTIONS.


FOR TENDER 22.08.11


fallfall

��

��

103.700 RL

fall

PREC

AST

WAL

L

4A64.10.0a

102.450 RL

��

��

D10

��-��

��

D10

D10

D10

D10

��

D10D10

D10

PREC

AST

WAL

L

��

��

��

��

40mm Timaru Bluestone tile set onto 20mm min cementmortar bedding on 20 series blockwork. Allow for 5mmsealant gap between tile and glazing channel.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to all TimaruBluestone, vertical and horz faces.

20 series all cells filled concreteblockwork with typically HD10 @400crs each way.

400 x 400 x 40mm thick TimaruBluestone Pavers on 20mm cementmortar screeding on 100mm thickreinforced (D147 Mesh 30mm cover)concrete slab. fall

20 MPa footing to retaining wall.

HD10 @ 400crs.

HD10 vertical bars @ 400crs.

�

100mm perforated drainage behind wall.

Filter fabric

Damp Proof membrane and protective cover(12mm polystyrene or similar approved)

HD10 horz bars @ 400crs - lap 750mm.

0.25mm polythene DPM under slab on25mm blinding layer.

150mm thick layers of AP65 compacted granularfill. Compact after each layer.

Free draining metal to back of wall.

��#%

HD10 vertical bars @ 400crs.��

��

10mm Timaru Bluestone tile set onto10mm min cement mortar bedding on20 series blockwork wall.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" toall Timaru Bluestone, vertical and horzfaces.

400 x 400 x 40mm thick Timaru Bluestone Pavers on20mm cement mortar screeding on 100mm thick reinforced(D147 Mesh 30mm cover) concrete slab.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to all TimaruBluestone, vertical and horz faces.

D10

fall fall

��

103.700 RL

4A64.10.0a

102.450 RL

��

��

��

D10

��-��

��

D10

D10

��

D10D10 D10

D10

��

��

��

��

40mm Timaru Bluestone tile set onto 20mmmin cement mortar bedding on 20 seriesblockwork. Allow for 5mm sealant gapbetween tile and glazing channel.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to allTimaru Bluestone, vertical and horz faces.

20 series all cells filled concreteblockwork with typically HD10 @400crs each way.

400 x 400 x 40mm thick TimaruBluestone Pavers on 20mm cementmortar on 100mm thick reinforced(D147 Mesh 30mm cover) concreteslab.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" toall Timaru Bluestone, vertical and horzfaces.

fall

20 MPa footing to retaining wall.

HD10 @ 400crs.

HD10 vertical bars @ 400crs.

��

��#%

�


Filter fabric

Damp Proof membrane andprotective cover(12mm POLYSTYRENE or similarapproved)

HD10 horz bars @ 400crs - lap 750mm.

0.25mm polythene DPM underslab on 25mm blinding layer.

150mm thick layers of AP65compacted granular fill. Compactafter each layer.

Free draining metal to back of wall.

HD10 vertical bars @ 400crs.��

��

10mm Timaru Bluestone tile set onto10mm min cement mortar bedding on 20series blockwork wall.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to allTimaru Bluestone, vertical and horz faces.

D10

D10 D10

��

7�2)('





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A94.02.0a0 FOR SCHEDULING 01-06-11

1 : 10

Landscaping - Glazed retaining wall.1 1 : 10

Landscaping - Glazed retaining wall return.2

LANDSCAPING - DETAILS.


FOR TENDER 22.08.11


D10

HD10 @ 300crs each way

0.25mm polythene DPM under steps, footpath and ramp on25mm blinding layer.

150mm thick layers of AP65 compacted granular fill. Compactafter each layer.

20mPa insitu concrete steps and terrace.

��

103.700 RL

102.450 RLD10

D10

D10

D10

D10

D10

D10

��

��

��

�

��

400 x 400 x 40mm thick Timaru Bluestone Pavers on 20mm cement mortarscreeding on 100mm thick reinforced (D147 Mesh 30mm cover) concreteslab. Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to all Timaru Bluestone.

��

G13

20 series block wall follows rake of stair. Allow to cut blocks to suite.

2

A94.03.0a

4-M10 316 S.Steel Trubolts min100mm embedment with Headremoved and replaced with 316S.Steel Dome head.

400 wide x tread depth x 40mm TIMARU BLUESTONE tiles onEQUUS Thermexx Adhesive Mortar over insitu concrete steps.Allow to 5mm bevel edge nosing of tile and form 3-5mm wide x5mm deep slots full width of tile to provide step edgeidentification. Slots to be at 20mm crs.

��

Allow to profile tiles to side of Terrace.Note Terrace tiles to over lap sufficently to allowto conceal top of cut tile (approx 20mm overalp)

HD10 link bars @ 400crs with 400 lap to mesh.

HD10 @ 300crs.

��

��

4 x sets of 45mm o.dia 316 S.Steel handrails.

10mm thick x 110 dia 316 S.Steel base plate with4 holes to take 316 S.S M10 bolts.5FWAR to post base.

30 x 10 316 S.Steel flat between 50 x 10S.S flat each side to form balustrade post.4 FBW plates together.

10x10mm 316 S.S square rods4FWAR to top of 30 x 50 x 10mmcap and u/side of S.Steel Handrail.

6

A94.03.0a

44.5 x 1.6mm wall 316 S.Steelhandrail welded and polished.


Filter fabric

Free draining metal to trench.

�

��

��

01riser

02

03

04

05

06

Apply Sealer over face of concrete steps - EQUUSChevaline admix sealer.Bed tiles on EQUUS Thermexx Adhesive Mortar.

G13

D10

D10


0.25mm polythene DPM under steps,footpath and ramp on 25mm blinding layer.

150mm thick layers of AP65 compactedgranular fill. Compact after each layer.

20mPa insitu concrete slab.

400 x 400 x 40mm thickTimaru Bluestone Paverson 20mm cement mortarscreeding on 100mm thickreinforced (D147 Mesh30mm cover) concreteslab.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to all TimaruBluestone, vertical and horzfaces.103.700 RL

102.450 RL

D10

D10

D10

D10

D10

��

��

��

��

��

Terraced slab with 35mm thick x variable lengthTIMARU BLUESTONE pavers, cut at back tomatch slope of ramp and adhesive fixed.

��

��

fall

��

D10

D10D10

fall

D10

��

#%

��

Raked concrete block / TimaruBluestone wall beyond.

D10 @ 400crs, 400mm lap.

316 S.Steel 50 x 25 x 4mm thick angle run length to top of terrace on slope.Fix into terrace with 316 S.Steel M8 dynabolts 50mm embedment @ 600crs.Pavers to finish into angle. Tiles to finish on top of angle.

R10 U-Bars @ 400crs.

R10 @ 400crs.

400 x 550 x 40mm Timaru Bluestone tiles set onto 20mm cement mortar screedingon 20 series blockwork. Allow to chamfer exposed edge 5mm each side.Apply AQUAMIX "ENRICH-N-SEAL" to all Timaru Bluestone, vertical and horz faces.

��

��

�

��

Apply Sealer over face of concrete - EQUUS Chevaline admix sealer.Bed tiles on EQUUS Thermexx Adhesive Mortar.

7A94.03.0a

100mm perforateddrainage behind wall.

Filter fabric

Free draining metal to trench.

��

��

D10D10

D10

D10

��

�

7�2)('

��

��

��

�

��

��

��

�

1

A94.03.0a3

A94.03.0a

��

��

��

�

��

30 x 10 316 S.Steel flat between50 x 10 S.S flat each side to formbalustrade post.4 FBW plates together.

10mm thick x 110 dia 316 S.Steelbase plate with 4 holes to take 316S.S M10 bolts.5FWAR to post base.

D12D12

D12

�

��

��

D12

��

��

� ��

��

��

20 series block planter with 400 x 400 x 10mmTIMARU BLUESTONE tiles on on 10mm cementmortar to both vertical faces and top of wall.

90 x 32 KWILA hardwood slat seat to entireperimeter of block planter and fixed from undersidewith csk square drive 8g x 1 through predrilledholes at centres to suite timber slat layout.

��

316 S.Steel 40x40x5 anglebrackets @ 600crs embeddedinto blockwork.

��

��

HD10 link bars @ 400crs

R10 @ 300crs.

HD10 @ 400crs.

400 x 400 x 40mm thick Timaru BluestonePavers on 20mm cement mortar screeding on100mm thick reinforced (D147 Mesh 30mmcover) concrete slab.

D10


0.25mm polythene DPM under steps, footpathand ramp on 25mm blinding layer.

150mm thick layers of AP65 compacted granularfill. Compact after each layer.

20mPa insitu concrete steps

��

102.500 RLD10

D10

D10

��

��

�

��

400 x 400 x 40mm thick Timaru Bluestone Paverson 20mm cement mortar screeding on 100mm thickreinforced (D147 Mesh 30mm cover) concrete slab.

��

4-M10 316 S.Steel Truboltsmin 100mm embedment withHead removed and replacedwith 316 S.Steel Dome head.

400 wide x tread depth x 40mm TIMARUBLUESTONE tiles on EQUUS Thermexx AdhesiveMortar over insitu concrete steps.Allow to 5mm bevel edge nosing of tile and form3-5mm wide x 5mm deep slots full width of tile toprovide step edge identification. Slots to be at20mm crs.

��

��

��

10mm thick x 110 dia S.Sbase plate with 4 holes totake M10 bolts. 5FWAR topost base.

30 x 10 316 S.Steel flat between 50 x10 S.S flat each side to form balustradepost. 4 FBW plates together.

10x10mm S.S square rods 4FWARto side of 30 x 50 x 10mm cap andu/side of S.Steel Handrail.

6

A94.03.0a

44.5 x 1.6mm wall 316 S.Steelhandrail welded and polished.

01riser

02

��

�

��

D10

D10 @ 400crs, 400mm lap.

��

Terraced slab with 35mm thick xvariable length TIMARUBLUESTONE pavers, cut at backto match slope of ramp andadhesive fixed.

316 S.Steel 50 x 25 x 4mm thick anglerun length to top of terrace on slope.Fix into terrace with 316 S.Steel M8dynabolts 50mm embedment @ 600crs.Pavers to finish into angle. Tiles to finishon top of angle.

400 x 550 x 40mm Timaru Bluestonetiles set onto 20mm cement mortarscreeding on 20 series blockwork.Allow to chamfer exposed edge 5mmeach side.

Waterproof black mastic sealant.

D12 D12

D12

�

��

��

D12

New 20 series kerb block wall clad in 10mmTIMARU BLUESTONE tiles on 10mm cementmortar - to top and sides.Bevel exposed edge 5mm.Allow extra value for rake cutting block wall tofollow slope of path.

��

HD10 link bars @ 400crs

R10 @ 300crs.

HD10 @ 400crs.

5() 56�7�2)('

400 x 400 x 40mm thick Timaru BluestonePavers on 20mm cement mortarscreeding on 100mm thick reinforced(D147 Mesh 30mm cover) concrete slab.

��





CAD REFERENCE.

DATE.

CAD PLOT SCALE.

OF.



R.Tongue

DPG 2374 A94.03.0a

1 : 10

Landscaping - Steps1 1 : 10

Landscaping - Terrace.31 : 10

Landscaping - Steps Cross Section2

1 : 2

Stair - balustrade section6

1 : 10

Landscaping - Planter51 : 10

Landscaping - Steps 24


1 : 2

Terrace - tile edge7

LANDSCAPING - DETAILS.


FOR TENDER 22.08.11


1 : 10

Landscaping - sloped wall to carpark8